Home

Roland BK-5 Electronic Keyboard User Manual

1.
2. S Ula i D CURSOR VALUE lt Use MEMORY BK 5 Roland gt ci ENTER PERFORMANCE KEY MUTE MEMORY BACKING KEYBOARD O O O OO O SELECT LIST WRITE Hoa sansa RHYTHM FAMILY TEMPO LOCK oe PoP DISCO JAZZ BALL LATIN TRADIT TAP SYNC VOLUME ROCK DANCE BLUES ROOM WORLD 1 WORLD2 TEMPO lt gt START PART ON OFF T F F ONE MELODY MENU EXIT SPLIT LWR up2 TOUCH INTELL NUMERIC da a tock rn n PS TONE BALANCE AUDIO BASS AUTO VARIATION START PIANO ORGAN EGUITAR STRINGS SAX PAD PERCUSS REC INV FILL IN INTRO ENDING STOP E PIANO ACCORD BASS AGUITAR VOCAL BRASS SYNTH ETHNIC SFX DRUM BACKING esoe DO Cai 4 gt la N ee e Gam 1 2 3 4 lt gt ru o 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 E cp Xa ME mpa spur v JH 7 HE 7 IE W THE E 7 HE 7 TE H L IG UN I L TEE amp UX m UX OX UX UX AL OX VAN I IX JAN AN OX amp OX d A US UX UX H CAS CA GA JAN J JAN OX OX ZAN OX VAN OX OX r g 3 K 53 BACKING KEYBOARD Owner s Manual Roland WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this device to rain or moisture For EU countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directive EM
3. 75 I UN 109 Intell Threshold 64 PAS te ae sawaan maang eat a 63 Idee e sarata acra ae n aa aaa 109 Internal Lyrics 55 Orato gedaan saree aed ETT ETE 92 J JAZZ simpatia gana wera ads 72 E Ca NAPAPA ra ane 50 UE 50 K Ko ote gaa 41 62 75 83 110 PRA CA sr aere 103 Rhythm Composer 93 Key OUCH EE 57 KEYBOARD cette iena 27 Keyboard part 24 56 61 L LANGUAGE iw oe ad ceai atom a cata 70 Kage da ET 97 Master Volume Rx Mastering Tools Melody Intelligence Melody Intelligent Modulation Assign Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland NA CA PP 49 Performance 48 Move Event 102 RE E E 19 Music Assistant 45 Mute 61 76 Rhythm tracks 87 My Performances 112 Recordings 53 112 NO MALU AA 112 TONG EE 112 N Nearest 96 100 Note to Arranger 108 NTA 108 NTS Re 67 NUME lt 5 serene oda ds e aia 25 O OC Cocaine eee 76 83 OMIM e eee deri 59 ere 109 One fouch 31 Be EE E it ia died 70 SE 33 Kiel 66 Original 69 74 75 P P 10 113 AA 67 Pah Delay cao naam bake eam ka 75 KOPA 57 76 82 Parameters 109 Part Switch 109 Part WI RK o aata ossai 107 Part SWITCH IX casa teed a ds 107 Parts Volume 43 Patterns 81
4. Disco Dance This button is used to switch the Bass Inversion function on or off While the button Is dark the rhythm s bass part always plays the fundamental of your notes or chords Example if you play a chord CEES K consisting of the notes C E and G which is recog nized as a C major chord the bass part plays a C If you press a different RHYTHM FAMILY button the If the BASS INV button lights the rhythm s bass display shows the beginning of the associated list part uses the lowest notes of the chords you play but the indicator of the associated family button Example if you play a chord consisting of the notes doesn t light E G and C still a C major chord the bass part plays an E This function therefore gives you more artistic OP o 5 E a licence MI AUTO FILL IN l sane GM nn 2 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the desired rhythm then press ENTER SELECT to confirm your selection The indicator of the selected family button lights When this button lights the BK 5 plays a transition before switching to the newly selected VARIATION pattern Example if the VARIATION 1 pattern is run ning pressing the 4 button will not switch to that pattern right away the BK 5 first plays a fill in to announce the new song section The duration of the fill ins transitions can be halved if you like See Fill In Half Bar on p 63 You can also speed up or slow down playb
5. 69 V Link Visual Control 113 Volume 43 Instrument 56 61 76 Makeup Tools 75 Metronome 67 W NUO EE 84 Ve sata ei art i 19 52 WOIE ee rin ard Aaa i der PARTA 69 VA EENG 55 WIMA aaa mma NG Soa Ee oe 46 HAM EEN 80 SONG na eier 80 USE estar auc du a n reni 72 73 Z ENER 62 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland 147 Information EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar Al Askalany Street ARD E1 Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 022 417 1828 REUNION MARCEL FO YAM Sarl 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA T O M S Sound amp Music Pty Ltd 2 ASTRON ROAD DENVER JOHANNESBURG ZA 2195 SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 417 3400 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd Royal Cape Park Unit 24 Londonderry Road Ottery 7800 Cape Town SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 799 4900 CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai 200090 CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd BEIJING OFFICE 3F Soluxe Fortune Building 63 West Dawang Road Chaoyang District Beijing CHINA TEL 010 5960 2565 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music 11 F Silvercord Tower 1 30 Canton Rd Tsimshatsui Kowloon HONG KONG TEL 852 2737 7688 Parsons Music Ltd 8th Floor Railway Plaza 39 Chatham Road South T S T Kowloon HONG KONG TEL 852 2
6. Connecting a MIDI device The BK 5 can transmit and receive performance data when connected to an external MIDI device which enables the two devices to control each other s perfor mance For example one device can play or switch sounds on the other device MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface It is a universal standard for exchanging musical perfor mance data among electronic musical instruments and computers The BK 5 s MIDI connectors allow it to transmit perfor mance data to and receive such data from other devices You can use the BK 5 in a wide range of ways by connecting external devices to these connectors WE Connection example Before making connections with other devices you must turn down the volume of all devices and turn off the power to avoid malfunctions or speaker dam age Playing the BK 5 s sounds from your MIDI sequencer MIDI sound module sequencer Using the BK 5 to play your MIDI sound module Certain instruments like an FR 3x V Accordion only have one MIDI socket whose function IN or OUT needs to be set with one of its MIDI parameters To control the BK 5 from such an instrument you need to set the latter to transmit MIDI messages OUT WE MIDI channels MIDI provides sixteen channels numbered 116 Even if two MIDI devices are connected you won t be able to select or play sounds on the other device unless both devices are set to the same MIDI channel The BK 5
7. Setting Off On 12 5 127 12 5 127 12 5 127 12 5 127 12 5 127 12 5 127 Explanation Switch off all instru ments except the selected instrument Use this parameter to set the volume of the selected drum instru ment Use this parameter to set the reverb send level of the selected drum instrument The effect itself can be changed on the Com mon page Use this parameter to set the chorus send level of the selected drum instrument The effect itself can be changed on the Com mon page Use this parameter to set the stereo place ment of the selected drum instrument 0 means no change negative values shift the instrument towards the left and positive values shift it towards the right This parameter allows vou to modify the velocity range of the drum instrument in question 0 means that the recorded val ues are left untouched a negative setting reduces all velocity values by the same amount leaving varia tions intact A posi tive setting shifts all velocity values in a positive direction Use this parameter to tune the selected drum instrument higher or lower 0 means that the pitch is left unchanged Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Makeup Tools rhythms and SMF Parameter Instr Equalizer Global Instr Off Edit EQ Press the ENTER SELECT but ton Undo Changes Press the ENTER SELECT but ton Setting Explanation Global T
8. 26 D1 PopSnare38 2 FingerSnaps2 28 E1 909 HandClap 29 F1 808 Clap EIS AN Hand clap2 31 G1 909 HandClap Ey cia Pedal Hi Hat 33 Al GospelHClp1 ELEI snare Roll 1 35 B1 Pop Kick 35 36 C2 PopKick 36 ES Yam Pop Stick1 38 D2 PopSnare38 1 Eet Snare Ghost 40 E2 PopSnare40 1 41 F2 Flam Tom 41 wa Pa Pop Hi Hati 43 G2 Tom 43 SEL Z Pop Hi Hat 45 A2 Flam Tom 45 Pop Hi Hat3 47 B2 Tom47 48 C3 Ham Tom 50 Ci Me ER Pop Cymbal2 50 D3 Tom 50 Pop Ride1 52 E3 Pop Cymbal 53 F3 PopRide2 oY Mae ER Tambourine 55 G3 Splash Cym let ER ChaChaCowb 57 A3 CrashCymbal2 S pb3 Vibraslap 59 B3 RockRideCym1 60 C4 NewHiBongo Che CM NewLoBongo 62 D4 _ NewCongaSlp NewCongaOp 64 E4 NewLoConga 65 F4 Timbal Hi clei ai Timbal Lo 67 G4 Agogo 1 68 G 4 14090 69 A4 Newshaker2 Newshaker1 71 B4 ShrtWhistle 72 C5 LongWhistle LES ER Quide1 74 D5 Quide2 Letz Claves 76 E5 Woodblock 77 F5 Woodblock vit Mute Cuica 79 G5 Open Cuica GAR GER MuteTriangl 81 A5 OpenTriangl CS Bb5 HE 83 B5 Jingle Bell E 1 F 1 PC 18 CC32 4 New Rock HipHop Kick1 Jazz Kick 1 Mex Kick Rm Kick 1 Rm Kick 2 HipHop Kick2 TechnoKick1 BassDrumSet HipHop Kick1 909Comp Kick St Kick 1 JazzKick Rock Kick Cymbal Roll Rock Stick 2 Rm Snare 1 Rm Snare 2 St Snarel St Snare2 JazzSnare2 JazzSnare1 R amp B Snare RockSnare2_2 RockSnare1_2 PopSnare38 2 Snare Ghost PopSnare38 2 FingerSnaps2 909 H
9. Ga 2 Delete Insert EA EI HEE A abc def ghi G EA EI EI mno pgrs tuw weyz Hold L IR wee aa The name suggestion displayed here depends on the first recording It will however be followed by an incremental number If you want to name your new song proceed with step 2 If you are happy with the name suggested by the BK 5 simply press the WRITE button see step 5 below Use the TONE buttons to select a different character Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the next character position you want to change then use the TONE buttons again Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Recording You can press the NUMERIC button to switch between upper and lower case characters as well as numbers The LWR button can be used to delete the selected character The UP2 button allows you to insert a character Repeat steps 2 and 3 to complete the name Press the WRITE button its indicator flashes to save your recording under the new name and to return to the main page If the USB memory already contains a file of that name you will be asked whether you want to over write it Save a A file having this name already exists Owerwrite In this case select YES by first rotating the CURSORWALUE dial and then pressing the ENTER SELECT button to replace the old file with the new one the old file will be lost Otherwise select NO and press ENTER SELECT to return to the page
10. India India India India India No Name 275 Punjabi 276 Roopak 277 Sam e Gazal 278 Sindhi Lada 279 South Indian 280 South Masti 281 Melayu 282 Pop Indonesia 283 DangdutKoplo 284 DangdutStd 285 Kolintang 286 PopKeroncong 287 PopMinang 288 PopSunda 289 ThaiChaCha 290 I SanChaCha 1 291 l SanChaCha 2 292 ThaiOffBeat 293 Guaracha 294 Rumwong 295 l SanRumwong 296 Serng 297 SlowRumwong 298 TaLoong 299 SongMai 300 Chinese Blue 301 Chinese Bossa 302 Chinese Jazz Pop 303 Chinese Techno 304 Chinese Teen Funk 305 2RTechno Rhythm division program change numbers CCOO CC32 16 41 16 42 16 43 16 44 16 45 16 46 16 93 16 94 Ip 47 16 48 16 49 16 50 16 51 16 52 16 89 16 81 16 82 16 9O 16 80 16 84 16 83 16 85 16 86 16 88 16 87 16 28 16 29 16 30 16 31 16 32 16 27 India India India India India India Indonesia Indonesia Indonesia Indonesia Indonesia Indonesia Indonesia Indonesia Thailand Thailand Thailand Thailand Thailand Thailand Thailand Thailand Thailand Thailand Thailand China China China China China China The following program change numbers allow you to select the desired rhythm division via MIDI These messages need to be trans mitted on the BK 5 s rhythm channel see Rhythm Rx Chan nel on p 108 If you also need to select a differ ent rhythm be sure to insert the c
11. SELECT button to select the DIVISION field 5 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select 1 one of the Divisions Intro 1 4 Main 154 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 Only one Division can be selected for playback If you like your drum part continue with Saving your rhythm If not record a new version see Get ting ready for the first track on p 82 In that case set the Rec Mode parameter according to what you want to do Replace replace the previous record ing with new data Mix add notes you forgot to record the first time see p 84 Saving your rhythm Make it a habit to save your rhythms as frequently as possible After all if someone decided to switch off your BK 5 now you would lose everything you have pro grammed so far Go to the main Rhythm Composer page and press the MENU button its indicator flashes The display changes to Rhythm Composer Broken Dance CURSOR Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options 2 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select Save and press the ENTER SELECT but ton The display now shows the contents of the My Rhythms folder on the connected USB memory Press the EXIT button if you want to select a differ ent folder Your own rhythms can only be saved to a USB memory If you forgot to connect one the display now shows the mes sage USB Device not inserted If you initialized the RAM memory before recording your first part
12. Int MIDI A muted part can no longer be played via the BK 5 s keyboard or Arranger song player and no longer sends MIDI messages Tx Velocity Your BK 5 is equipped with a velocity sensitive key board and a tone generator capable of responding to velocity messages Use this parameter to switch the transmission TX of velocity messages on or off Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland MIDI parameters If you don t select On specify which velocity value to use instead of the continuous flux The value you set will be used for all notes sent to MIDI OUT USB COMPUTER Parameter Setting Tx Velocity On 10127 Tx SysEx Use this parameter to specify whether On or not Off the BK 5 should send SysEx messages Such messages are not standardized so that each manu facturer can use them ad lib for temporary or per manent changes to the way a part behaves Effects parameters for instance can only be changed via SysEx messages Such messages may slow down playback on external MIDI instruments or yield no effect at all which is why you have the option to switch off their trans mission in the first place Parameter Setting Tx SysEx Off On Tx Data Change This parameter allows you to specify how the original program changes of the songs you play back are transmitted via MIDI The BK 5 may change sound addresses usually CCOO and CC32 values so as to play back all songs with the best possible quality If you switch thi
13. 0003 ClassicPiano 0004 UprightPiano 0005 Brite Piano 0006 Mild Piano 0007 MonoAcPiano 0008 European Pf 0009 Rock Piano 0010 Piano String 0011 Piano Choir 0012 StackedPiano 0013 RD Piano 1 0014 RD Piano 1 w 0015 Dance Piano 0016 Honky tonk 1 0017 Honky tonk 2 0018 Vintage EP1 0019 Vintage EP2 0020 Stage 0021 Pro Stage 0022 Phase EP 0023 Tremolo EP 0024 Dist E Piano 0025 Cho E Piano 0026 E Piano 1 0027 E Piano 2 0028 FM EPiano1 0029 FM EPiano2 0030 FM SA EP 0031 St FM EP 0032 Hard FM EP 0033 EP Legend 0034 EP Phase 0035 St Soft EP 0036 MIDI EPiano1 0037 MIDI EPiano2 0038 Wurly 0039 Clav 1 0040 Clav 2 0041 Phase Clav 0042 JP8000 Clav 0043 Reso Clav 0044 Analog Clav 0045 Harpsichord1 0046 Harpsichord2 0047 Coupled Hps 0048 Harpsi w 0049 Vibraphone 0050 Vibraphone w 0051 Pop Vibe 0052 Marimba w 0053 Xylophone w 0054 Balafon 0055 Balafon SRX 0056 Glockenspiel 0057 Celesta 0058 Pop Celesta 0059 Music Box 1 0060 Music Box 2 0061 Carillon 0062 Tubular bell 0063 Church Bell Organ Accord 0064 B3 Sermon 0065 Blues Perc 0066 All Skate 0067 R amp B B3 0068 HeavyTraffic 4 DIO o O O VIN OO wo Dia 0 CH OO CO o QO DI WIN O N ARR E E E RR RoR RR Fb E E E E E RRR RRR RRR RRR RR E E RR E E RRR RR RRR RR RR RRR RR RRR BR BR BR BR A AAAA PC NNN OO WWW OO 0T AO W 01 DA DA On On OT DA On On OT OT OT OT OT OT OT OT FP PNM WwW OO AN Ar rm ER NEE NO
14. 105 107 106 108 107 108 108 108 109 109 110 108 108 110 111 111 112 112 112 112 113 113 113 111 106 106 110 113 113 114 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland No Name 1028 Rawap 1029 Rawap Trem 1030 Rawap Trem 1031 Gamelan Gong 1032 RAMA Cymbal 1033 Bonang Percuss SFX 1034 Steel Drums 1035 Woodblock 1036 Taiko 1037 Sine Perc 1038 FI Key Click 1039 Elec Perc 1040 Jazz Tom 1041 808 Tom 1042 Melo Tom 1 1043 Real Tom 2 1044 Jungle SD 1045 Synth Drum 1046 Concert BD 1047 Castanets 1048 Perc Bang 1049 Small Taiko 1050 Tabla 1051 Reverse Cym 1052 Cymbal Roll 1053 Wind Chimes 1054 Tambourine 1055 Rev Snare 1056 Rev ConBD 1057 Rev Kick 1 1058 Rev Tom 1059 Agogo 1060 MC 500 Beep 1061 Finger Snaps 1062 Angklung 1063 Bebarongan 1064 Dholak 1065 Stack Hit 1066 Industry Hit 1067 Technorg Hit 1068 Rave Hit 1069 Bit Hit 1070 Bam Hit 1071 Philly Hit 1072 Dist Hit 1073 Impact Hit 1074 Euro Hit 1075 Bass Hit 1076 6th Hit 1077 Techno Hit 1078 Lo Fi Rave 1079 Perc Hit 1080 Shock Wave 1081 Clap Hit 1082 Gun Shot 1083 Machine Gun 1084 Lasergun 1085 Eruption 1086 Big Shot 1087 Explosion 1088 Telephone 1 1089 Telephone 2 1090 Helicopter 1091 Seashore 1092 Horse Gallop 1093 Dog 1094 Bird 1 1095 Bird 2 1096 Growl 1 1097 Growl 2 1098 Kitty 1099 Fancy Animal 1100 Breath Noise 1101 Small Club Tone List KH CC32 PC
15. 14 15 16 In either case the length of the destination track may change to include all data of the source track Use the CURSOR WALUE dial and ENTER SELECT button to set Track to the track you wish to copy the data to AccDrums data can also be copied to other tracks prefera bly Acc1 Acc6 You can only copy ABass data to other ABass tracks If you selected ALL for Source Track this Track parameter is also set to ALL Repeat this operation with the Mode Major Minor 7th ALL and Division parameters Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 ALL If you selected ALL for Source Mode or Source Divi sion this Mode or Division parameter is also set to ALL Use the CURSOR VALUE dial and ENTER SELECT button to select Copy Times and specify the number of copies you need Select 1 to copy the excerpt only once Press the KEY button to audition the desti nation track Use the CURSOR VALUE dial and ENTER SELECT button to specify the target posi tion using the three Into parameters Press the WRITE button its indicator flashes to confirm your settings and edit the data NI Insert Insert allows you to insert space and shift data that lie behind the From position further towards the end of the track this is the exact opposite of Delete The empty measures you create can be filled using the C
16. 5 909 808 Kit TR909 Kick 2 TR909 Kick 4 Urbn Sn Roll TR909 Kick 5 TR909 Snr 3 TR909 Kick 3 TR909 PHH 2 TR909 Kick 6 TR909 Kick 1 TR909 Rim TR909 Snr 1 TR909 Clap 1 TR909 Snr 2 TR909 Tom L TR909 CHH 1 TR909 Tom L TR909 PHH 1 TR909 Tom M TR909 OHH 2 TR909 Tom M TR909 Tom H TR909 Crash TR909 Tom H TR909 Ride 1 TR909 Crash1 TR909 Ride 2 CR78 Tamb 1 TR909 Crash2 JD Sm Metal TR909 Ride 3 Syn Swt Atk3 TR808 Kick 1 TR808 Kick 2 TR808 Rim TR808 Snr 2 TR808 Clap 2 TR808 Snr 4 TR808 Tom L TR808 CHH 1 TR808 Tom L TR808 CHH 2 TR808 Tom M TR808 OHH 1 TR808 Tom M TR808 Tom H TR808Cowbell TR808 Tom H TR606 Cym TR606 OHH 1 TR606 OHH 2 CR78 Tamb 2 CR78 OHH 1 Cowbell Mute CR78 OHH 2 Syn Swt Atk5 TR808 OHH 2 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Drum Sets PC29 CC32 4 TR 606 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 Kick 1 CR78 Kick 2 TR 606 Kick1 TR 707 Kick1 808 Kick TR 808 Kick 808 BassDrum TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909Comp Kick TR 909 Kick2 HipHop Kick2 BassDrumSet TechnoKick1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell CR78 Kick 2 TR 606 Kick1 CR78 Rim 66 Snare 160 707 Claps 66 Snare 260 606 Tom 606 HiHat Cl 606 Tom 606 HiHat Cl 606 Tom 606 HiHat Op 606 Tom 606 Tom 808 Crash 606 Tom 606 Ride Cym ChinaCymbal Ride Bell CR78 Tambour Splash C
17. Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo ReverseCymbl Hoo Hoo MuteTriangl OpenTriangl MuteTriangl OpenTriangl 808 Tom 2 808 Tom 2 808 Tom 2 808 Tom 2 808 Tom 2 808 Tom 2 808 Cowbell 808 Conga 808 Conga 808 Conga Synth Drum 2 Synth Drum 2 Synth Drum 2 Synth Drum 2 Synth Drum 2 Synth Drum 2 R amp B OHHsh R amp B OHH R amp B CHH R amp B OHH TR 909 CHH TR 909 OHH 909 Crash Pop Kick 36 IPopCStk37st IPopSn38st IPopSn40st Pop Hi Hat1 Pop Hi Hat2 Pop Hi Hat3 Tom 43 Tom 47 Tom 50 PC 4 CC32 5 StandardKit1 Bongo Hi Mt Bongo Hi Slp Bongo Lo Slp Bongo Hi Op Bongo Lo Op Cajon 1 Cajon 2 Cajon 3 Vint Snr 2 Shaker 3 WD Rim Mix Kick 1 Mix Kick 2 Mix Kick 3 Mix Kick 4 Mix Kick 5 Mix Clap 1 Wind Chime Tibet Cymbal Crotale PC 5 CC32 5 StandardKit3 Wind Chime SprgDrm Hit Crotale R8 Click Metro Bell DR202 Beep Reverse Cym Xylo Seq Vinyl Noise Mobile Phone Group Snap Laser Siren AnalogKick 3 Old Kick 2 Reg Kick TR909 Snr 4 TR808 Snr 2 Short Snr1 Vint Snr 4 21 PC 6 CC32 5 Kit Euro POP AO 23 24 BO CI 26 Di 28 29 E1 TR707 Kick F1 AnalogKick 1 EIS a Dirty Snr 6 31 G1 FB Kick EK et AN BrushRoll 33 A1 PlasticKick2 EE WOR Reg CHH 2 35 36 B1 Power Kick C2 TR909 Kick 6 TANU WA R amp B ShrtRim1 38 D2 TR909 Snr 3 Ea wa TRI09 Clap 1 40 41 E2 TR909 Snr 4a F2 Sharp L Tom2 CP PAG TR909 CHH 1 43 G2 Sharp L T
18. Clock received from an external clock source Remote Song or rhythm playback waits for a start message to start playback at its own tempo When it receives a stop message playback stops External clock messages are ignored Basic The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using MENU button gt MIDI Edit System Basic Basic Tx n Tx Channel 185 Performance Pe Tx Off Part Switch Tx off Pa off Rx Channel 13 Performance PcRx On Master Volume Rx On ESA The Basic channel is used to receive and transmit Program Change and Bank Select messages for selecting Performances as well as for the reception and transmission of other kinds of messages that are not directly related to a specific MIDI channel If you select another channel messages intended for the Basic parameters might also cause other parameters to change when you don t want them to The following parameters are available here TX Switches the transmission of MIDI messages on the Basic channel on or off Parameter Setting Tx Off On Tx Channel The channel used to transmit MIDI messages Parameter Setting Tx Channel 1 16 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland MIDI parameters Performance PC Tx This parameter is used to enable or disable the trans mission of program change and bank select messages related to Performance selection Parameter Setting Performance PC Tx Off On Part Swi
19. Clock IX tee sati eat a e na 106 Discard recording 85 MIDIA 108 MiDladdress 26 108 PO AA 108 SE 85 Start re amor ata pa 106 GC lt A Err 88 Volume RX 108 Rhythm SMF TrackMute 65 L WAA 63 64 Une 64 Ritardando 63 Kier 72 ROOM 74 Row Displaying 68 Le EE 104 107 abaka NIKAWA KAA 104 KEE 105 Global Limit Low High 109 E 2a Eat rue as are are 104 NOE eeneg 110 MAIS DOSS AAA 110 VOC wa c ace tenes 109 S Ee Ee 86 As Default 65 6101011 EEN 70 MIDISet 110 ENEE gees 85 TA EE 46 SCIE TUNE nc ateu neta RN 66 SEC A ERIN tad AE 37 Second e EE 64 Shift DN Le 96 Short Hr 75 DY EE 75 SMF Clock EEN 106 Position X e sec e ee a 106 Quick Start 68 SAFU SLAB aaa me as 106 ee ra 70 BOND a ma kara 2 nd Basa 71 AA EP 110 Soliana a Kama 61 76 87 Song Parts MIDI 103 Playback 34 Position Pointer 106 Searching 37 SOSTENUTO aa mk aa e pre aa ta 70 Specifications 138 Plinio anid See id 43 PO lo ee races wie has ce ca 72 Be 72 Kata 61 Standard 31 35 71 72 SI EE 100 SONNI PREME AA te aia 46 Storing see Save SIRENO este ia a te dona aa 89 Style see Rhythm Switch COMmpreSSsOr 71 Set 72 Melody Intelligence 64 EE 106 GA Enter Bla Ba ae 106 Synchronization PAG IC EE
20. Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell PC10 CC32 4 Hip Hop Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 Kick 1 CR78 Kick 2 TR 606 Kick1 TR 707 Kick1 808 Kick TR 808 Kick 808 BassDrum TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909Comp Kick TR 909 Kick2 HipHop Kick2 BassDrumSet TechnoKick1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three HipHop Kick1 Std2 Kick2 MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell TR 909 Kick2 909Comp Kick 808 Rimshot Rap Snare 909 HandClap House Snare Brush Tom Closed HiHat Brush Tom Pedal HiHat Brush Tom R8OpenHiHat2 Brush Tom Brush Tom 909 Crash Brush Tom Ride Cymbal ReverseCymbl Ride Bell Shake Tamb Splash Cym 808 Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa 808 Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro CR78 Guiro 808 Clave Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo MuteTriangl Opentriangl 626 Shaker Jingle Bell Backing Keyboard BK 5 Drum Sets 84 C6 PC 43 CC32 4 Brush 2 L R Bell Tree Ae 108 Castanets 86 D6 Mute
21. Fill In Half Bar When this parameter is On the length of the Fill Ins which are played when the AUTO FILL IN button lights is halved Parameter Setting Fill In Half Bar Off On Certain pop songs in 4 4 contain bars that only last two beats The usual place for such a bar is between the first and the second verse Another favorite posi tion for halved bars is at the end of a chorus or the bridge Your BK 5 allows you to faithfully reproduce these anomalies using this function This does not change rhythm playback right away Only when a fill in or another VARIATION pattern starts will the Hill in Half Bar function be activated and play half the number of beats of the accompaniment pattern you selected Fill Ritardando The FILL RIT function is suitable for ballads It causes the next Fill In to slow down ritardando See Tempo Change Fill Rit below for how to set how strongly the tempo should be decreased Parameter Setting Fill Ritardando Off On As the name implies it is only available while the AUTO FILL IN button lights BK 3 segue an sm um mor s Set Fill Ritardando to On Start Arranger playback Press a VARIATION 1 4 button The BK 5 plays a Fill In The tempo slows down while the fill is being played At the end of the fill the rhythm returns to the previously set tempo this is called a tempo Press and hold the EXIT button to return to the main
22. In this case select YES using the CURSOR VALUE dial and press ENTER SELECT to replace the old file with the new one the old file will be lost Otherwise select NO and press the ENTER SELECT button to return to the Save page and enter a dif ferent name Rhythm Composer programming your own rhythms The BK 5 allows you to program your own rhythms Before explaining the details there are a few concepts you need to familiarize yourself with What are rhythms W Patterns Divisions Rhythms are short sequences or patterns of four or eight measures you can select in real time Pattern based accompaniments usually consist of the follow ing elements e The basic groove i e the rhythm that is the backbone of the song e Several alternatives for the basic groove that keep the accompaniment interesting and suggest some kind of evolution or variation Fill Ins to announce the beginning of new parts e An introduction and a closing section ending Programming four to eight patterns for a three minute song is usually enough Just use them in the right order to make them suitable for your song The BK 5 allows you to program 54 different patterns per rhythm some of which can be selected via dedi cated buttons VARIATION 1 4 etc Some Pat terns are selected on the basis of the chords you play in the chord recognition area of the keyboard major minor seventh W Tracks Unlike a drum machine a
23. Jungle Elec Kick 2 Ue Elec Kick 1 D 1 CR78 Kick 1 EBA EB CR78 Kick 2 2 4 1 E F 1 TR 606 Kick1 TR 707 Kick1 5 oi 808 Kick G 1 TR 808 Kick REECE 808 BassDrum 9 A 1 TR 909 Kick uf S Dance Kick 2 7 11 B 1 909Comp Kick 12 CO TR 909 Kick2 ES af HipHop Kick 14 DO BassDrumSet letz TechnoKick1 16 17 EO FO Bounce Voice One si 10 Voice Two 19 GO Voice Three Huet o TR 909 Kick2 21 AO 909Comp Kick PP SA 110 MC 500 Beep 23 24 BO C1 MC 500 Beep Concert Snr VASI e 3 Snare Roll 26 D1 FingerSnaps2 PESTII High Q 28 29 E1 F1 Slap Scrtch Push2 IZ AR Scrtch Pull2 31 G1 Sticks EP ci a Ba SquareClick 33 A1 Mtrnm Click eye sien Mtrnm Bell 35 B1 HipHop Kick1 36 C2 Std2Kick2 Ee ER Side Stick 38 D2 Dance Snare1 eye BE PA HO Claps 2 40 41 EZ F2 House Snare 909 Tom e PAG 606 HiHat CI 43 G2 909 Tom SEL wA JungleHiHat 45 A2 909 Tom SIE 606 HiHat Op 47 B2 909Tom 48 C3 909 Tom Se CR nol Crash 50 D3 909 Tom Net ER Ride Cymbal 52 53 E3 F3 ReverseCymbl Ride Bell oY Mae et 2 Shake Tamb 55 G3 Splash Cym let ER 808 Cowbell 57 A3 Crash Cymb2 SY Sa lee Vibraslap 59 B3 60 C4 Bongo High Ge CM Bongo Low 62 D4 MuteH Conga SES Conga Hi Opn 64 65 E4 F4 Conga Lo Opn High Timbale clei 74M LOW Timbale 67 G4 Agogo GW C
24. M0011 E MODE PISO sr reet You can also start recording using an optional footswitch connected to the SWITCH EXPRESSION socket See Start Stop on p 69 You could start by playing only the bass drum part If you specified the track length before recording the Rhythm Composer jumps back to the beginning of the pattern after the set number of measures The second time around you could add the snare drum the third time the HiHat and so on When recording another part ABass Acc6 do everything you would do during a live performance add modulation Pitch Bend and to use an optional hold pedal connected to the HOLD PEDAL jack 2 Press START STOP again to stop recording Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Rhythm Composer programming your own rhythms Auditioning your rhythm and adding more tracks 1 Press the START STOP button to listen to your track The main Rhythm Composer page contains two parameters that allow you to select the pattern you want to audition Here s how to select it Rhythm Comp Broken Dance M0011 dd ale ges Dit Drum Major Imtrol SISI oppun RERSZS ACCI DC Ce ACCS AcCC4 ACCS ACCE TAP Hold 2 Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the MODE parameter then press the ENTER SELECT button 3 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select Major Minor or 7th Only one mode can be selected for playback 4 Use the CURSOR VALUE dial and ENTER
25. MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell CR78 Kick 2 CR78 Kick 1 CR78 Rim CR78 Snare 1 707 Claps CR78 Snare 2 78 TOM CR 78HiHatCl 78 TOM 606 HiHat Cl 78 TOM CR 78HiHatOp 78 TOM 78 TOM 808 Crash 78 TOM 606 Ride Cym ChinaCymbal Ride Bell CR78 Tambour Splash Cym CR78 Cow 909 Crash Vibraslap Ride Cymbal CR78 HiBongo CR78 LoBongo 808 Conga 808 Conga 808 Conga High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa CR78 Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro CR78 Guiro CR78 Clv Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo CR78 M Beat CR78 M Beat 626 Shaker Jingle Bell PC 64 CC32 4 V VoxDrum HipHop Kick Jazz Kick 1 Voice Kick Rm Kick 1 Rm Kick 2 HipHop Kick2 TechnoKick1 BassDrumSet HipHop Kick1 909Comp Kick St Kick 1 JazzKick NewRockKik Cymbal Roll Rock Stick 2 Rm Snare 1 Rm Snare 2 St Snare1 St Snare2 NewJzSn2 NewJzSn1 R amp B Snare RockSnare2_2 RockSnare1_2 PopSnare38 2 Snare Ghost1 PopSnare38 2 FingerSnaps2 909 HandClap 808 Clap Hand clap2 909 HandClap Pedal Hi Hat GospelHClp1 Voice Snare Voice Kick Voice Kick Voice Stick Voice Snare Voice Stick Voice Snare Voice Snare Voice Hi Hat Voice Tom Voice Hi Hat Voice Tom Voice Hi Hat Voice Tom Voice Tom Voice Hi Hat Voice Tom Voice Ride VoxCymbal1 Voice Cymbal Voice Tambou Voice Cymbal Voice Perc Voice Cymbal Vibraslap AfAahhh NewH
26. Ohkawa H kotsuzumi L Kotsuzumi Open Surdo Mute Surdo Conga Lo Opn Tabla_Tun Tabla_Tun Harmess bell1 Harmess bell2 Harmess bell3 CembaloEnding CembaloFree Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland PC 65 CC32 4 Or R amp B Tabla Tik 2 Rek Raka Rek Dom Rek Trill Rek Tak 1 Rek Rim Rek Brass 1 Rek Tok Rek Brass 2 Rek Tak 2 Rek Sak Rek Tik Mazhar Dom Mazhar Tak Mazhar Sak Mazhar Brass Sagat Mid Sagat Hi Sagat Closed Sagat Sak Dofs Tak Dofs Dom Dofs Sak Dofs Rim 1 Dofs Rim 2 Dofs Dom st TablaNurDom Dofs Sak st TablaNurRim TablaNurTak TablaNurSak BassSlideFX BassSlapFX ZaghroutaSm2 Zir 1 ZaghroutaEd2 NewHiBongo NewLoBongo NewCongaSlp NewCongaOp NewLoConga Timbal Hi Timbal Lo Hager 1 PC 66 CC32 4 Or Techno Tabla Tik 2 Rek Raka Rek Dom Rek Trill Rek Tak 1 Rek Rim Rek Brass 1 Rek Tok Rek Brass 2 Rek Tak 2 Rek Sak Rek Tik Mazhar Dom Mazhar Tak Mazhar Sak Mazhar Brass Sagat Mid Sagat Hi Sagat Closed Sagat Sak Dofs Tak Dofs Dom Dofs Sak Dofs Rim 1 Dofs Rim 2 Dofs Dom st TablaNurDom Dofs Sak st TablaNurRim TablaNurTak TablaNurSak BassSlideFX BassSlapFX ZaghroutaSm2 Zir 1 ZaghroutaEd2 NewHiBongo NewLoBongo NewCongaSlp NewCongaOp NewLoConga Timbal Hi Timbal Lo Hager 1 Drum Sets PC 117 CC32 1 Oriental 1 Sagat Mid Tabl Noueri Dom 1 Sagat High Tabl Noueri Tak 1 Sagat Sak Hager Zir Nakrazan A Zaghrouta 1 Loop Nakrazan B Zaghrouta 2 End Za
27. On Rx Transpose Use this parameter to specify whether or not the BK 5 should transpose the MIDI note messages it receives Parameter Setting Rx Transpose Off On Soft Thru Select On if the BK 5 should transmit all MIDI mes sages it receives using its MIDI OUT socket Parameter Setting Soft Thru Off On Visual Control TxCh This parameter allows you to set the MIDI transmit channel for the Visual Control function The BK 5 does not receive Visual Control messages By default this channel is set to 16 Parameter Setting Visual Control TxCh Save MIDI Set This function allows you to save your changes to a User memory for quick recall This function can be selected using the WRITE button while the MIDI page is displayed Local On MIDI Set keyi Rhythm Edit Rhythm Farts Edit Tone Parts Edit Song Parts Edit System DEER ell omg Il ENTER 1 Edit the desired MIDI parameters Edit Rhythm Parts Edit Song Parts Edit Tone Parts Edit System 2 Press the WRITE button 110 The display changes to CURSOR Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the MIDI Set where you want to save your settings User1 User8 Press the ENTER SELECT button to confirm A confirmation message informs you that the MIDI Set has been saved If you change the MIDI settings after loading a User set the BK 5 alerts you to the fact that you may need to save t
28. PC 13 CC32 5 Asia Menu Hyoshigi Hyoshigi 2 Kane Kane Side Atarigane Kwaengwari f Kwaengwari p KwaengwariMt Mokugyo 1 Mokugyo 2 Ohkawa Ohkawa 2 Shimedaiko 2 Sime Taiko Taiko Tsuzumi 2 Hi Tsuzumi 2 mf Tsuzumi 2 p Tsuzumi Hi Tsuzumi Lo Wadaiko Wadaiko Rim Ho Yoh iYooh Yyoo Dude Buk Buk Rim Changgo Asian Gong 1 Asian Gong 2 Gamelan Gong Asian Gong 3 Asian Gong 4 Asian Gong 6 Asian Gong 7 Ban Gu 1 Ban Gu2 Ban Gu 3 Ban Gu 4 GuHi Gu Roll HuYinLuoH Mt HuYinLuoH Op HuYinLuoL Mt HuYinLuoL Op Nao Bo Xiao Bo Asian Gong 5 Shou Luo 1 Shou Luo 2 Shu Ban 1 Shu Ban 2 Shu Gu Shu Gu Rim Tang Gu Mt Tang Gu Op BaliCym Cls BaliCym Opn Ceng Ceng Chenchen Cls Chenchen Opn Kopyak Mt Kopyak Op Finger Cym Ramacymbal Jaw Harp Opn Jaw Harp Wow Backing Keyboard BK 5 Drum Sets o O O T SE N Y ef VI DN py n m kg T ENEN i N P DO Q 9 A 1 10 Bb 1 11 B 1 12 CO 13 C 0 14 DO 15 D 0 EO FO 18 F 0 19 GO 20 G 0 21 AO 22 BbO 23 BO 24 C1 25 CHI 26 Di 27 D 1 28 E1 29 F1 30 F 1 31 G1 32 G 1 33 Al 34 Bb1 35 B1 ch Na 36 C2 Bebarongan 1 Ee PI Bebarongan 2 38 D2 Bebarongan 3 KE 40 E2 41 P2 42 F 2 43 G2 44 G 2 45 A2 46 Bb2 47 B2 48 G 49 C 3 50 D3 51 D 3 52 E3 53 F3 54 F 3 55 G3 Ge Ges 57 A3 REG 59 B3 60 C4 61 C 4 62 D4 63 D 4 64 E4 65 F4 66 F 4 67 G4 _68_G 4
29. RAM Hard disk Display colors Others 140 Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista This does not work with the 64 bit edition of Windows Vista Microsoft Windows 7 Pentium Celeron processor 1 GHz or higher 512 MB or more 2 MB or more 800 x 600 or higher 65 536 colors 16 bit High Color or more CD ROM drive Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland MIDI Implementation Chart 22 MIDI Implementation Chart Backing Keyboard Date November 2011 Model BK 5 Version 1 00 Basic Default 1 16 1 16 Channel Changed 1 16 Off 1 16 Off Default Mode 3 Mode 3 Message Mode 3 4 M 1 Mode 3 4 M 1 Altered v iti Note 0 127 0 127 Number True Voice Weg 0 127 Velocit Note ON O O y Note OFF X Xx After Key s O 1 Touch Ch s O 4 o O Pitch Bend 0 3 Bank Select Modulation Portamento Time Data Entry Volume Panpot Expression C1 Hold 1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Hold 2 Resonance Realease Time Attack Time Cutoff Decay Time Vibrato Rate Vibrato Depth Vibrato Delay Portamento Control Effect 1 Depth Effect 3 Depth 98 99 NRPN LSB MSB 100 101 RPN LSB MSB Program Song Position Pointer Song Sel Tune 2 1 5 8 7 10 11 16 64 65 66 67 Control 69 Change 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 84 91 93 Reverb Chorus O O0 O OO OO OO OO OO OO OO O OOO O O OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO DOO O ZO ol System Common System Cloc
30. RE e Se 17 26 Pedal 18 EKPreSSIONn 58 Switch 69 Pedal Exp Down Up 58 Perc Mute 76 OC sese 70 Perform Next Song 68 Performance 45 Edit 56 MO AA WG 66 list 45 ia 107 PCTK 107 Photos Background 51 Pianisti PAN 62 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Index Pictures Background 51 Pics eine 79 Pitch Bend 59 Place E VERII EE 102 AG ai asa AA 75 NEE 67 Play All Songs 38 POl ae s n ea adn ci rd fa a a 59 Ke 72 Portamento 70 Mode 59 re TEE 59 Position Pointer 106 POWER EE 20 Preset Compressor 71 Bee EEN 72 Protecting settings 54 Q Quantize Rhythm Composer 88 CSI ca i AA 68 R Kr e EE 59 Rate Vibrato 60 BE AAP 72 RE E Ee cec at dia i 52 67 Audio Level 68 Audio Sync 68 Rec Mode 84 REC TAC WW 82 83 Record Vie E 84 KAEO AA 84 Keele 146 EE 52 BEE 109 ele rise wa wa od 60 71 77 RENAME Luini 36 47 Replace ROC aaa ee meee 84 Userrhythm 92 Reset Start acis wamama mawa 69 RESOLUTION 89 Resonance 59 77 Reverb 56 76 82 DE eeneg 75 SEMU AA 61 INPO sandra A re aa akes 14 TAG E A se AA ARE 27
31. Selecting clips and banks on an optional MIDI Visual Control V LINK device 1 Switch on the Visual Control function 2 Press a key in the highest octave C 6 C7 to select the desired clips on the external MIDI Visual Control V LINK compatible device Roland kent ben ben m ken bes ke bes La a Va kk e i 5 Ze aa Clip selection via MIDI Visual Control V LINK Key MIDI Visual Control V LINK MIDI message C 6 Control the image bank BF 00 00 Bank Select D6 Switch images Clip 1 CF 00 D 6 Control the image bank BF 00 01 Bank Select E6 Switch images Clip 2 CF 01 F6 Switch images Clip 3 CF 02 F 6 Control the image bank BF 00 02 Bank Select G6 Switch images Clip 4 CF 03 G 6 Control the image bank BF 00 03 Bank Select A6 Switch images Clip 5 CF 04 A 6 Control the image bank BF 00 04 Bank Select B6 Switch images Clip 6 CF 05 C7 Switch images Clip 7 CF 06 Using the black keys Bank Select and white keys PC 5 x 7 35 clips can be selected While the Visual Control function is active the C 6 C7 keys are temporarily unavailable for playing notes TA Troubleshooting Symptom Power does not turn on No sound from the BK 5 The volume level of the instrument is too low when it is connected to an amplifier The pitch of the selected rhythm song is incorrect Can t hear the vocal of an audio file mp3 or WAV Can t hear the melody of SMF files A buzz is
32. Selecting clips and banks on an optional MIDI Visual Control V LINK devee 114 17 Troubleshooting 115 LOAN IA a ars bou ii dd 117 Rhythm division program change numbers 118 E Series compatibility 118 Recalling a Performance memory from the loaded Performance List via MIDI 118 TO 19 AAP PAPA 119 20 Ee CN 125 21 E te e EE 138 Style Converter 4 system requirements 140 22 MIDI Implementation Chart 141 23 Chord Intelligence 142 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Panel description Panel description Front panel BK 5 BACKING KEYBO BALANCE RHYTHM FAMILY DANCE BLUES ROOM WORLD 1 WORLD 2 a VARIATION ALLIN IN INTRO ENDING STOP SS a ia oe e 1 PHONES 2 1 Pitch Bend Modulation lever You can raise or lower the pitch by moving this lever to the left or right Push the lever away from yourself to apply modulation normally vibrato to the sound PHONES 1 amp 2 sockets This is where you can connect one or two pairs of optional headphones Roland RH series Doing so switches off the internal speakers VOLUME knob Use this knob to set the BK 5 s global output volume all signals transmitted to the speakers and OUTPUT sockets The setting of this knob also determines the volume in the headphones you may connect RHYTHM FAMILY buttons The
33. The further this value is set in the negative direction the fewer overtones will be allowed to pass and the sound will become softer darker Characteristics of a low pass filter Setting A Frequency Cutoff frequency For some sounds positive Cutoff settings will cause no noticeable change because the preprogrammed Cutoff parameter is already set to its maximum value Parameter Setting Cut Off 64 63 Resonance When the Resonance value is increased the over tones in the area of the cutoff frequency will be emphasized creating a sound with a strong charac ter Parameter Setting Resonance 64 63 5S Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options For some sounds negative Resonance settings may produce no noticeable change because the Resonance is already set to the minimum value Attack only for Tones This parameter adjusts the onset of the sound Nega tive values speed up the attack so that the sound becomes more aggressive Parameter Setting Attack 645463 Decay This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound s volume and cutoff freguency fall from the highest point of the attack down to the sustain level Parameter Setting Decay 64 63 Percussive sounds usually have a sustain level of 0 Piano and guitar sounds are in this category Holding the keys for a long time will have little effect on the duration of the notes you are playing even if you select a high value her
34. This button allows you to start and stop rhythm play back If you select a song it starts and temporarily stops pause song playback G USB MEMORY PERFORMANCE LIST WRITE L maa ees 8 omor 60 CMa 773 E ON MELODY RITI xv 6 MENU INTELL NUMERIC TONE SIT e em e e si TONE _EPIANO ACCORD BASS A GUITAR VOCAL BRASS SYNTH ETHNIC DRUM 20 Display This display shows information related to your opera tion 7 CURSOR VALUE dial This dial can be used to move the cursor in the dis play to select parameters and to set values ENTER SELECT button Press this button to confirm your selection or dese lection of the display item where the cursor Is 12 PERFORMANCE LIST button This button calls up the Performance List page 45 PERFORMANCE WRITE button The main function of this button is to save Perfor mance settings Depending on the selected display page it can also be used to save rhythms and songs KEY button This button calls up the BK 5 s transposition func tion Its settings can be applied to rhythms Songs and the 3 real time parts UP1 UP2 LWR If the button e indicator doesn t light the rhythm Songs and the 3 real time parts use their normal pitch Pressing and holding this button locks the key see p 54 TRACK MUTE CENTER CANCEL button This button lets you mute the accompaniment parts of the selected rhythm so that only the bass and drum parts are played back It also let
35. UPI Piano E Fiano dg MaturalPiano pg Press again the TONE button ta jump to next Tone category 2 Press the EXIT button or press NUMERIC again to close the Help window ER Rhythm functions Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Rhythm functions The BK 5 contains a function that plays back automatic accompaniments called rhythms This section explains how to take advantage of the BK 5 s accompaniments Volume balance between the backing and the real time parts If the rhythm accompaniment is too loud or too soft with respect to the real time parts you are using you can change the balance with the BACKING and KEY BOARD buttons When the BACKING or KEYBOARD button is pressed the BALANCE pop up window appears showing the current setting M 001 1 4i4 124 KEYO BALANCE SI BACKING KEYBOARD A 07385 Attack Pad After about 3 seconds the pop up window disappears again About the rhythms The BK 5 can generate interactive accompaniments based on the rhythm you select Each rhythm is a typical accompaniment for a given musical genre The BK 5 comes with over 300 internal rhythms divided over 6 families see the RHYTHM FAMILY section on the front panel The melodic accompaniment parts of the selected rhythms follow the chords you play on the keyboard Using rhythms The interactive aspect about the rhythms is that you can change the key of the accompaniment simply by
36. function only looks in that folder Press the MENU button The display changes to CURSOR If you press MENU while an empty folder is selected the message No item selected is displayed to alert you to the fact that you cannot make any changes 4 Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select Search 37 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Using the BK 5 as a USB player 5 Press the ENTER SELECT button The display changes to Insert words to search H rr lag Delete Insert E EA 2 EI A abc def ghi EA Ki KA EE Il mno pars tuw weyz _ n CP ate The first character position is already selected A Use the TONE buttons to select a different character Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the next character position you want to change then use the TONE buttons again You can press the NUMERIC button to switch between upper and lower case characters as well as numbers The LWR button can be used to delete the selected character The UP2 button allows you to insert a character Repeat steps 6 7 to complete the char acter string you are looking for Press the ENTER SELECT button to start the search If you decide that you don t want to use the Search func tion press EXIT instead of ENTER SELECT 10 11 12 1 The BK 5 searches the USB storage device for files whose names match the character string you entered and displays them The title bar sh
37. music during recording and now realize that the tim ing is not quite what you expected it to be If only certain notes in a given time range need to be quan tized you should narrow down the edit range using the From To parameters Parameter Setting Explanation Track ADrums Acc6 Allows you to select ALL the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the opera tion applies to all tracks Mode Major Minor Allows you to select 7th the Mode to be edited Division Intro 1 4 Use this parameter to Main 154 Fill select the Division you Dwn 13 Fill want to edit Up 1 3 End 104 From Bar 1 lastmea Refers to the first mea sure of the sure to be edited By track or pat default the From tern value is set to the beginning of the selected track s From Beat 1 number of Specifies the beat posi beats per bar tion The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signa ture From CPT 0 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the BK 5 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this set ting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat To Bar ls last mea This is where you spec sure of the ify the last measure to track or pat be edited By default tern the To position is set to the last event of the selected track or
38. never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the BK 5 s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially late at night When you need to transport the unit package it in the box including padding that it came in if possible Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials Do not apply undue force to the music stand while it is in use Use only the specified expression pedal Roland EV series sold separately or pedal switch Roland DP series BOSS FS 5U By connecting any other expression pedal or footswitch you risk causing malfunction and or damage the unit Some connection cables contain resistors Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low or impossible to hear For information on cable specifications contact the man ufacturer of the cable Storage devices that can be connected to the BK 5 s USB MEMORY port The BK 5 allows you to connect commercially available USB Hash memory You can purchase such devices at a computer store a digital camera dealer etc Though external hard disks with a capacity in excess of 2TB can be used please bear in mind that the BK 5 can manage a maximum of 2TB FAT 32 formatted stora
39. playing different notes or chords Additionally you can select different variations more or less complex arrangements for the active rhythm The BK 5 provides several buttons for this HI START STOP BK 3 This button is used to start and stop rhythm playback While a rhythm is running the button s indicator flashes red on the first beat of each bar and green on the remaining beats You can also start and stop rhythm playback simply by playing on the keyboard See the next function The Start Stop function can also be assigned to an optional foot switch E SYNC START aan e wee K UU This button activates and switches off the Sync Start or Sync Start Stop function Pressing it sev eral times allows you to select one of the following options Function BING SARII Explanation indicator Sync Start Lights red Rhythm playback can be started by playing a note or chord Press START STOP to stop rhythm playback Backing Keyboard BK 5 Rhythm functions Function LING ui Explanation indicator Sync Start Lights green Rhythm playback can be Stop started by playing a note or chord Playback will stop when you release all keys Rhythm playback needs to be started and stopped using the START STOP button or the assigned optional footswitch VARIATION 1 2 3 4 BK 3 I UI A N A Lo Sr These buttons are used to select the complexity number of parts of the r
40. so their use could result in damage malfunction or electric shock If you won t be using the BK 5 for an extended period of time disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet 1G Before you start using the BK 5 Connecting the BK 5 to an amplifier mixer ete The BK 5 contains speakers and therefore doesn t need to be connected to an external amplifier You can however connect the BK 5 s OUTPUT sockets to an external amplifier Roland KC series or the audio inputs of an external instrument digital piano etc To prevent malfunction and equipment failure always turn down the volume and turn off all units before making any connections Turn the VOLUME knob all the way to the left to minimize the volume Switch off all devices Connect the BK 5 s OUTPUT jacks to the inputs of your external device Connecting the BK 5 to an amplifier 00000 a m e e Hi Leg Ca OUTPUT R L MONO For the connection to an amplifier please choose unbalanced mono cables with 1 4 plugs at one end for the BK 5 The connectors at the other end need to match the input sockets of the device to which you are connecting the BK 5 When connection cables with resistors are used the vol ume level of equipment connected to the audio inputs may be low If this happens use connection cables that do not contain resistors
41. szab lyoz s szerint kell gy jteni Az ezzel a szimbolummal ell tott term keket nem szabad a h ztart si hullad k k z dobni Symbol oznacza e zgodnie z regulacjami w odpowiednim regionie w krajach UE produktu nie nale y wyrzuca z odpadami domowymi Produkt w opatrzonych tym symbolem nie mo na utylizowa razem z odpadami domowymi Tento symbol ud v e v zem ch EU mus b t tento v robek sb r n odd len od dom c ho odpadu jak je ur eno pro ka d region V robky nesouc tento symbol se nesm vyhazovat spolu s dom c m odpadem Tento symbol vyjadruje e v krajin ch E sa mus zber tohto produktu vykon va oddelene od domov ho odpadu pod a nariaden platn ch v konkr tnej krajine Produkty s t mto symbolom sa nesm vyhadzova spolu s domov m odpadom See s mbol n itab et EL i maades tuleb see toode olempr gist eraldi koguda nii nagu on igas piirkonnas m ratletud Selle s mboliga m rgitud tooteid ei tohi ra visata koos olmepr giga is simbolis rodo kad ES alyse is produktas turi b ti surenkamas atskirai nuo buitini atliek kaip nustatyta kiekviename regione Siuo simboliu pa enklinti produktai neturi b ti i metami kartu su buitin mis atliekomis is simbols nor da ka ES valst s o produktu j iev c atsevi i no m jsaimniec bas atkritumiem k noteikts katr regiona Produktus ar o simbolu nedr kst izmest kop ar m jsaimniec bas atkritumiem T
42. 0 for the Down posi tion Selecting any other values will reduce the vol ume of the selected part up to the Down value Likewise you do not need to specify 127 as maxi mum value for Up The expression pedal sends MIDI Expression commands CC11 It is perfectly possible to set the Down value to 127 and the Up value to 0 so that the selected part only sounds when the expression pedal is in the upright position This can be used for some clever effects instead of alternating between the Upper and Upper2 parts by varying your velocity which requires a considerable amount of striking preci sion see Min Value and Max Value on p 57 you could invert UP2 s response to the expression pedal so that UP1 doesn t sound when UP2 does and vice Versa Parameter Setting Pedal Exp Down Up 0127 Hold Pedal This parameter allows you to specify whether and how a hold damper pedal you connect to the PEDAL HOLD socket should respond to Hold messages CC64 Parameter Setting Hold Pedal Auto On Off Auto means that the part in question only responds to Hold messages if it is assigned to the right half Split or the entire keyboard On means that the part in question always responds to Hold messages even if it is assigned to the left half of the keyboard Off finally means that the part does not respond to Hold messages Octave Shift Allows you to transpose the selected keyb
43. 1 10 Bb 1 amp 11 B 1 12 CO 13 CHO 14 DO 15 D O 16 EO 17 FO Voice One EG OB Voice Two 19 GO Voice Three 21 AO MC 500 Beep 23 BO MC 500 Beep 24 C1 Concert Snr MSA Snare Roll 26 D1 Finger Snap High Q 28 E1 Slap 29 F1 ScratchPush EZ AN ScratchPull 31 G1 Sticks ERR AN SquareClick 33 Al Mtrnm Click EHS tnm Bell 35 B1 BrKick1 36 C2 BrKick2 Eye ER Side Stick 38 D2 BrSnarel Br Snare2 40 E2 Brush Swirl 41 F2 LiteTom4 SES PAG BrHiHatClosB 43 G2 liteTom4 SEI ER Pedal HiHat 45 A2 Lite Tom 4 BrHiHatOpenB 47 B2 lite Tom4 48 C3 Lite Tom 4 Ee ER BrCrashCymbB 50 D3 LiteTom4 Br RideCymbB 52 E3 ChinaCymbal 53 F3 BrRideBellB oy ER Tambourine 55 G3 Splash Cym SCHER Cowbell 57 A3 Crash Cymb2 58 Bb3 Vibraslap 59 B3 Ride Cymbal 60 C4 BongoHigh Ge CM Bongo Low 62 D4 MuteH Conga WEW Conga Hi Opn 64 E4 Conga Lo Opn 65 F4 High Timbale TZ EM LOW Timbale 67 G4 Agogo er Ban CE 7 Agogo 69 A4 Cabasa Maracas 71 B4 ShrtWhistle 72 C5 LongWhistle re Ba 228 Short Guiro 74 D5 Long Guiro Let Claves 76 E5 Woodblock 77 F5 Woodblock HERZ AR Mute Cuica 79 G5 Open Cuica GAR ER MuteTriangl 81 A5 OpenTriangl BEATER shaker 83 B5 Jingle Bell PC 33 CC32 4 Jazz Std 1 Kick1 Std 1 Kick2 Std 2 Kick1 Std2 Kick2 Kick 1 Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Room Kick 1 Room Kick 2 Power Kick1 Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick
44. 1 Cowbell Mt 2 Cowbell Op 1 Cowbell Op 2 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland PC 9 CC32 5 Latin Menu2 Cuica 3 Cuica Hi 1 Cuica Hi 2 Cuica Lo 1 Cuica Lo 2 Ganza Hard Ganza Soft Guiro Long Guiro Long2 Guiro Short Guiro Short2 Hand Clap 2 MamboBell Mt MamboBell Op Maracas 2 MaracasUpDwn MtlGuiroLng MtlGuiroSht PandeiroCrsh PandeiroHit PandeiroL Hi PandeiroL Lo PandeiroL Rm PandeiroL Sp PandeiroMute PandeiroOpen PandeiroRim PandeiroRoll PandeiroS Op PandeiroS Rm PandeiroS Sp Quide Long Quide Short Quijada Rainstick Real Cabasa1 Real Cabasa2 RecoRecoLng RecoRecoSht Repiniquel Repinique2 RepiniqueHrd Repiniquesft Repique Open Repique Rim Repique Roll SambaBateria SambaWhistle Shaker 1 Shaker 2 Shaker Long Shaker Short PC 10 CC32 5 Latin Menu3 Surdo Hard Surdo Mute Surdo Mute2 Surdo Open H Surdo Open L Surdo Open Surdo Open2 Surdo Rim Surdo Rim 2 Surdo Soft Tamborim Mut Tamborim Opn Tamborim Slp TamborimMute TamborimOpen TamborimRim TamborimRoll Tambrin Hit TambrinShake Timbale Hi Timbale Lo Timbale Side Timbales Rim TimbalesFil1 TimbalesFil2 TimbalesFil3 TimbalesFil4 TimbalesHand Timbles HiMt Timbles HiOp Timbles LoMt Timbles LoOp TmbSideStick SectChd 13th SectChd m9 SectChd Mj9 Sabor Arriba Ole Uno Dos Tres Quatro Grito Hahaha Grito Ahaha Grito Haahai Grito Rrrrr Tiquitito Grito Oa Oa Grito Eh Eh Ama ya ahi Fuego Hey Brazil Drum Sets
45. 1 Room Kick 2 Power Kick1 Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 TR 808 Kick TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 Voice One Voice Two Voice Three MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Jazz Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Side Stick Brush Swirl Brush Slap1 Brush Swirl Lite Tom 4 Brs HiHatCls Lite Tom 4 Pedal HiHat Lite Tom 4 Brs HiHatOpn Lite Tom 4 Lite Tom 4 Brush Crash Lite Tom 4 Ride Cym IN ChinaCymbal Brush RideBL Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Drum Sets PC 42 CC32 4 Brush 2 Std 1 Kick1 Std 1 Kick2 Std 2 Kick1 Std2 Kick2 Kick 1 Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Room Kick 1 Room Kick 2 Power Kick1 Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 TR 808 Kick TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 Voice One Voice Two Voice Three Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Br Kick 1 Br Kick 2 Side Stick Br Snare1 Br Snare2 Brush Swirl Lite Tom 4 Brs HiHatCls Lite Tom 4 Peda
46. 1 TR 808 Kick TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 Voice One Voice Two Voice Three Br Kick 1 Br Kick 2 MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Side Stick Jazz Snare1 Hand clap2 Jazz Snare2 Real Tom 6 JazzClosedHH Real Tom 6 Pedal HiHat Real Tom 4 JazzOpenHH Real Tom 4 Real Tom 1 Crash Cymb1 Real Tom 1 Ride Cym IN ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell PC 34 CC32 4 Jazz L R Voice One Voice Two Voice Three MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Side Stick Jazz Snare1 Hand clap2 Jazz Snare2 Real Tom 6 JzHiHatClosB Real Tom 6 Pedal HiHat Real Tom 4 JzHiHatOpenB Real Tom 4 Real Tom 1 Crash Cymb 1 Real Tom 1 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ridbl_c B Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhist
47. 2 DofSak 3 DofFinger 1 DofFinger 2 Tabla Raka 1 Tabla Tak 1 Tabla Tik 1 Tabla Dom Tabla Sak Tabla Roll Tabla Tak 2 Tabla Raka 2 Tabla Rim 1 Tabla Toks Tabla Rim 2 PC 66 CC32 4 Or Techno House Kick HipHop Kick SimpleKick 909 Kick2 HipHopSnare2 Techno Snare R amp B Snare R amp B Clap 707 Claps Tambourine TR 909 OHHsh TR 909 OHH Wadaiko Ohkawa Shimedaiko H kotsuzumi L Kotsuzumi Tabla_Ge Tabla_Na Tabla_Te Tabla_Tun Udo_Long Djembe_rim 909 HandClap Tambourine Pop Hi Hat1 Pop Hi Hat2 Pop Hi Hat3 NewShaker2 NewShaker1 IPopSn40st HipHop Snare Jungle Snare House Snare TechnoKick2 TR 909 Kick2 909 Kick TR 909 Rim 909 SD 1 HandClap1st Hand Clap 21 TR 909Snare2 TR 707HiHatC Pop Kick 36 TR 707HiHatC 909 Tom 909HiHat Opn 909 Tom 909 Tom 909 Crash 909 Tom 909Ride Cymb ChinaCymbal Dholla Dom Dholla Sak 1 Dholla Sak 2 Dholla Sak 3 Dholla Rim Dholla Raka Dholla Tak 1 Dholla Tak 2 DofDom 1 DofDom 2 DofDom 3 DofTak 1 DofTak 2 DofSak 1 DofRim 1 DofSak 2 DofRim 2 DofSak 3 DofFinger 1 DofFinger 2 Tabla Raka 1 Tabla Tak 1 Tabla Tik 1 Tabla Dom Tabla Sak Tabla Roll Tabla Tak 2 Tabla Raka 2 Tabla Rim 1 Tabla Toks Tabla Rim 2 PC 117 CC32 1 Oriental 1 Bass Drum Bass Drum Rim Shot Snare Drum Hand Clap 1 Hand Clap 2 Tom 1 Closed Hi Hat Tom 2 Closed Hi Hat Tom 3 Open Hi Hat Tom 4 Tom 5 Crash Cymbal Tom 6 Ride Cymbal Doholla1 Rim1 Doholla1 Dom Finger Doff A Dohol
48. 2 Tamorra 3 Tamorra 4 Tamorra 6 Tamorra 7 Tamorra 8 Tamorra Ending Pandeiro_SW1 Pandeiro_SW2 Pandeiro_SW3 Pandeiro 5 Brazilian Tamburin Chimes amp Seeds_1 Chimes amp Seeds_2 PopHiHatFoot PC 46 CC32 4 NewPBrshPerc Mambo SW SeaShells Equat nutshells Cascade Ending Chimes Ending Goathooves GoathoovesShot Bongo1_SW1 Bongo1_SW2 Bongo1_SW3 Bongo2_SW1 Bongo2_SW2 Bongo2_3 Congas_SW1 Congas_SW2 Congas_SW3 Congas_SW4 Tamorra 1 Tamorra 2 Tamorra 3 Tamorra 4 Tamorra 6 Tamorra 7 Tamorra 8 Tamorra Ending Pandeiro_SW1 Pandeiro_SW2 Pandeiro_SW3 Pandeiro 5 Brazilian Tamburin Chimes amp Seeds_1 Chimes amp Seeds_2 PopHiHatFoot PC 44 CC32 4 V JazzBrush HipHop Kick1 Jazz Kick 1 Mex Kick Rm Kick 1 Rm Kick 2 HipHop Kick2 TechnoKick1 BassDrumSet HipHop Kick1 909Comp Kick St Kick 1 JazzKick NewRockKik Cymbal Roll Rock Stick 2 Rm Snare 1 Rm Snare 2 St Snare1 St Snare2 NewJzSn2 NewJzSn1 R amp B Snare PopSnare38 2 PopSnare40 2 PopSnare38 2 Snare Ghost1 PopSnare38 2 FingerSnaps2 909 HandClap 808 Clap Hand clap2 909 HandClap Pedal HiHat1 VibratoneSlow Fast VibratoneSlow Fast GospelHClp1 AfricanCowBell Kick_Plastic Kick_Plastic Snare Snare SnareFlam Snare FloorTomFlam Jazz Hati FloorTom Jazz Hat2 Tom2Flam Jazz Hat3 Tom2 Tom1Flam JazzCrCym1 PopBrushTom1 NewJzRide1 BrushCrash2 Jazz Ride2 CembaloFree BrushCrash1 CowBell JzCrashCym1 vibraslp RockRide1 Bongo SW Bong
49. 20 24 22 45 24 16 38 13 22 40 22 43 22 42 22 41 59 4 27 24 27 23 27 9 27 10 27 25 22 46 70 2 22 44 22 16 22 18 27 47 Latin Am 27 48 Latin Am 27 49 Latin Am 27 50 Latin Am 27 51 Latin Am 27 52 Latin Am 27 53 Latin Am 27 54 Latin Am 27 55 Latin Am 27 56 Latin Am 27 57 Latin Am 27 58 Latin Am 27 59 Latin Am 27 60 Latin Am 27 61 Latin Am 27 62 Latin Am 27 63 Latin Am 27 64 Latin Am 27 65 Latin Am 27 66 Latin Am 27 40 Brazil 27 36 Brazil 27 38 Brazil 27 44 Brazil 27 27 Brazil 27 37 Brazil 27 39 Brazil 27 43 Brazil 117 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Rhythm list No Name 202 Samba 203 Chorinho 204 Samba Duro 205 Brega 206 Arrocha 207 Bossa Nova 208 Forro 1 209 Forro 2 210 Forro 3 211 Xote 212 Vanerao 213 Chamame Tradit World2 214 Lazy Reggae 215 Love Reggae 216 Reggae 217 Country Hyer 218 Pop Gospel 219 Gospel Shuffle 220 Ska 221 Irish 222 Southern Twang 223 SteamtrainCountr 224 Posaunenpolka 225 Posaunenwalzer 226 Orchestr SI Fox 227 Pop Fox 228 Fox Band 229 Oldies 230 Slow Country 231 Country Ballad 232 Country Rock 233 Country Beat 234 Country Fox 235 Country Pop 236 6_8 March 237 US March 238 Country Swing 239 Orchestral Waltz 240 HU Beat 241 HU Csardas 242 HU Disco 243 HU Discofox 244 HU Latin pop1 245 HU Latin pop2 246 HU Mulatos 247 HU Polka 248 HU Ragga 249 HU Roc
50. 25 64 12 13 14 A k BRR RR RRR RR DR RRR RR RRR RRR RRR RRR RR RR RR RRR RRR RRR RRR RR RRR ER RRR RRR RR RR RR BR BR BR DB PC 17 19 18 18 19 18 17 17 17 18 19 17 17 17 17 20 20 20 20 20 21 17 19 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 19 18 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 18 17 21 17 17 17 23 23 23 23 22 22 22 22 22 24 24 24 22 22 22 22 22 22 No Name 0139 It Musette 0140 AccR16 0141 AccR8 0142 AccR8S 0143 AccR4 E Guitar Bass 0144 Warm Drive 0145 Clean Solid 0146 Clean Elect 0147 Clean El Oct 0148 Clean Gt 0149 Clean Mute 0150 Dynamic Mute 0151 Jazz Guitar 0152 Jazz Guitar2 0153 Jazz Gt 0154 PedalSteel 0155 Mellow Gt 0156 JC ChrusGt 0157 JC CleanGt 0158 Chorus Gt 0159 Distortion 0160 Distort Gt1 0161 Distort Gt2 0162 Distort Gt3 0163 Dist Mute 0164 Muted Over 0165 Muted Gt 1 0166 Muted Gt 2 0167 Muted Gt 3 0168 LP OverDrv 0169 RockRhythm1 0170 RockRhythm2 0171 TC MutedGt 0172 TC Clean 0173 JGuitar Scat 0174 Power Gt 1 0175 Power Gt 2 0176 Power Gt 3 0177 Dist Rtm GTR 0178 LP HalfDrv2 0179 Mid Tone GTR 0180 LP RearAtk 0181 Clean Half 0182 OpenHard 1 0183 OpenHard 2 0184 TC RearPk 0185 TC Cln ff 0186 AtkCleanGt 0187 Funk Pop 0188 LP Rear 0189 Overdrv Gt 0190 Overdrive1 0191 Overdrive2 0192 Overdrive3 0193 More Drive 0194 Dance Dst Gt 0195 Dist Fast 0196 Dazed Gtr 0197 Attack Dist 0198 LP Rear Pk 0199 LP HalfDrv 0200 LP Ch
51. 30 Play a melody on the keyboard Now press another TONE 1 4 button than the one that is currently active Again play a melody on the keyboard Backing Keyboard BK 5 Rhythm functions The newly selected ONE TOUCH memory has recalled a different sound for the melody part Note that the ONE TOUCH function also recalls other settings like the tempo INTRO ENDING etc NOTE The BK 5 has a function that allows you to exclude certain settings when a new ONE TOUCH memory is selected See One Touch Hold on p 66 9 Press a different TONE 1 4 button to recall the associated ONE TOUCH memory Tone selection for the real time parts as well as other settings change in accordance with the newly selected ONE TOUCH memory 10 To switch off the ONE TOUCH function and return to the Tones that were selected before you activated the ONE TOUCH func tion press the TONE 1 4 button whose indicator lights steadily Its indicator flashes along with the other three TONE buttons 11 Press the ONE TOUCH button to leave ONE TOUCH memory selection mode The TONE buttons stop flashing Only the indicator corresponding to the last Tone family you selected lights steadily You can now select different Tones for real time parts without actually leaving the ONE TOUCH function if it is still on MI How can you tell whether the ONE TOUCH function is on or off If the ONE TOUCH field on the main page is fol lowed by
52. 4 CC32 5 StandardKit1 MaxLow Kick2 Rk CmpKick Gospel Clap Sweep Bass Sft Snr Gst HipHop Kick2 Reg PHH Reg Kick 1 Reg Kick 2 Reg Stick Reg Snr 2 Reg Snr Gst Reg Snr 1 Reg F Tom Reg CHH 1 Reg L Tom Reg CHH 2 Reg M Tom 1 Reg OHH Reg M Tom 2 Reg H Tom 1 Crash Cym1 Reg H Tom 2 Rock Ride China Cymbal Ride Edge Tamborine Crash Cym2a Cowbell Low Crash Cym2b Cowbell Hi Ride Bell Conga Hi Mt Conga Lo Mt Conga Lo Conga Hi Op Conga Lo Op Timbale Hi Timbale Low Agogo Bell H Agogo Bell L Cabasa Up Maracas Whistle Shrt Whistle Long Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mt Triangle Op Cabasa Cut Castanet PC 5 CC32 5 StandardKit3 HipHop Kick2 Syn Swt Atk1 Lo Bit Stk 1 TR707 Kick TR808 Snr 5 Vint Kick 1 Reg PHH Vint Kick 2 Old Kick 1 Lo Bit Stk 4 Reg Snr 1 Amb Clap TY Rim Jazz Lo Tom1 Reg CHH 1 Jazz Lo Tom2 Reg CHH 2 Jazz Mid Tom Reg OHH Jazz Mid Tom Jazz Hi Tom Crash Cym1 Jazz Hi Tom Rock Rd Edge China Cymbal Rock Rd Cup Tamborine Splash Cym Cowbell Rock Crash 2 TR808 Cym Jazz Ride Bongo Hi Bongo Lo Conga Hi Mt Conga Hi Conga Lo Timbale Hi Timbale Low Cowbell Hi Cowbell Low Cabasa Shaker Noise OHH 2 Scratch 5 Syn Low Atk2 MG Zap 3 Syn Swt Atk1 Syn Swt Atk4 Bongo Hi Slp Noise OHH Noise CHH Triangle 1 Triangle 2 Cajon 1 Cajon 3 130 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Drum Sets 84 C6 PC 31 CC32 4 TR 909 Bell T
53. 40 0353 TamPrTrl 54 2 25 0427 Syn Strings3 8 4 51 0280 Pulse Mix Bs 31 4 40 0354 TamORTrl 55 2 25 0428 Syn Strings4 9 4 51 0281 Seq Bass 2 33 4 40 0355 TamORBTr 56 2 25 0429 Syn Strings5 10 4 51 0282 3rd Bass 34 4 40 0356 Cavaquinho 0 5 25 0430 OB Strings 1 4 51 120 No Name 0431 Air Strings 0432 JUNO Strings 0433 60s Strings 0434 High Strings 0435 Tron Strings 0436 Noiz Strings 0437 DistStrings 0438 Strings Hit 0439 OrchestraHit 0440 Double Hit 0441 Choir Str 0442 Syn Vox Pad 0443 Fem Mm Srt 0444 Rich Choir 1 0445 St ChoirAahs 0446 Jazz Scat 0447 Choir Aahs 0448 Melted Chr 0449 ChorusLahs 0450 ChorusAahs 0451 Voice Oohs 0452 Choir Hahs 0453 St BoysChoir 0454 VoiceAah Mal 0455 Humming 0456 Silent Night 0457 Melted Choir 0458 JzVoiceBap 0459 JzVoiceDow 0460 Voice Dahs 0461 JzVox Thum 0462 JzVoiceDat 0463 SynVox 0464 JX8P Vox 0465 Syn Voice 1 0466 Syn Voice 2 0467 VP330 Choir 0468 LFO Vox 0469 Solo Vox 0470 Chorus Oohs2 0471 Chorus Oohs1 0472 VoiceLah Fem 0473 ChorusLahFem 0474 ChorusLuhFem 0475 VoiceUuh Fem 0476 Fem Lah amp Lan Sax Brass 0477 Tenor Sax 0478 Blowed Tenor 0479 St Tenor Sax 0480 Latin Tenor 0481 Super Tenor 0482 TenorSaxFst 0483 Tenor Sax 1 0484 BreathyIn 0485 BlowAltoVib 0486 Folk A Sax 0487 Folk A SaxVb 0488 FolkAlto 0489 AltoSax Soft 0490 AltoSax Exp 0491 Alto Sax 0492 Baritone Sax 0493 Bari amp Tenor 0494 Grow Sax 0495 Soprano Exp 0496 Soprano Sax2 0497 Sax Section 0498
54. 5 without dis turbing those around you such as at night BK 3 Aes as MU ss Ns es NAAN ee eee i 1 Plug the headphones into the PHONES 1 or 2 socket located on the left side of the BK 5 s front panel Doing so switches off the BK 5 s speakers 2 Use the BK 5 s VOLUME knob to adjust the headphone volume W Cautions when using headphones e To prevent damage to the cords internal conductors avoid rough handling When using headphones mainly try to handle either the plug or the headset e Your headphones may be damaged if the volume of a device is already turned up when you plug them in Minimize the volume before you plug in the head phones e Excessive input will not only damage your hearing but may also strain the headphones Please enjoy music at a reasonable volume Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Connecting a portable audio player e Use headphones fitted with a stereo 1 4 phone plug Installing the music rest Install the music rest as shown in the illus tration When moving the BK 5 be sure to remove the music rest as a safety precaution Do not apply excessive force to the music rest The music rest is not designed to accept the placement of laptops or other heavy objects 19 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Before you start using the BK 5 Turning the power on off Once the connections have been completed turn on the power to your various devices in the order specifie
55. 8 5 106 9 5 106 10 5 106 98 119 113 100 119 113 96 119 113 0 4 115 0 4 116 0 4 117 10 4 119 1 4 122 9 4 119 3 4 118 8 4 119 0 4 118 8 4 118 18 4 118 0 4 119 8 4 117 8 4 116 11 4 126 1 4 117 0 5 115 0 4 120 47 4 113 5 4 12b 16 4 114 8 4 120 17 4 120 16 4 120 25 4 120 0 4 114 11 4 125 24 4 116 16 4 116 25 4 117 27 4 117 25 4 56 26 4 56 22 4 56 23 4 56 20 4 56 19 4 56 9 4 56 18 4 56 8 4 56 3 4 56 1 4 56 2 4 56 17 4 56 16 4 56 11 4 56 12 4 56 27 4 56 0 4 128 1 4 128 2 4 128 4 4 128 5 4 128 3 4 128 0 4 12b 1 4 12b 0 4 126 0 4 123 2 4 124 1 4 124 0 4 124 3 4 124 5 4 124 6 4 124 4 4 124 7 4 124 0 4 122 7 4 127 125 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Tone List No Name CCOO CC32 PC 1102 Car Engine 1 4 126 1103 Seal 8 4 124 1104 Rain 1 4 123 1105 Thunder 2 4 123 1106 Wind 1 3 4 123 1107 Wind 2 6 4 123 1108 Stream 4 4 123 1109 Bubble 5 4 123 1110 DoorCreaking 2 4 125 1111 Siren 5 4 126 1112 Train 6 4 126 1113 Jetplane 7 4 126 1114 Starship 8 4 126 1115 Burst Noise 9 4 126 1116 Car Engine 24 4 126 1117 Car Horn 25 4 126 1118 Car Pass 3 4 126 1119 Car Stop 2 4 126 1120 Car Crash 4 4 126 1121 Door 3 4 125 1122 Cricket 7 4 123 1123 White Noise 17 4 123 1124 Winds Hit 47 4 123 1125 Pink Noise 16 4 123 1126 Scratch 1 4 4 125 1127 TapeRewind 9 4 125 1128 ShortCircuit 80 4 56 1129 Trumpet Nz 9 4 122 1130 Calculating 10 4 126 1131 Scratch 2 7 A 125 1132 ScratchKey 8 4 125 1133 Phono Noise 10 4
56. AltoSax Tp 0499 ORSaxVib 0500 ORSaxTrl 0501 Ac Brass 0502 Brass Sforz 0503 Brass sfz 1 0504 Brass sfz 2 CCOO CC32 8 2 40 16 24 25 6 24 0 10 11 0 82 14 8 33 24 32 48 16 13 36 40 10 11 16 17 19 23 24 O wo O oO O CH OO C mm N en zl 80 81 10 12 RRR RRR RRR RRR RR RR RR RR RR RR RRR RRR BR RRR RR RRR RRR E E BR Px BR PIR BRM Nw BIR E BR E BRR BR BIR BR NM Nw BIR BR PIB BRR E AR PC 52 52 49 51 51 51 52 56 56 56 49 55 54 53 53 54 53 53 53 53 54 53 53 54 54 55 53 54 54 54 54 54 55 55 55 55 55 86 86 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 68 68 66 65 65 66 66 66 66 62 62 62 62 No Name 0505 St Brass ff 0506 Africa Brass 0507 St Orch Brs1 0508 Octave Brass 0509 FatPop Brass 0510 2Tps Tb 0511 2Tps Tb Sax 0512 Fat Reed 0513 Warm Brass 0514 Orch Brass 0515 St Orch Brs2 0516 Brass Reed 0517 Brass 1 0518 Brass 2 0519 Brass 3 0520 SC Brt Brass 0521 Bones Sect 0522 Quad Brass1 0523 Quad Brass2 0524 Henry IV 0525 Brass Fall 0526 Switch Fall 0527 Jump Brass 0528 MG Brass fst 0529 MKS Brass 0530 JUNO Brass 0531 Fat SynBrass 0532 Poly Brass 0533 PowerBrass 0534 Synth Brass 0535 Pro Brass 0536 P5 Brass 0537 Sync Brass 0538 Oct SynBrass 0539 SH 5 Brass 0540 OB Brass 0541 Velo Brass 1 0542 DeepSynBrass 0543 Tuba 1 0544 Tuba 2 0545 Tuba 3 0546 Polka Tuba 0547 Folk Tub
57. BD2 Rek 2 Rim 2 Rek Dom 1 Rek 2 Tak 1 Rek 2 Tak 2C Rek 2 Sak 1 Tabla_Ge Tabla_Na Tabla_Te Tabla_Tun Djembe_rim IPopKik35 IPopKik36 IPopCStk37st IPopSn38_1 IPopGst539 1 IPopSn40st PopFIrTmFI IPopHat1 42 IPopTomL43 IPopHat2 44 RockTom2FI IPopHat3 46 IPopTomM47 RockTom1Fl IPopCyml2_52 IPopTomH50 IPopRd1_51 IPopCym1_49 PopRideBl Tambourine Splash Cym ChaChaCBell NewRkCrCym2 626 Shaker NewRkRdCym1 TR 909 BD2 Side Stick House SD 909 HandClap Elec Snare 2 Real Tom 6 TR 707 HH c Real Tom 6 CR 78 chh Real Tom 4 909 OH Real Tom 4 Real Tom 1 ReverseCymbl Dholla2 Dom2 Dholla 2 Sak 808clave Dholla2 Rim1 Rek 2 Roll Dholla2 RimC Rek 2 Sak 1 Doff 2 Dom 2 Doff2 Sak 1B Tabla Raka 1 Tabla Tak 1 Tabla Tik 1 Tabla Dom Tabla Sak Tabla Roll Tabla Tak 2 Tabla Raka 2 Tabla Rim 1 Tabla Toks Tabla Rim 2 Tabla Tik 2 Rek Raka Rek Dom Rek Trill Rek Tak 1 Rek Rim Rek Brass 1 Rek Tok Rek Brass 2 Rek Tak 2 Rek Sak Rek Tik PC 119 CC32 4 Greek 2 Timpani Timpani Snare Roll Concert Snr Concert BD Jingle Bell Bell Tree Bar Chimes Wadaiko Small Gong Gamelan Gong Udo_Long 82JzBsDrum2 Side Stick 82JzSnare1 Hand clap2 82JzSnare2 Real Tom 6 82JzClsHatB Real Tom 6 Pedal HiHat Real Tom 4 82JzOpenHatB Real Tom 4 Crash1c B Real Tom 4 Ride iB ChinaCymbal Ridbl_c B Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cym 2 Vibraslap RideCym Edge TR 909 BD2 808 Rimshot Rap Snare HandClap House SD RkFIrT
58. BK 5 Roland Rhythm Composer programming your own rhythms The Copy page now displays a USB MEMORY field to indicate that you can select a rhythm on the connected USB memory o cb ver 4 vene Een Press the ENTER SELECT button IM Rhythms Oo DI t CURSOR al UE Il Get ENTER When you import a rhythm the Location parameter is set to Destination To continue as explained below you need to select the Source setting Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the Track parameter then press the ENTER SELECT button Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the track to be copied You can also select ALL to copy all tracks of a given Mode Division In that case Destination Track see below is also set to ALL Repeat this operation with the Mode and Division parameters to select the Mode Major Minor 7th ALL and Division Int 1 4 Int ALL Main 1 4 Main ALL FDw 183 FDw ALL FUp 1 3 FUp ALL End 1 4 End ALL Press the KEY button to listen to the pat tern you are about to copy o KE P er Fm This audition function is not available when you select ALL for the Mode or Division field 97 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options 8 Use the From and To parameters 3 each to specify the beginning and end of the excerpt you want to copy By default the From parameters are set to Bar 1 Bea
59. BK 5 rhythm not only con tains the rhythm part drums amp percussion but also a melodic accompaniment such as piano guitar bass and strings lines That is why the rhythms work with tracks eight to be precise If necessary you can even record a second drum track The reason why the AccDrums part is assigned to the first track and the ABass part to the second is that most programmers and recording artists start by lay ing down the rhythm section of a song There are exceptions to this rule however so feel free to start with any other part if that is easier for the rhythm you are programming Though there are six melodic ACC tracks most rhythms only contain two or three melodic accompaniment lines In most cases less means more i e do not program six melodic accompaniments Just because the BK 5 provides that facility If you listen very carefully to a CD you will discover that it is not the number of instruments you use that makes a song sound big but rather the right notes at the right time Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Rhythm Composer programming your own rhythms W Looped vs one shot patterns The BK 5 uses two kinds of patterns looped divisions and one shot divisions Looped divisions Looped divisions are accompani ments that are repeated until you select another divi sion or press START STOP to stop Arranger playback The BK 5 provides four programmable looped divi sions VARIATION 1 4 Looped
60. Beat 8 Romantic Beat 9 Due Beat 10 Acoustic Ballad 11 Adult Contemp 12 Gold Slow Beat 13 Time Pop 14 Gold Medium Beat 15 Sunshine Pop 16 Blue Pop 17 Euro Ballad 18 Killing Beat 19 Jessie Beat 20 Pink Beat 21 Billy Beat 22 Breakin Beat 23 Fancy Beat 24 US Country Pop 25 Gold Beat 26 Radio Pop 27 US Shuffle 28 UK Shuffle 29 Eric Beat 30 Strummin Pop 31 Amazing Gospel 32 Night Ballad 33 6_8 Ballad 34 6_8 Pop 35 Love SI Rock 36 Unplugged Pop 37 Unplugged Ballad 38 Cool Live Band 39 Acoustic Pop 40 Rolling Rock 41 Green Rock 42 Spring Rock 43 Broken Beat 44 Straight Rock 45 Joe s Rock 46 Countdown Rock 4 Cool Shuffle 48 Breaky Rock 49 JuliRock 50 LoveRock 51 Electro Rock 52 MunichRock Disco Dance 53 Peas Disco 54 California Disco 55 Edge Disco 56 Saxo Disco 57 Broken Dance 58 Beat Generation 59 Seventies 60 Volare Gipsy 61 Night sDance 62 Hung Disco 63 Jamiro Dance 64 Just Disco 65 2000 s Disco 66 Slow Disco 67 Gold Disco CCOO CC32 6 1 6 11 6 118 6 120 6 121 6 122 6 80 6 81 6 124 6 125 6 126 71 0 71 2 71 1 6 114 6 110 6 80 6 3 6 4 6 5 7 114 7 115 7 116 7 117 7 118 7 101 4 22 4 23 68 14 68 11 68 12 68 5 68 7 68 9 5 57 68 2 68 1 68 8 68 6 1 1 1 83 1 80 1 81 1 82 1 72 1 69 1 76 1 68 1 13 1 77 1 62 1 14 66 1 66 2 66 3 66 4 66 5 66 60 66 6l 66 62 66 63 66 64 66 57 66 58 66 59 66 56 66 65 No Name 68 Ladies Dance 69 UK Dance 70 Fire Bea
61. Dixie HH Opn Studio Tom 2 Studio Tom 1 Crash Cymbal Studio Tom 1 Rock RdCym1 Crash 1 Bongo 1 Hi Tambrin Hit Bongo 1 Lo Cowbell Op 1 BongoHiSlap1 Cowbell 3 Bongo LoSlap Conga Hi Mt Conga Lo Mt Conga Slap Conga Hi Op CongaLoOp f Timbles HiMt Timbles LoOp Agogo 2 Hi Agogo 2 Lo Real Cabasa2 Maracas 2 ApitoHiShort ApitoLoShort Guiro Short2 Guiro Long2 Claves Lo 2 Berimbau Up Berimbau Dn Cuica Hi 1 Cuica Lo 2 Caixa Mute Caixa Open2 Caixa Rim Caixa Roll2 Cajon Rol Hi Cajon Rol Lo Surdo Mute2 Surdo Open2 PandeiroL Hi PandeiroL Lo PandeiroOpen PandeiroMute PandeiroL Rm PandeiroL Sp Quijada Rainstick Metronome 2 R8 Click Metronome 1 180 LatinPt2 160 CgMambo 132 TmblPtn1 132 AgogoPtn 104 Shakin PC 8 CC32 5 Latin Menu Agogo 2 Hi Agogo 2 Lo Agogo 3 Hi Agogo 3 Lo ApitoHiShort ApitoLoShort Berimbau Dn Berimbau Mut Berimbau Opn Berimbau Up Bongo 1 Hi Bongo 1 Lo Bongo 2 Hi Bongo 2 Lo Bongo Hi Hrd Bongo HiOp f Bongo Lo Hrd Bongo Lo Sft Bongo LoOp f Bongo LoOpmf Bongo LoSlap BongoBell Mt BongoBell Op BongoHisSlap1 BongoHiSlap2 Cabasa Roll Caixa Mute Caixa Mute2 Caixa Open Caixa Open2 Caixa Open3 Caixa Rim Caixa Roll Caixa Roll2 Cajon Hi Cajon Lo Cajon Rol Hi Cajon Rol Lo Caxixi Chekere 1 Chekere 2 Chekere 3 Clave Claves Lo 2 Conga Hi Mt Conga Hi Op Conga Link Conga Lo Mt Conga Roll Conga Slap Conga Thumb CongaLoOp f CongaLoOp mf Cowbell 1 Cowbell 2 Cowbell 3 Cowbell Mt
62. ER 68 OSE a rca ide an pen a 109 T lap JEMPO tee sce tem ot yr aa a aed 31 35 TEMA so asta em A 31 35 82 Arranger mode 63 Makeup Tools 75 Ee a aa o na ca d 64 Threshold 72 Time Signature 98 Time Signature 82 Time signature 67 ee AA 56 76 MIDI address 26 Part Eec ine cute pai caca 60 Part View 56 pe Le EE 81 HILA atata a dei Jana at 88 nen IRI AA 97 lIrackMute 42 ANO AE 110 Makeup Tools 75 Transposition 41 62 Troubleshooting 115 IUNC a ea ee ia so aaa saten za 59 le Vue EE 65 DARE EC 104 107 CPP ERE RT 104 Data Change 109 local 104 SEH 104 NOE TT PRETE ed 109 EEN don tc tose geet 109 dE ee a via th se nds la 62 U Undo Changes 75 79 BEE 24 UOD e e ea ai al e mada 24 Ken CN 17 111 Driver 17 69 WD EE 17 KEE e ec a a a oe 51 71 72 110 Bil e oaie ae a etl wa 68 70 V Naa Na AT accu cee ae 93 Velocity 79 109 SAMAL nai 94 Velocity sensitivity 57 Version MANO AA 69 VOIO sone ost eae ae i ea 77 Dela setare e sania asul nak 60 Depth 60 KIA AA KAA 60 VID ae amp iii Sears wee an ore 113 Vi ere EE 67 SETTINGS mkaka ka and Dec acri 67 VIMATUNES 50 Visual Control 6 DEE 110 Visual Ctrl Mode
63. Edits crass cui a a 57 Fouale in apa we i a 78 Erase RS SPERI 101 Rhythm Composer 89 Celerina a m EE 101 Exit COnfirmM 52 Exp EEN 61 Exp Pedal All Parts 61 Export One Touch 33 EDC SS ERA a a ta 82 Expression Pedal 58 External Lyrics 55 56 F Factory Reset 111 Factory SONG sie mii ierte ta iia 45 FOCGOUE resede Ma ae 70 POK CROUS aaa se cu KA NG aw anes 75 EE catea AGA KG erate BAO 91 Fill Dili 85 HILA Ralf Bal sities asec aka 63 Fill Ritardando 63 E PCIE WA caci da ai ee 37 IU 59 FIONGCF IIIA 75 Ba aaa Grath are AA 72 FOOISWICCH sai m a ac tarie je ai a 18 10 PRE aro sie WAA tati aaa WAA 93 Format USB Device 111 Heeze Dalai eczeme e rusi tre doi mule e 79 BIEN 67 PU oua ae oe ir ae iata a 91 G GA se neo cetera a aid ata 71 73 GENETIC are EE risas 69 Ee EE 91 Global 65 CHANGE EEN 95 H Half Baron Fill In 69 alll teren meta ar E ai ana 75 lei RE EE 71 Headphones 19 Ho ARP odes Ge imi a 26 Se EE 71 LU EE 71 Highlight Color 68 ma EE 70 100 KO evantai ate iai are 62 OneTouch 66 Pedal RE 58 Performante mas aa tees 66 Wels EE 65 Initialize Factory settings 111 RAVENI iso ei 81 Storage device 111 Insert Rhythm tracks 92 SR EE 82 83 Instr Egualizer 79 Instrument
64. Enter the original data value i e the value that is being used right now by the selected track s for From For To specify the new value that should replace the From value These are what we call absolute changes you don t add or subtract values you replace them with other values This sys tem is only available for messages that allow you to select sounds or sound banks 12 5127 Inc Dec Expression Reverb Chorus Panpot These parameters allow you to add or subtract a given value to from the cur rent Expression Pan Reverb Send or Chorus Send values This may come in handy if the real time changes you recorded turn out to be too high or too low This parameter is not available for ADrums and ABass tracks Intro3 amp 4 and End3 amp 4 patterns The notes of the melodic rhythm tracks are compared against the chords played in the recognition area If the next chord you play contains the note the selected part is already sounding based on the previous chord that note is maintained If the new chord does not contain that note the rhythm part in question uses the closest Nearest note This produces a more musical behavior than any other system on the market 7 CCOO messages are the so called MSB bank select messag es They allows you to select the Capital Tone select 0 of a sound address Select if the current setting must not change The CC32 contro
65. F5 Woodblock 178 F 5 b9 79 G5 Hoo GAR ER MuteTriang 81 A5 OpenTriangl CPA yey 626 Shaker 83 B5 Jingle Bell PC 27 CC32 4 Dance Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 Kick 1 CR78 Kick 2 TR 606 Kick1 TR 707 Kick1 808 Kick TR 808 Kick 808 BassDrum TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909Comp Kick TR 909 Kick2 HipHop Kick2 BassDrumSet TechnoKick1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three HipHop Kick2 TR 909 Kick2 MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell TR 909 Kick2 TechnoKick2 Side Stick Dance Snare1 909 HandClap Power Snare1 Synth Drum 2 CR 78HiHatCl Synth Drum 2 808 HiHat Cl Synth Drum 2 CR 78HiHatOp Synth Drum 2 Synth Drum 2 808 Crash Synth Drum 2 606 Ride Cym ReverseCymbl Ride Bell Shake Tamb Splash Cym 808 Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo MuteTriangl OpenTriangl 626 Shaker Jingle Bell PC 28 CC32 4 CR 78 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 Kick 1 CR78 Kick 2 TR 606 Kick TR 707 Kick1 808 Kick TR 808 Kick 808 BassDrum TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909Comp Kick TR 909 Kick2 HipHop Kick2 BassDrumSet TechnoKick1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three MC 500 Beep
66. Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare1 Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare Elec Snare 3 66 Snare 260 TR 707 Snare 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR 808Snare2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR 909Snare2 Rap Snare JungleSnare1 House Snare House Snare House Snare Voice Tah Noise Slap PC30 CC32 4 TR 707 Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Small Club Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare Elec Snare 3 66 Snare 260 TR 707 Snare 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR 808Snare2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR 909Snare2 Rap Snare JungleSnare1 House Snare House Snare House Snare Voice Tah Noise Slap PC 26 CC32 4 TR 808 Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Small Club Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare1 Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare Elec Snare 3 66 Snare 260 TR 707 Snare 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR 808Snare2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR 909Snare2 Rap Snare JungleSnare1 House Snare House Snare House Snare Voice Tah Noise Slap d C 1 PC 31 CC32 4 TR 909 Elec Kick 2 Ue Elec Kick 1 D 1 CR78 Kick 1 CDI a CR78 Kick 2 2 4 1 E F 1 TR 606 Kick1 TR 707 Kick1 5 CR aia 808 Kick
67. IIIA 71 Sa AI ari 72 Makeup Tools rhythms and SMF 74 Usmo ihe Mak UMI EE 74 COMMON casa it pe a a RR TT TETTETETT 74 RER 75 Kr Ru EE 79 Saving your new rhythm or song SMF version 80 Rhythm Composer programming your ANA elt ta acre aa ana aie a e ava en du ta st au 81 Clearing the RAM memory Initialize Rhythm 81 Getting ready for the first track 82 Recording a rhythm Pale VEER 85 Auditioning your rhythm and adding more tracks 85 Saving your MYM oi ernerik AE Nadaanan aia ala 85 Recording other tracks and divisions 86 Help function on the main Rhythm Composer page 86 Muting tracks while recording others 87 PG ee 87 Rhythm Track Edit functions 88 Editing individual rhythm events Micro Edit 99 General procedure 99 KA NA AA 100 Other editoperationS 101 MIDI parameters 102 Kee 103 Loading a MIDI Set 103 Edit RAAM Fal EE 104 POI Tone al ES EE 105 EC SOC als AA 105 Kalte NEE 106 GE ee 106 Ee 107 Hagen EE 108 ENK e a PAA a a ate i la 108 Da AV CTT Sc cea anca e e AA 109 Visual Control TKCh 110 Save MIDI Si et dc e e n e e e n ia ii 110 FCO EE 111 Formatting a USB memory n a asnaannannnann 111 16 Visual Control function 113
68. PIANO for example TONE PIANO ORGAN E GUITAR STRINGS SAX PAD PERCUSS E PIANO ACCORD BASS A GUITAR VOCAL BRASS SYNTH ETHNIC SFX DRUM By pressing and holding one of these buttons you activate the lock function for Tone selection which means that Tones no longer change when you select Performance memories page 54 The display SN to 5 CURSOR Hold das Backing Keyboard BK 5 Playing the BK 5 s real time parts 2 Press the NUMERIC button to open the following window UPI Piano E Piano 0000 N urn eric ES The TONE buttons light 3 Press the TONE buttons that correspond to the figures you want to enter 0 9 For Tones you can enter up to 4 digits To select Tone 6 for instance simply pressing the 6 button is enough the display will show 0006 If you make a mistake the quickest way to correct it is by pressing the 0 button four times to enter 0000 and then restarting For Rhythms and Performance memories up to 3 digits can be entered If you try to enter more digits than possible for the current item a warning is displayed Tone doesn t exist 4 Press the ENTER SELECT button to confirm your entry The Numeric pop up disappears and the display jumps to the Tone and family you selected 5 Press the EXIT button to return to the main page Checking a Tone s or rhythm s MIDI address Tones and rhythms can also be selected via MIDI To this ef
69. Performance List to the BK 5 2 Press the PERFORMANCE LIST button The display now shows all Performance Lists on the connected USB memory Performance List 3 uer gel ENTER 3 Rotate the dial to select the desired Perfor mance List Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Other Performance List functions 4 Press the MENU button i i LIST JI SZT menu ENTER The display now changes to a page with the follow ing options Performance List My List DOL Make New List CURSOR Function Explanation Rename Allows you to rename the selected Perfor mance List Delete Deletes the selected Performance List Make New Allows you to create a new empty Per formance List Not available if you selected the Music Assistant or Factory Songs list in step 3 above Rotate the dial to select the desired option then press the ENTER SELECT If you select Rename The display changes to ly List 001 Delete yao 3 Insert E E HEE abc def ghi EA EI EI EI mno pgrs tuw Wxyz Hold This page allows you to change the name of the selected Performance List Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the desired character position You can press the NUMERIC button to switch between upper and lower case characters as well as numbers The LWR button can be used to delete the selected character The UP2 button allows you to insert a character Use the T
70. Real Tom Ridbl cP Real Tom JzHiHatOpenP PC 1 CC32 4 Standard 1 Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2 Rm Snare 2 Rm Snare 1 Std 1 Snare1 Std 1 Snare2 Std 2 Snare1 Std 2 Snare2 Tight Snare StandrdSnar1 LD Snare M LD Snare C Jazz Snare 1 Jazz Snare 2 Room Snare 1 Room Snare 2 Dance Snare1 Power Snare1 Rev Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare Elec Snare 3 TR 707 Snare 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 Rap Snare JungleSnare1 House Snare House Snare House Snare PC 2 CC32 4 Standard 2 Bar Chimes Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2 Std 1 Snare1 Std 1 Snare2 Std 2 Snare1 Std 2 Snare2 Tight Snare StandrdSnar1 LD Snare M LD Snare C Jazz Snare 1 Jazz Snare 2 Room Snare 1 Room Snare 2 Dance Snare1 Power Snare1 Rev Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare Elec Snare 3 TR 707 Snare 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 Rap Snare JungleSnare1 House Snare House Snare House Snare PC 3 CC32 4 Standard L R Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2 St Kick 1 St Kick 2 Crash Cymb1 St Snare2 Ride Cymbal St Snare1 Real Tom 6 Close HiHat2 Real Tom 4 Ride Bell Real Tom 1 Open HiHat2 St Kick1 P St Kick2 P JzCrashCym1P St Snare2 P Ride Cymbal St Snare1P Real Tom St HiHatClsP Real Tom Ridbl cP Real Tom St HiHatOpnP PC 9 CC32 4 Room Bel
71. Rec Composer page Track Tempo 20250 The tempo value you Key C C D Eb E If you want to use the sei her eka et F F G Ab A accompaniment ina and regarded as preset Bb B musically meaningful tempo You can change it at any stage in Rhythm Composer mode so start by selecting a tempo that allows you to record the music the way you want it to sound SS Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options Parameter Input Quantize Count In Measure Length Off 1 4 1 8 1 8T 1 16 1 16T 1 32 1921 1 64 Off 1Meas 2Meas Wait Note Off 1 136 Explanation This corrects minor timing problems It shifts the notes whose timing is not exactly right to the nearest correct unit Always select a resolu tion value that is fine enough to accept all note values you play If the shortest notes of your accompaniment are 1 16th note trip lets set the value to 1 16T The preset value 1 16 is OK for most sit uations If you do not want to quantize your playing while record ing set this parameter to Off You can also quantize the track after record ing it page 88 Specifies how long the count in should be before recording starts Off No count in Recording starts as soon as you press the START STOP button while AUDIO REC flashes 1Meas Recording starts after a 1 bar count in 2Meas Recording starts after a 2 bar count in Wait Note Recording starts
72. Rhythms to a USB memory Multi effects for rhythms or Standard MIDI files and real time parts With a view to obtaining the highest possible sound quality the BK 5 contains two dedicated multi effects processors MFX A and B for the Standard MIDI Files and rhythms you play back In addition there is one MFX processor for the real time parts Upper 1 Upper 2 Lower Composite Video Out The BK 5 s VIDEO OUTPUT socket can be connected to an external screen allowing your audience or fellow musicians to follow the lyrics and chord symbols only SMF files of the songs you perform You can also view digital pictures in the jpg format you took yourself 16 NTA parts Note to Arranger The BK 5 provides up to 16 MIDI parts dedicated to Arranger control via MIDI Note to Arranger Contents 1 Importantnotes 6 EE 8 3 Panel description 11 FON PAN e ee Ee 11 Rear ANC ee E ma aa ers 14 AGA ilelake a EE 15 5 Before you start using the BK 5 16 Connecting the AC adaptor 16 Connecting the BK 5 to an amplifier mixer etc 16 Connecting a MIDI deviee 00008 17 Connecting the BK 5 to your computer 17 If the computer doesn t see the BK 5 17 Connecting a television Set 18 Connecting an optional footswitch hold pedal or expresion AOC CICI e e n ont za ne asr dei n n a a in 18 Connecting a
73. SHaturalfiano CON upa GTAP MIDI EPiano2 OD di A Lu 07380 attack Pad The display shows the current octave setting OCT for all 3 real time parts Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the OCT parameter of the real time part whose setting you want to change Press the ENTER SELECT button The selected OCT field is displayed in reverse Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the desired setting Octave setting lid Press the ENTER SELECT button again The OCT field is no longer selected and the CURSOR VALUE dial can be used to select other fields You can also change the octave setting using MENU but ton Performance Edit gt Tone Part View gt Octave Shift page 59 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Other important functions Using Track Mute and Center Cancel You can use this function to mute tracks of rhythms or the melody part of the selected Standard MIDI File SMF After selecting a WAV or mp3 audio file you can attenuate the vocal part at the center of the stereo image Center Cancel The Mute function s behavior depends on the selected file type 1 Select a song SMF or audio or a rhythm 2 Press the START STOP button to start play back 3 Press the TRACK MUTE CENTER CANCEL button its indicator lights ui ar S m Di NAH Di NG pron He nl un lla Je wa CANCEL The Track Mute or Center Cancel function will turn on This depends on
74. Setting range 128 128 Alteration Mode This event allows you to specify how the notes recorded for a rhythm track will be used during Arranger playback See below for details This parameter is not available for ADrums tracks or the Intro3 Intro4 Ending3 Ending4 divisions Editing events Mi Editing Pitch Bend messages Pitch Bend messages can be positive or negative the range is 128 128 The value O means that the pitch of notes being played in that area is not altered If a Pitch Bend occurrence is not reset to 0 at some stage all notes will keep sounding flat when you no longer want them to W Editing control changes These messages CC can be set to the desired value 0 127 when the corresponding effect is needed but they also need to be reset to 0 to avoid unpleasant surprises TOO As stated above note messages comprise a note number a velocity value and a Gate Time value The range for note numbers is O C 127 G9 Velocity messages can be set anywhere between 1 extremely soft and 127 The value 0 cannot be entered because it would effectively switch off the note About Alteration Mode messages This message type is only available for melodic rhythm tracks i e not for ADrums or ABass tracks and needs to be inserted by hand using Create Event Rhythm tracks you only just recorded do not contain it It allows you to use a revolutionary system for adapt ing the rec
75. Snr SF Snr Gst WD Rim RR F Tom Reg CHH 1 TY L Tom Reg CHH 2 TY M Tom Reg OHH TY M Tom TY H Tom Crash Cym1a TY H Tom Rock Ride 1 China Cymbal Splash Cym Tamborine 3 Rock Crash 1 Cowbell3 Crash Cym1b Cowbell2 Lng Rock Ride 2 Conga Hi Mt Conga Lo Mt Conga Hi Slp Conga Hi Op Conga Lo Op Timbale Hi Timbale Low Mild Agogo H Mild Agogo L Cabasa Up Maracas Whistle Shrt Whistle Long Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mt Triangle Op Cabasa Cut DigiSpectrum Wind Chime Wood Block M Cajon 2 ConcertBD R amp B Kick Dry Kick 2 Old Kick Jazz Doos Agogo Noise Rock OHH JD Anklungs Rock OHH Cajon 3 Cajon 1 Mix Clap Gospel Clap Bright Clap Rock Rd Cup Cowbell Crash Cym 2 PC 2 CC32 5 LD Std Kit Dance Kick Dry Kick 1 Snr Roll Power Kick Amb Snr 2 Reg Kick 2 Reg PHH Reg Kick 1 LD Kick LD CStk LD Snr Reg Snr Gst LD Rim RR F Tom Reg CHH 1 LD L Tom Reg CHH 2 LD M Tom Reg OHH LD M Tom LD H Tom Crash Cym1a LD H Tom Rock Ride 1 China Cymbal Splash Cym Tamborine 3 Rock Crash 1 Cowbell3 Crash Cym1 Cowbell Rock Ride 2 Conga 2H Mt Conga 2L Mt Conga 2H Slp Conga 2H Op Conga Lo Op Timbale 1 Timbale 2 Agogo 2 Hi Agogo 2 Low Cabasa 2 Shaker 2 Whistle Shrt Whistle Guiro 2 Up Guiro Long Claves 2 Wood Block2H Wood Block2L Cuica 2 Low Cuica 2 Hi Triangle Mt Triangle Op Cabasa2 Cut DigiSpectrum Wind Chime Wood Block2M Caj
76. Surdo Get CH Open Surdo 88 E6 89 F6 Applause 91 G6 93 A6 95 B6 96 C7 Br Kick 1 Br Kick 2 Ge 7A Brush Crash 98 D7 Br Snare1 SES JAB Ride Cym IN 100 E7 101 F7 Br Snare2 Lite Tom 4 O Brs HiHatCls 103 G7 ut et YA Brush RideBL 105 A7 CRT Brs HiHatOpn 107 B7 108 C8 ae CB BrCrashCymbP 110 D8 NSL CH BrRideCymbal 112 ES 113 F8 NEWS CR BrHiHatClosP 115 G8 Lite Tom 4 Lite Tom 4 Br Kick1P Br Kick2P Br Snare1P Br Snare2P Lite4 tP Lite4 tP AIR CH Br RideBell 117 A8 ERWISEN BrHiHatOpenP 119 B8 120 C9 Lite4 tP 122 D9 124 E9 125 F9 127 G9 128 PC 33 CC32 4 Jazz Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause Br Snare1 Br Snare2 Brush Swirl Brush Tap Brush Slap1 Brush Slap2 Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Long Swirl Jazz Snare 1 Jazz Snare 2 Std 1 Snare1 Std 1 Snare2 Std 2 Snare1 Std 2 Snare2 Tight Snare StandrdSnar1 LD Snare M LD Snare C Room Snare 1 Room Snare 2 Dance Snare1 Power Snare1 Rev Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare 3 PC 34 CC32 4 Jazz L R Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Crash Cymb1 Jazz Snare1 Ride Cym IN Jazz Snare2 Real Tom 6 JazzClosedHH Real Tom 4 Ride Bell Real Tom 1 JazzOpenHH Jazz Kick1 P Jazz Kick2 P JzCrashCym1P Jazz Snare1P Ride Cymbal Jazz Snare2P Real Tom JzHiHatClosP
77. USB drive while it is being read from or written to i e while the USB flash access indicator blinks Handling CDs Li Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside encoded sur face of the disc Damaged or dirty CD discs may not be read prop erly Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner ability and copyright Recording duplication distribution sale lease performance or broadcast of copyrighted material musical works visual works broadcasts live performances etc belonging to a third party in part or in whole without the permission of the copyright owner is forbidden by law Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copy right held by a third party Roland assumes no responsibility what soever with regard to any infringements of third party copyrights arising through your use of this unit About audio files Audio files in the following formats can be played back e WAV format e 16 bit linear e Sampling rate of 44 1kHz e Stereo mono mp3 files e MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 e Sampling frequency 8 11 025 12 16 22 05 24 32 44 1 48kHz e Bit rate 32 40 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320kbps VBR variable bit rate Supported Standard MIDI Files Format 0 1 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Important notes Company names and product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners MPEG Layer 3 audio
78. V LINK compatible devices are connected via MIDI you ll be able to easily enjoy a variety of visual effects that are linked to the expressive elements of your perfor mance For example if you use the BK 5 with the EDIROL P 10 The following confirmation appears you ll be able to use the various controls on the BK 5 s EPROM Lasel A See keyboard to switch and control images on the EDIROL EE P 1 0 LUI Visual Control In order to enjoy the Visual Control function with the BK 5 and the EDIROL P 10 you ll need to make connec tions using a MIDI cable sold separately Last keyboard Octave is muted and dedicated la ta visual Control The display changes to Mot 4 4 geg RHYTHM IS Broken Dance OME TOUCH RHYTHM a C Maj TEMPO Em D S TONE OCT 0001 MaturalPiano a BT ini Etape ED rss attacipad O Edirol a Repeat this step to switch the Visual Control function Projector SEN back off The following message briefly confirms this operation To prevent malfunction and speaker damage you must mini Fe mize the volume on all equipment and turn off their power before you make any connections Saves AWA JA 1 Connect the BK 5 s MIDI OUT socket to the il MIDI IN socket of the optional MIDI Visual Control V LINK device 2 Press and hold the BASS INV button while CES Attack Pad pressing the AUTO FILL IN button BK 5 BASS AUTO INV FILL IN Backing Keyboard BK 5 Visual Control function
79. above One Touch Edit Same File Name A file having this name already exists Overwrite Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Using the One Touch function To overwrite the old rhythm file replacing it with your new settings use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select Yes then press the ENTER SELECT button If you dont want to overwrite the existing rhythm file select No and press ENTER SELECT to return to the One Touch Edit Press the EXIT button to return to the main page Backing Keyboard BK 5 Using the BK 5 as a USB player ER Using the BK 5 as a USB player This section explains how to playback MIDI SMF and audio songs stored on an optional USB memory Note that it is also possible to select rhythms on that device and to use them in the same way as the internal rhythms New song and rhythm files can be copied to the USB memory using your computer as you purchase them Getting ready to use the BK 5 as a File types the BK 5 can read and play back USB player Format 1 On your computer copy the new song and Rhythms stl rhythm Files to an optional USB memory i per one memory stick Files SMP kar Use USB memory sold by Roland M UF series We cannot VIMA TUNES files Connect an optional CD ROM drive to guarantee operation if any other USB memory is used on CD ROMs pro the BK 5 s USB MEMORY port to be duced for the able to play back commercially avail 2 Connect the USB memory to your BK 5 VIMA s
80. assign a MIDI receive channel to the selected part Parameter Setting Rx Ch 1516 Rx Shift This parameter allows you to transpose the note messages received from an external MIDI instrument or computer The maximum possible transposition is four octaves up 48 or down 48 Each step repre sents a semi tone Parameter Setting Rx Shift 48 400748 Rx Limit Low Limit High Limit Low and Limit High allow you to set the note range to be received If not all note messages received on a given MIDI channel should be played by the selected BK 5 part narrow down the range Parameter Setting Rx Limit Low C G9 Rx Limit High C G9 The Limit Low value cannot be higher than the Limit High value and vice versa Rx Event The Rx Event section provides a number of filters that allow you to specify whether the messages in question should be received On or not Off Filter Setting Explanation Program Off On Select On to receive pro Change gram change and bank select CCOO CC32 mes sages Pitch Bender Off On Select On to receive Pitch Bend messages Modulation Off On Select On to receive Mod ulation messages CC01 Volume Off On Select On to receive Vol ume messages CC07 Panpot Off On Select On to receive Pan pot messages CC10 Expression Off On Select On to receive Expression messages CC11 Reverb Off On Select On to receive Reverb messag
81. audio songs This setting is not memorized when you use Save Global Video Settings These parameters can be selected using MENU but ton gt Global gt Video Settings Video Mode E Aspect Ratio Full CURSOR The following table shows the Video Setting parame ters Parameter Setting Explanation Video Mode PAL NTSC Select the setting that corresponds to the for mat used by the con nected screen Full Center Specify the appropri ate aspect ratio for the screen you are using If you work with a IV set do not forget to select the correct channel AV or something to that effect see the manual that came with your set Aspect Ratio Lyrics Settings This page can be selected using MENU button gt Global gt Lyrics Settings Lyrics Settings Background Mode Background Color TE Highlight Color ZE Row Displaying d Chord View Off CURSOR es Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options The following table shows the Lyrics Settings parameters Parameter Setting Explanation Background Color Logo Color The back Mode User ground is empty but uses the selected color see below Logo The BK 5 s logo is shown as back ground User The BK 5 uses the selected JPG pic ture as background See XX Background 1 8 Choose the back Color ground color Highlight Color Choose the highlight color Row Displaying 2 4 Allows you to sp
82. center of the display page TOW Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options To select several consecutive events press the ENTER SELECT button while rotating the CURSOR VALUE dial towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction Press the ENTER SELECT button icon to remove the event you selected The BK 5 returns to the Micro Edit page W Move Event This function allows you to move one or several events Select the event you want to move Select the Move Event function Set To Bar To Beat and To CPT Parameter Setting Explanation To Bar See page 88 Specifies the position To Beat to which the first To CPT event in chronologi cal order of the selected group should be shifted If the position to which you move the selected event already contains other events the moved event is added at the end of that group Events located at 1 01 00 cannot be moved further to the left Press the WRITE button to confirm your settings and move the event The BK 5 returns to the Micro Edit page WE Copy Event This function allows you to copy one or several events Use Place Event to insert a copy of those events at the desired position Select the event you want to copy To select several consecutive events press and hold the ENTER SELECT button while rotating the CURSOR VALUE dial towards the left upward direc tion or the right downward direction A
83. damage to speakers or other devices Placement Using the BK 5 near power amplifiers or other equipment con taining large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this instrument or move it further away from the source of interference This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use it in the vicinity of such receivers Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices such as cell phones are operated in the vicinity of this unit Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call or while conversing Should you experience such problems you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit or switch them off Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise sub ject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or dis color the unit When moved from one location to another where the temperature and or humidity is very different water droplets condensation may form inside the BK 5 Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition Therefore before using the unit you must allow it to stand for several hours until the condensation has completely evaporated Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard This can be the cause of malfunction such as keys ceasing to produc
84. divisions do not select other divisions when they are finished because they never end they keep playing until you select another division by hand or by foot One shot divisions One shot patterns or Divi sions are only played once and then select a looped division or stop the Arranger The BK 5 uses the fol lowing one shot divisions INTRO 1 4 FILL UP 1 3 FILL DOWN 1 3 and ENDING 1 lt 4 The division type also determines how the respective tracks are played back Any track of a looped pattern that is shorter than another track is repeated until the longest track is finished Then a new cycle begins Here s how you can take advantage of that if the drums play the same notes during four measures while the rhythm guitar or piano needs four mea sures to complete a cycle recording only one drum measure is enough because it is automatically repeated until the longest track Is finished W Several drum tracks are possible The Rhythm Composer allows you to assign a Drum Set to any Accomp track thereby turning it into an additional drum track Clearing the RAM memory Initialize Rhythm The first thing we need to do is clear the BK 5 s rhythm RAM memory because it is not empty when you select the Rhythm Composer Press the MENU button select Rhythm Composer then press the ENTER SELECT button The display changes to Rhythm Camp Broken Dance M 001 1 TRACK MODE DIVISION Major Int
85. e how strongly the selected track should be processed by the reverb effect Chorus s127 Chorus Send CC93 i e how strongly the selected track should be processed by the chorus effect Panpot 0 127 The track s stereo placement 00 L 64 127 RD Expression Press the WRITE button its indicator flashes to confirm your settings P la a Ya b kee le He a kaz kaz The display changes to Initialize Rhythm The internal Rhythm will be deleted Are you Sure Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select YES and press the ENTER SELECT button The display returns to the Rhythm Composer page which only contains the sound assignments you have Just made Select NO if you don t want to initialize the rhythm memory area Getting ready for the first track 1 On the Rhythm Composer page use the CURSOR VALUE dial and ENTER SELECT button to select the Division parameter Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the Division you want to record Intro Main Fill or Ending Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Rhythm Composer programming your own rhythms 3 Press the AUDIO REC button Way you need to tell the BK 5 what key you are recording in This is to ensure that the chords you play dur ing everyday use of your rhythm with the BK 5 s Arranger lead to the correct real time transpositions of the selected Division The BK 5 allows you to rec
86. heard from the external amplifier Can t play an audio mp3 format song After connecting the BK 5 s USB COMPUTER port to your computer the BK 5 doesn t receive MIDI messages Unable to read from write to USB memory Can t save to USB memory Audio recording won t start or stops unexpectedly Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Troubleshooting Action Is the included AC adaptor power cord correctly connected to an AC outlet and to the BK 5 Do not use any AC adaptor or power cord other than the ones included Doing so will cause malfunctions Did you switch the BK 5 on Could the VOLUME knob be turned down Select a higher set ting Can you hear sound through headphones If you can hear sound through headphones it may be that the connection cables are broken or that your amp or speaker has malfunctioned Check the cables and your equipment once again Could the part volume settings have been minimized Check the Volume setting of each part Could a MIDI message received from an external MIDI device vol ume message or exclusive message have lowered the volume Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor Use a connection cable that doesn t contain a resistor Is the Tuning setting appropriate Did you transpose the rhythm song Also check the Rhythm Scale Tune parameter If the TRACK MUTE CENTER CANCEL button is lit the vocal sound will be attenuated If the TRACK MUTE but
87. key to the left of the fundamental Minor seventh chords Fundamental any black key to the left any white key to the left Arranger Hold This function sustains the notes you play in the chord recognition area Zone Select Off if you want the accompaniment to stop as soon as the keys in that zone are released This parameter is switched On by default Parameter Setting Arranger Hold Off On Tempo Each rhythm has a preset tempo that is recalled when a rhythm is selected This parameter allows you to specify if and when the BK 5 should ignore the preset tempo and go on using the tempo of the pre viously selected rhythm Parameter Setting Tempo Preset Auto Lock Here is what these three options mean Selecting a new rhythm Setting Playback is stopped Playback is running Preset The rhythm s preset tempo is loaded Auto The BK 5 loads the preset tempo of the new rhythm The BK 5 doesn t load the preset tempo of the new rhythm The new rhythm is played at the current tempo Lock The BK 5 doesn t load the preset tempo of the new rhythm It is played at the current tempo a b c d Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Performance Edit parameters The setting of this parameter is neither saved to the Perfor mance memories nor to the Global area see Save Global on p 70 The Lock setting can also be activated by press ing and holding the TAP TEMPO button
88. portable audio player 19 Listening through headphones 19 Installing the MUSIC TESE anu mo ata a sa ia 19 Turning the power onf off 20 Tuning the e Le A la RR EE 20 Turning the poweroff 20 EC KAU o EEN 20 Demo eg asi EE 21 6 Basic operation of the BK 5 22 About the display and cursor operation 22 DEI Rer 22 Moving the cursor and setting parameter values 22 Moving between WINDOWS TA 22 7 Playing the BK 5 s real time parts 24 Switching the UP2 and LWR parts on and off 24 Selecting Tones for the real time parts 24 Using the UP2 or LWR button to select Tones 24 Selecting a Tone on the main page 24 Using the Numeric function to select Tones Rhythms and Performances 25 Checking a Tone s or rhythm s MIDI address 26 Using the Help function 26 8 Rhythm functions 27 Volume balance between the backing and the real le EE 27 Abouttherhythms 27 UN AA ua 27 SEIECHAGTAVIAMS ci ea rit 29 Playing back rAythMS acero ann 30 Using the One Touch function 31 Programming your own ONE TOUCH settings One Touch Edit BEEN 32 9 Using the BK 5 asa USB player 34 Getting ready to use the BK 5 as a USB player 3
89. selected part Max Value 1 127 This parameter allows you to set the highest velocity value with which you can trigger the selected part Fixed value 1 127 Allows you to set the value when Curve is set to Fixed This parameter can only be edited if the Curve parameter is set to Fixed Eq Part Edit If you also want to edit the parameters of the equalizer you have to rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial and press the ENTER SELECT button to select the Eq Edit Part page Switch On High Freq 8000 Hz High Gain 4 de Mid Freq 2000 Hz Mid Gain 2 dB Mido 20 LowFreg 30 Hz Low Gain 1dE CURSOR CR DES Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the desired parameter and press the ENTER SELECT button Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to set the desired value Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options The following parameters are available Parameter Setting range Explanation Switch Off On This parameter allows you to switch the equalizer on and off High Freq 1500Hz 2000Hz Allows you to set the 3000Hz 4000Hz cutoff frequency of 6000Hz 8000Hz the high band this is 12000Hz a shelving filter High Gain 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected High fre quency Positive val ues boost increase the volume of that frequency band neg ative values cut attenuate it Mid Freq 200 8000Hz Allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the middle band th
90. the BK 5 suggests the name User Rhythm Otherwise it suggests the name of the rhythm you have been editing or Rhythm NUMERIC LA R NUMERIC uz elete yao 3 Insert EA EI EA EI i A abc def ghi G EA HE mno pgrs tuy weyz Hold L IR ven Bac Use the TONE buttons to select a different character Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the next character position you want to change You can also press the LWR button to delete the selected character or the UP2 button to insert a character Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the name Press the WRITE button to confirm your desire to save the rhythm The display briefly confirms the operation and then returns to the main Rhythm Composer page If the USB memory already contains a rhythm file of the specified name you will be asked whether you want to overwrite it My Rhythms E A file having this name already exists Overwrite In this case select YES using the CURSOR VALUE dial and press ENTER SELECT to replace the old file with the new one the old file will be lost Otherwise select NO and press the ENTER SELECT button to return to the Save page and enter a dif ferent name Recording other tracks and divisions You can now record the second track probably the bass If you d like to do the guided tour again return to page 82 Do not forget to set the key for the bass part see Key on p 83 Once the fir
91. to pitch bend messages But they will while the keyboard is not split On The keyboard part always responds to left right movements of the BENDER MODULATION lever Off The part in question does not respond to left right movements of the BENDER MODULATION lever Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Performance Edit parameters Bender Range This parameter sets the pitch interval i e the value that will be used when the BENDER MODULATION lever is pushed all the way to the left or right Parameter Setting Bender Range 00424 Modulation Assign This parameter allows you to specify for each key board part how it should respond to Modulation messages CC01 Parameter Setting Modulation Assign Auto On Off Auto The keyboard part only responds to backward movements of the BENDER MODULATION lever when no split setting causes It to be to the left of other keyboard parts In other words parts you can play with your left hand after selecting a split no longer respond to modulation messages But they will while the keyboard is not split On The keyboard part always responds to backward movements of the BENDER MODULATION lever Off The part in question does not respond to back ward movements of the BENDER MODULATION lever Cut Off This filter parameter allows you to make the selected sound darker or brighter Positive settings mean that more overtones will be allowed to pass so that the sound becomes brighter
92. to select the desired parameter s then press the ENTER SELECT button Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to set the value The following parameters are available Mute Allows you to mute the selected part so that it is no longer audible Parameter Setting Mute Off On Solo Allows you to solo the selected part which means that all other rhythm parts are switched off Parameter Explanation Solo Off On Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Performance Edit parameters Volume Adjusts the volume of the selected rhythm part Selecting 0 means that the part is question is no longer audible Parameter Setting Volume 00127 Exp Pedal Select Off if you don t need pedal expression for the selected part This means that the rhythm part in question no longer responds to an expression pedal you may have connected to the SWITCH EXPRESSION socket Parameter Setting Exp Pedal Off On Exp Pedal All Parts On If you are not sure which rhythm parts still receive expression messages and if you want all to receive them you can select this field and press the ENTER SELECT button Exp Pedal All Parts Off If you are not sure which rhythm parts still receive expression messages and if no rhythm part should receive them you can select this field and press the ENTER SELECT button Split This page allows you to set two keyboard related parameters It can be selected using MENU button gt P
93. to the MIDI OUT socket or USB COMPUTER port and hence to external MIDI instruments When a parameter is modified inside a part the display shows Sound source MIDI OUT MIDI OUT GER Ho LOCAL OFF and ME m egal Loading a MIDI Set The MIDI Set environment contains two options with preset settings All you need to do is select them to restore the default settings for the sections or aspects in question In addition there are 8 MIDI Set memories where you can save your own settings Parameter Setting MIDI Set Key Rhythm PK Series Song User1 8 E Key Rhythm This option recalls the factory MIDI settings for the keyboard parts UP1 UP2 LWR MELODY INT and the rhythm parts ADrum ABass Acc1 6 The most important and practical use for this field is resetting Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland MIDI parameters the MIDI transmit receive channels of the real time and rhythm parts and to switch off MIDI transmis sion reception of the song parts This parameter applies to both reception RX and trans mission TX The BK 5 indeed allows you to set separate TX and RX channels for each part NI PK Series This option prepares the BK 5 for MIDI control using a PK series MIDI pedalboard The most important set tings are Part Switch is set to Int and Rhythm PcRx is set to On E Song This option restores the factory settings for the BK 5 s SMF song parts and switches off the MIDI trans
94. volume of the selected instrument Nega tive values decrease the current volume positive val ues increase it This is a relative setting that is added to or subtracted from the original setting Parameter Setting Volume 12 505 127 Reverb Use this parameter to set the reverb send level Nega tive values decrease the current reverb send level positive values increase it This is a relative setting that is added to or subtracted from the original set ting Parameter Setting Reverb 127 0 127 Chorus Use this parameter to set the chorus send level Neg ative values decrease the current chorus send level positive values increase it This is a relative setting that is added to or subtracted from the original set ting Parameter Setting Chorus 127 0 127 Panpot Use this parameter to change the stereo placement of the selected instrument 0 means no change negative values shift the instrument towards the left and positive values shift it towards the right Parameter Setting Panpot 127 0 127 In the case of Drum Sets this setting applies to all drum percussion instruments There is also a parameter that can be set for specific drum instruments See page 79 Octave T Use this parameter to transpose the selected instru ment up or down by up to 4 octaves Parameter Setting Octave 4 0 4 Velocity This parameter allows you to modify the velocity range of the ins
95. wech d wech d wech sch el T az lt oan ss HI Hi SS 7J wo E GA NN NN 17 18 18 18 19 No Name 0069 Stevie s B3 0070 Dyno Rotary 0071 Hang Twice 0072 Felix Ballad 0073 XV Organ 0074 B3 Has Come 0075 Head Up B3 0076 Br Ballad B3 0077 Organ 1 0078 Organ 2 0079 Organ 3 0080 Ful Organ 1 0081 Ful Organ 2 0082 Ful Organ 3 0083 Ful Organ 4 0084 Church Org 1 0085 Church Org 2 0086 Church Org 3 0087 Organ Flute 0088 Theater Org 0089 Reed Organ 0090 60 s Organ 0091 Org Jazz1 9 0092 Jazz Organ 1 0093 Jazz Organ 2 0094 Jazz Organ 3 0095 Jazz Organ 4 0096 JazzOrgan RD 0097 Perc Organ 1 0098 Perc Organ 2 0099 Perc Organ 3 0100 Full Perc 0101 Fire Perc 0102 Rock Organ 0103 Rotary Org S 0104 Rotary Org F 0105 Rotary Organ 0106 L Organ 0107 Chorus Or 0108 Mellow 1 0109 Cheese Organ 0110 Organ 101 0111 JX8 Organ 0112 D 50 Organ 0113 VS Organ 0114 Trem Organ 0115 E Organ 16 2 0116 Organ Bass 0117 Puff Organ 0118 Hybrid Organ 0119 70 s E Organ 0120 Farf Organ 0121 Mellow Harm 0122 Hand Harm 0123 B Harp Basic 0124 B Harp Suppl 0125 Acc Master 0126 Acc Classic 0127 Italian Folk 0128 Fr Musette 0129 Steierische 0130 Bandoneon 1 0131 Bandoneon 2 0132 Bandoneon 3 0133 Soft Accord 0134 Accordion Fr 0135 Accordion It 0136 OrganAcc 0137 OboeAcc 0138 ViolinAcc CCOO CC32 82 82 85 84 80 88 80 KONO OO ER WIN akala SS an E 69 68 52 53 54 52
96. well The resulting audio file is stored in the WAV format not mp3 which allows you to burn your recordings onto a CD using your computer You will need a USB memory to record your performance Recording The following is based on the assumption that the Rec Audio Sync parameter page 68 is active 1 Connect the USB memory to which you wish to save the audio data NOTE or memory sold by Roland M UF series We cannot guarantee operation if any other USB memory is used 2 Prepare everything you want to record e Select the rhythm or song you want to use as accom paniment e Set the levels and effects etc 3 Set the desired balance between the rhythm song and the real time parts using the BALANCE buttons You may also want to set the Audio In Level param eter page 68 4 Press the AUDIO REC button its indicator flashes If you pressed the AUDIO REC button by accident press and hold it until its indicator goes dark again 5 Press the START STOP button Las The indicators of the AUDIO REC and START STOP buttons light and the BK 5 starts playing back the selected rhythm or song and recording Everything you play on the keyboard is recorded 6 At the end of the song press the AUDIO REC or START STOP button to stop recording Rhythm or song playback and recording stop The fol lowing message appears NG Recording o Ga 2 Delete Insert AHAHA EI A abc def gh
97. when you start playback see below The icon in the lower left corner of the display page changes as follows mai Cames CT menu 3 mm Press the 5 1 button to start playback of all audio songs While playback of all songs is running you can navigate the USB memory to check its contents for example The Play All Songs function continues to play back the files of the folder you selected in step 2 above If you select a different file while navigating by pressing ENTER SELECT the Play All Songs function is switched off and the following message appears iby Songs Play all Songs deactivated 8 Press the i button to stop sequential play back Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Loop function MARK AIB Deactivating the Play All Songs function The Play All Songs function needs to be deactivated if you no longer need it To do so proceed as follows 1 1 2 3 If the display doesn t currently show the contents of the connected USB memory press the USB MEMORY button Press the USB MEMORY button again to change the icon back to Binti Pressing the n button now will only start playback of the selected song Loop function MARK A B The Loop function can be used to specify a passage such as the chorus of a song that will be repeated sev eral times This function is available for both audio and SMF songs You can also use it to practise difficult son
98. where you can change the name and enter a different name then press the WRITE button When you press the WRITE button your audio file is saved to the My Recordings folder on the USB memory 55 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Lock functions 14 Lock functions The BK 5 allows you to lock protect several settings to ensure that they no longer change when you select a different Performance memory The BK 5 s locks are data filters that allow you to use your Performance memories more efficiently because you can ignore settings that may be fine for one song the one you prepared the Performance memory for but not for another Here is an example Suppose you select a Performance memory that assigns the French Horns sound to the Upper1 part which you want to keep for the entire song or set In this case lock i e protect the Uppert part after selecting this memory to ensure that subsequent Performance memories you recall modify all of the DK Ge eligible settings except the Upper1 part which goes on using the French Horns sound All settings that can be protected are indicated by means of the legend Hold to LOCK The Performance Hold settings are linked to these buttons and therefore adopt the on off status you select on the BK 5 s front panel Unlike the other lock parameters the protection of the tempo setting see MENU button Performance Edit Arranger Setting gt Tempo page 63 a
99. 08 Kick TR 808 Kick 808 BassDrum TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909Comp Kick TR 909 Kick2 HipHop Kick2 BassDrumSet TechnoKick1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three TR 909 Kick2 TechnoKick2 MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell HipHop Kick2 TR 909 Kick2 Side Stick House Snare 909 HandClap Elec Snare 2 909 Tom TR 707HiHatC 909 Tom CR 78HiHatCl 909 Tom 909HiHat Opn 909 Tom 909 Tom 909 Crash 909 Tom 909Ride Cymb ReverseCymbl Ride Bell Shake Tamb Splash Cym 808 Cowbell 909 Crash Vibraslap Ride Cymbal CR78 HiBongo CR78 LoBongo 808 Conga 808 Conga 808 Conga High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa 808 Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro CR78 Guiro 808 Clave Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo MuteTriangl OpenTriangl 626 Shaker Jingle Bell PC17 CC32 4 Power Std 1 Kick1 Std 1 Kick2 Std 2 Kick1 Std2 Kick2 Kick 1 Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Room Kick 1 Room Kick 2 Power Kick1 Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 TR 808 Kick TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 Voice One Voice Two Voice Three MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Power Kick2 Power Kick1 Side Stick Dance Snare1 808 Clap Power Snare1 Rock Tom 4 Close HiHat2 Rock Tom 4 Pedal HiHat2 Rock Tom 4
100. 125 1134 HandClapMenu 40 4 116 1135 909 HandClap 32 4 116 1136 Applause 1 4 127 1137 Applause 2 4 127 1138 ApplauseWave 4 127 1139 Voice ComeOn 23 4 127 1140 Voice One 16 4 127 1141 Voice Two 17 4 127 1142 Voice Three 18 4 127 1143 Voice Tah 19 4 127 1144 Voice Aou 24 4 127 1145 Voice Qou 25 4 127 1146 Voice Hie 26 4 127 1147 Voice Whey 20 4 127 1148 Voice Kikit 22 4 127 1149 Burner 12 4 126 1150 Glass amp Glam 13 4 126 1151 Ice Ring 14 4 126 1152 Crack Bottle 16 4 126 1153 Pour Bottle 17 4 126 1154 Open CD Tray 19 4 126 1155 Audio Switch 20 4 126 1156 Bounce 18 4 117 1157 Key Typing 21 4 126 1158 SL1 22 4 126 1159 SL 2 23 4 126 1160 Boeeeen 26 4 126 1161 R Crossing 27 4 126 1162 Compresser 28 4 126 1163 Sword Boom 29 4 126 1164 Sword Cross 30 4 126 1165 Stab 1 31 4 126 1166 Stab 2 32 4 126 1167 Laughing 1 4 127 1168 BabyLaughing 9 4 127 1169 Screaming 2 4 127 1170 Punch 3 4 127 1171 Heart Beat 4 4 127 1172 Footsteps 5 4 127 124 20 Drum Sets PCA CC32 4 New Pop O C 1 HipHop Kick1 ME Kick 1 2 D 1 MexKick Rm Kick 1 4 Rm Kick 2 5 HipHop Kick2 6 F4 1 echnokick1 7 G 1 BassDrumSet HipHop Kick1 9 A 1 909CompKick 10 Bb 1 er Kick 1 11 B 1 JazzKick 12 CO NewRockKik ES AB Cymbal Roll 14 DO Rock Stick 2 Rm Snare 1 16 EO RmSnare2 17 FO StSnarel EW St Snare2 19 GO NewJzSn2 Pit OB NewJzSn1 21 AO R amp B Snare RockSnare2_2 23 BO RockSnare1_2 24 C1 PopSnare38 2 VASI ae Snare Ghost
101. 15 PureFlatLead 47 4 84 0789 Music Bell 10 4 99 0864 Oud Strings 28 4 106 0716 Short Chord 83 4 87 0790 Big Panner 4 4 103 0865 Ancestral 1 4 98 0717 Charang 0 4 85 0791 Reso Panner 5 4 103 0866 Converge 8 4 96 0718 Wire Lead 4 85 0792 Big Blue 29 4 102 0867 Prologue 1 2 4 98 0719 FB Charang 2 4 85 0793 Vibra Bells 8 4 99 0868 Prologue 2 3 4 98 0720 Mellow GR Ld 5 4 85 0794 Goblin 0 4 102 0869 HistoryWave 5 4 98 0721 Fat SyncLead 17 4 85 0795 7th Atmos 17 4 104 0870 Echo Pan 2 3 4 103 0722 5th DecaSync 19 4 85 0796 D Mention 80 4 95 0871 Pan Sequence 8 4 103 0723 Dirty Sync 20 4 85 0797 EP Pad 9 4 97 0872 Star Theme 0 4 104 0724 DualSyncLead 21 4 85 0798 CP Pad 11 4 97 0873 Echo Bell 1 4 103 0725 5th Saw Wave 0 4 87 0799 Panner Pad 2 4 94 0874 Just Before 20 4 102 0726 5th Lead 2 4 87 0800 Bowed Glass 0 4 93 0875 RandomEnding 22 4 102 0727 JP 5th Saw 5 4 87 0801 Special Rave 4 4 94 0876 Random Sine 23 4 102 0728 JP8000 5thFB 6 4 87 0802 Star Dust 3 4 104 0877 Noise amp SawHit 25 4 102 T 2 2 No Name 0878 DancingDrill 0879 Dirty Stack 0880 Static Hit 0881 Acid Copter 0882 260HarmPad 0883 Tambra 0884 Tamboura 0885 Rabab 0886 Gopichant 0887 Shamisen 0888 Kalimba 0889 Sanza 0890 Bagpipe 0891 UillnPipe Or 0892 Fiddle 0893 Pungi 0894 Banjo 0895 Muted Banjo 0896 Cimbalom_F 0897 HDMallCimba 0898 Zither 0899 Santur 0900 Cimbalom 0901 Dulcimer 0902 Purify 0903 Tron Flute 0904 ORClaVib 0905 ORClaTrl 0906 Frula 0907 FrulaTr
102. 2 0768 EP Heaven 44 4 89 0843 Gamelimba 19 4 99 0695 FatSawLead 14 4 82 0769 Bell Heaven 3 4 89 0844 Bottom Bell 23 4 99 0696 Waspy Synth 16 4 82 0770 Water Space 4 4 92 0845 Warm Atmos 1 4 100 0697 PM Lead 17 4 82 0771 Cosmic Voice 8 4 92 0846 Vaporish 80 4 91 0698 MG Saw 24 4 82 0772 Vocorderman 11 4 92 0847 Brass Star 3 4101 0699 P5 Saw Lead 33 4 82 0773 Horror Pad 8 4 95 0848 Org Bell 8 4 101 0700 Natural Lead 36 4 82 0774 Breath amp Rise 11 4 95 0849 Goblinson 1 4 102 0701 Synchronized 38 4 82 0775 X hale 81 4 95 0850 50 s Sci Fi 2 4 102 0702 SequenceSaw1 40 4 82 0776 Soundtrack 0 4 PB 0851 Abduction 3 4 102 0703 SequenceSaw2 41 4 82 0777 JP8Haunting 43 4 92 0852 Auhbient 4 4 102 0704 Octave Stack 9 4 91 0778 Metal Pad 0 4 94 0853 LFO Pad 5 4 102 0705 Reso Saw 42 4 82 0779 Silky Pad 1 9 4 104 0854 LFO Sweep 44 4 90 0706 Cheese Saw 43 4 82 0780 Echo Pan 1 2 4 103 0855 Saw Strings 46 4 90 0707 FatSolo Lead 4 4 84 0781 Brightness 0 4 101 0856 Ambient BPF 2 4 96 0708 ForcefulLead 5 4 84 0782 New Age Pad 2 4 89 0857 Random Str 6 4 102 0709 Oct UnisonLd 6 4 84 0783 LowBirds Pad 8 4 102 0858 UFO FX 14 4 102 0710 Mad Lead 8 4 84 0784 D 50 Retour 5 4 101 0859 FallinInsect 18 4 102 0711 CrowdingLead 9 4 84 0785 Fantasia 1 0 4 89 0860 LFO Oct Rave 19 4 102 0712 Space Org X 81 4 87 0786 Fantasia 2 1 4 89 0861 Halo Pad 0 4 95 0713 Double Sqr 10 4 84 0787 Fantasia 3 4 4 89 0862 Sweep Pad 0 4 96 0714 Chord maj7th 82 4 87 0788 Fantasia 4 5 4 89 0863 Oud 24 4 106 07
103. 266 For New Zealand TEL 09 3098 715 CENTRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BARBADOS A amp B Music Supplies LTD 12 Webster Industrial Park Wildey St Michael BARBADOS TEL 246 430 1100 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 211 Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 COLOMBIA Centro Musical Ltda Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9 Medellin COLOMBIA TEL 574 3812529 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 258 0211 CURACAO Zeelandia Music Center Inc Orionweg 30 Curacao Netherland Antilles TEL 305 5926866 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez Calle Proyecto Central No 3 Ens La Esperilla Santo Domingo DOMINICAN REPUBLIC TEL 809 683 0305 ECUADOR Mas Musika Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma Guayaquil ECUADOR TEL 593 4 2302364 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo Il Edificio No 4010 San Salvador EL SALVADOR TEL 262 0788 GUATEMALA Casa Instrumental Calzada Roosevelt 34 01 zona 11 Ciudad de Guatemala GUATEMALA TEL 502 599 2888 HONDURAS Almacen Pajaro Azul S A de C V BO Paz
104. 333 1863 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 411 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra Intirama Ruko Garden Shopping Arcade Unit 8 CR Podomoro City JI Letjend S Parman Kav 28 Jakarta Barat 11470 INDONESIA TEL 021 5698 5519 5520 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA SINGAPORE Roland Asia Pacific Sdn Bhd 45 1 Block C2 Jalan PJU 1 39 Dataran Prima 47301 Petaling Jaya Selangor MALAYSIA TEL 03 7805 3263 PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD 9F 5 No 112 Chung Shan North Road Sec 2 Taipei 104 TAIWAN R O C TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 100 108 Soi Verng Nakornkasem New Road Sumpantawong Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 224 8821 VIET NAM VIET THUONG CORPORATION 386 CACH MANG THANG TAM ST DIST 3 HO CHI MINH CITY VIET NAM TEL 08 9316540 AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA For Australia TEL 02 9982 8
105. 4 CR 78 Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Small Club Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare Elec Snare 3 66 Snare 260 TR 707 Snare 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR 808Snare2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR 909Snare2 Rap Snare JungleSnare1 House Snare House Snare House Snare Voice Tah Noise Slap PC 64 CC32 4 V VoxDrum Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana Timbal HiFlm Timbal LoFlm NewTmbIPHS NewShekere1 NewShekere2 NHBngoMute L BongoMute CajonHi CajonHiFlm Cajon Low CajonLoFlm FImncoHClap1 FImncoHClap1 BongoCowBell AfHey MamboCowBell MexFVox2 AfFoots MexFVox1 MexMVox1 YodelFVox1 MexMVox2 YodelMVox1 MexMVox3 FImncoFVox1 YodelFVox2 FImncoFVox2 NewWhistle1 FImncoFVox3 NewWhistle2 FlmncoMVox1 FImncoMVox2 BrazilVox1 FImncoMVox3 BrazilVox2 BrazilVox3 AfAahhh Voice Snare Voice Snare PC 49 CC32 4 Orchestra Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause Applause 2 Small Club Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani PC 50 CC32 4 Ethnic Agogo Agogo Shaker Low Whistle Low Whistle Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Short Guiro Long Guiro Cabasa Up Cabasa Down Claves Woodblock Woodblock PC 32 CC32 4 Multi Drum
106. 4 File types the BK 5 can read and play back 34 Selecting a song or rhythm on a USB memory 34 Playing back a song or rhythm from a USB memory35 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Renaming or deleting files folders ona USB ON e ascut ec cap ip aa ul ta 36 Rename 36 B i ee d ae Eege 36 Using the Search function to locate songs rhythms ge e a aa ma tace ETET tit d cai al 37 Activating the Play All Songs parameter for the YSB MEMON AA APP 38 Deactivating the Play All Songs function 39 Loop function MARK AR 39 Setting and using the loop positions 39 10 Other important functions 41 Changingthekey 41 Changingtheoctave 41 Using Track Mute and Center Cancel 42 Selecting the track s to mute for rhythms OF MP ON EE 42 Using the Melody Intell igence function 43 Using Splitmode 43 Setting the volume of the real time parts 43 11 Performance Lists 45 Performance Music Assistant Factory Songs info 45 Loading a Performance Music Assistant Factory SONOS Sls ey bad naaa a aaa Seder dt cee e 45 Recalling a Performance Music Assistant Factory SONGS MEMON EE 46 Quickly locating Performance memories 46 Saving your settings as a Performance 46 Other Performance Lis
107. 406 Cello 0 4 43 0259 MG Bass 4 40 0333 2 Guitars 66 4 26 0407 Cello sect 3 4 49 0260 Modular Bass 4 40 0334 12 Strings 8 4 26 0408 Cello Attack 1 4 43 0261 Seg Bass 1 3 4 40 0335 Nylon Steel1 9 4 26 0409 Contrabass 0 4 44 0262 SynthBass201 1 4 40 0336 Nylon Steel2 67 4 26 0410 ContraBsSect 34 4 49 0263 u i e o V Sw 84 4 40 0337 Mandolin 24 4 26 0411 Harp 0 4 47 0264 VocoBass 83 4 40 0338 Mandolin Tr 26 4 26 0412 Harp St 2 4 47 0265 Raver Bass 1 81 4 40 0339 MandolinTrem 18 4 26 0413 Uillean Harp 8 4 47 0266 Raver Bass 2 82 4 40 0340 Reguint Gt 1 40 4 25 0414 Synth Harp 16 4 47 0267 MG Blip Bs 7 4 40 0341 Reguint Gt 2 52 4 25 0415 Harp amp Strings 1 4 47 0268 SH 101 Bass 80 2 39 0342 FI Gtr 1 48 4 25 0416 Timpani 0 4 48 0269 SH101 Bass 1 17 4 40 0343 FI Gtr 2 49 4 25 0417 Str Flute 13 4 49 0270 SH101 Bass 2 18 4 40 0344 FI GtrRoll 51 4 25 0418 Strings Horn 12 4 49 0271 SH101 Bass 3 20 4 40 0345 Nylon Steel3 68 4 26 0419 S Str Choir 12 4 50 0272 SH101 Bass 4 47 4 40 0346 Ukulele 8 4 25 0420 JP8 Strings1 81 4 51 0273 JP 8 Bass 4 39 0347 Velo Harmnix 24 4 25 0421 JP8 Strings2 80 4 51 0274 MG Oct Bass2 4 40 0348 Atk Steel Gt 10 4 26 0422 JP Strings 3 4 51 0275 Bs DistGT 40 119 34 0349 TamCoStp 50 2 25 0423 JP Strings 1 61 2 51 0276 RND Bass 26 4 40 0350 TamCoTrl 51 2 25 0424 JP Saw Str 4 4 52 0277 Bubble Bass 28 4 40 0351 TamBPStp 52 2 25 0425 Syn Strings1 0 4 51 0278 Sync Bass 1 24 4 40 0352 TamBPTrl 53 2 25 0426 Syn Strings2 0 4 52 0279 Spike Bass 21 4
108. 5 Menu options Makeup Tools rhythms and SMF These functions allow you to actually edit the selected rhythm or SMF song Standard MIDI File without pay ing too much attention to the underlying parameters The Rhythm Makeup Tools and SMF Makeup Tools func tions cannot be used to edit Standard MIDI Files that use the XG format Using the Makeup Tools 1 Select the rhythm or SMF song you wish to modify on the connected USB memory see p 34 You can also select an internal rhythm 2 Press the START STOP button to start play back of the song or rhythm This allows you to listen to the song or rhythm before you start editing it Press the START STOP button again to halt playback If you selected a rhythm or SMF song on the connected USB memory press and hold the EXIT button to return to the main page Press the MENU button 4 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select Makeup Tools then press the ENTER SELECT button If you selected a rhythm in step 1 the display changes to O Rhwthm Makeup Tools CURSOR If you selected an SMF song in step 1 the display changes to SMF Makeup Tools CURSOR T 4 A This menu allows you to select the following entries Menu Option Explanation Common Select this entry to change common parameters that affect the rhythm or song as a whole like the reverb or chorus effect the tempo etc Instrument Select this entry to cha
109. 5 1 button to play back the song A slide show suitable for the character of the song will be shown on the external display or television set connected to the BK 5 SO When you press the SYNC START NI button to stop song playback the slideshow also stops When you load another VIMA TUNES song the previous slideshow stops and the display shows the first picture for the new song Enjoying a slide show of your own pictures You can watch a slide show while listening to a song on a USB storage device The slide show only starts if the folder that contains the desired pictures has the same name as the song file you selected Also the folder must be located on the same level within the USB memory s file hierarchy Use a graphic program on your computer to prepare the pictures you want to use Image data that can be displayed Recommended 512 x 384 or 1024 x 768 pixels Images of 4096 x 3072 pixels or smaller and 4MB or less are supported Note If you use images that are larger than the recommended size it may take longer to switch images Size Format JPEG format JPG Connect the USB memory to your computer and create a folder named Amazing Grace for example on the USB storage device Copy the pictures you want to display for this song to the Amazing Grace folder 4 Copy the song Amazing Grace to the same level as the folder of the same name Do not put the song file inside the fol
110. 5811 CROATIA ART CENTAR Degenova 3 HR 10000 Zagreb CROATIA TEL 1 466 8493 CZECH REP CZECH REPUBLIC DISTRIBUTOR SEO Voct rova 247 16 180 00 Praha 8 CZECH REP TEL 2 830 20270 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Skagerrakvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 3916 6200 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Vanha Nurmijarventie 62 01670 Vantaa FINLAND TEL 0 9 68 24 020 GERMANY AUSTRIA Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE CYPRUS STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd 2045 T r kb lint FSD Park 3 p HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland E2 Calmount Park Calmount Avenue Dublin 12 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 4294444 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 2273 0074 POLAND ROLAND POLSKA SP Z O O ul Kty Grodziskie 16B 03 289 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 678 9512 PORTUGAL Roland Systems Group EMEA S L Branch Office Porto Edificio Tower Plaza Rotunda Eng Edgar Cardoso 23 9G 4400 676 Vila Nova de Gaia PORTUGAL TEL 351 22 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Li
111. 69 A4 _70 Bb4 71 B4 72 C5 73 C 5 74 D5 175 Dis 76 E5 77 F5 1178 F 5 79 G5 80 G 5 81 A5 1 82 Bb5 83 B5 TI 34 PC 14 CC32 5 India Menu Pelegongan 1 Pelegongan 2 Pelegongan 3 Wadon 1 Wadon 2 Wadon 3 Wadon 4 Wadon 5 Wadon 6 Wadon 7 Dhol 1 Dhol 2 Dhol 3 Dhol 4 Dhol 5 Dholak 1 Dholak 2 Dholak 3 Dholak 4 Dholak 5 Dholak 6 Dholak 7 Dholak 8 Dholak 9 Dholak Ga Dholak Na Dholak Ta Dholak Tun Madal Da Madal Din Madal Ta TablaBaya 1 TablaBaya 2 TablaBaya 3 TablaBaya 4 TablaBaya 5 TablaBaya 6 TablaBaya 7 TablaBaya 8 TablaBaya Ge TablaBaya Ka TablaBaya Na TablaBaya Te TablaBaya Ti TablaBayaGin PC 11 CC32 5 IndiaDrmKit Dixie HH HIf Fat BD Room Kick 2 Cross Stick2 Maple Lo Snr Claps Real MapleSoft SN Studio Tom 4 Dixie HH Cls Studio Tom 3 Dixie HH Pdl Studio Tom 2 Dixie HH Opn Studio Tom 2 Studio Tom 1 Crash Cymbal Studio Tom 1 Rock RdCym1 Crash 1 Dhol 2 R8 Tamb Dholak 1 VDrm Cowbell Dholak 8 VDrm Cowbell Dholak 9 TablaBaya 1 TablaBayaSld TablaBaya 3 TablaBaya 6 TablaBaya 5 TablaBaya Na TablaBayaTin TablaBayaTun TablaBaya 8 VDrmCabasaUp VDrm Maracas VDrmCabasDwn Madal Da Madal Din Madal Ta VDrm Claves VDrm Woodblk VDrm Woodblk FingerSnaps4 Udu Pot Acc Udu Pot Hi Udu Pot1 Lo Udu Pot1 Slp Udu Pot2 Lng PC 12 CC32 5 MidEastDrKit Dixie HH HIf Maple Kick Warm Kick Cross Stick2 NaturlHardSN Claps Real NaturlR
112. 7 55 17 bb L 57 17 58 17 49 19 33 19 34 40 4 26 17 26 15 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland No Name 134 It Tango 135 Mazurca 1 136 Tarantella Disco 137 Gold Foxtrot 138 Gold Jive 139 Quick Step 140 It Fox 141 It Swing Fox 142 Gold Rhumba 143 It Beguine 144 Romantic Beguine 145 Beguine 146 Gold Cha Cha 147 It Mambo 148 Meneaito 149 Simple Cumbia 150 It Hully Gully 151 Go Twist 152 It Bachata 153 Gold Samba 154 Gold Bossa 155 Gold Euro March Latin World1 156 Carlos Beat 157 Orchestr Cha Cha 158 That s Mambo 159 Bachata 160 Go Salsa 161 Cuba Salsa 162 Cool Merengue 163 Fast Merengue 164 Orchestral Samba 165 Acoustic Samba 166 Brazilian Samba 167 Sambalegre 168 Organ Samba 169 Organ Bossa 170 Orchestral Bossa 171 Jazz Bossa 172 Club Bossa 173 Fast Bossa 174 AfroPeruana 175 Andina 176 ChaChaCha 177 Chundo 178 Cumbia Neo 179 Cumbia Nortena 180 Cumbia Radio 181 Cumbia Sonidera 182 Cumbia Trad 183 Duranguense 184 Huaracha 185 Latin Capital 186 Latin Club 187 Latin Pop 188 Mariachi Fies 189 MariachiTrad 190 Merengue 191 Latin Ska 192 Son Cubano 193 Son Jarocho 194 Pop Reggae Br 195 Funk Carioca 196 MPB Funk 197 Sertanejo 198 Arrastape 199 Guarania 200 Pagode 201 Samba Enredo Rhythm list CCoo CC32 26 18 17 40 53 7 34 14 7 119 69 2 50 88 50 89 23 13 39 27 39 26 39 16 24 17 38 14 22 38 46 4 22 50 10 30 22 49 27 26 22 47
113. 8 114 F 8 115 G8 116 G 8 117 A8 118 Bb8 119 B8 120 C9 121 C 9 122 D9 123 D 9 124 E9 125 F9 126 F 9 127 G9 PC 117 CC32 2 Oriental 2 Sagat Mid Sagat High Tabl Noueri Tak 2 Sagat Sak Bongos Dom Nakrazan A Bongos Tak Bongos Rim Zaghrouta 1 End Zaghrouta 2 End PC 117 CC32 3 Oriental 3 Tabla Tik 2 Rek Raka Rek Dom Rek Trill Rek Tak 1 Rek Rim Rek Brass 1 Rek Tok Rek Brass 2 Rek Tak 2 Rek Sak Rek Tik Mazhar Dom Mazhar Tak Mazhar Sak Mazhar Brass Sagat Mid Sagat Hi Sagat Closed Sagat Sak Dofs Tak Dofs Dom Dofs Sak Dofs Rim 1 Dofs Rim 2 Dofs Dom st TablaNurDom Dofs Sak st TablaNurRim TablaNurTak TablaNurSak BassSlideFX BassSlapFX ZaghroutaSm2 Zir 1 ZaghroutaEd2 NewHiBongo NewLoBongo NewCongaSlp NewCongaOp NewLoConga Timbal Hi Timbal Lo Hager 1 PC 117 CC32 4 Oriental4 Sagat Mid Sagat Hi Sagat Sak Jingle Bell L ZaghroutaSm3 ZaghroutaEd3 TablaNurDom3 Nakrazhan 1 TablaNurRim2 Nakrazhan 2 TablaNurTak3 TR 707 Kick1 Hand Clap 1 PC 118 CC32 4 Greek 1 Mazhar Dom Mazhar Tak Mazhar Sak Mazhar Brass Sagat Mid Sagat Hi Sagat Closed Sagat Sak Dofs Tak Dofs Dom Dofs Sak Dofs Rim 1 Dofs Rim 2 Dofs Dom st TablaNurDom Dofs Sak st TablaNurRim TablaNurTak TablaNurSak DoubleSlide Bass Slide1 ZaghroutaSm2 Zir 1 ZaghroutaEd2 NewHiBongo NewLoBongo NewCongaSlp NewCongaOp NewLoConga NewTmblHi NewTmblLo Hager 1 Jingle Bell Bell Tree Bongo High Bo
114. 8 Tambour Side Stick GospelHClp1 TR 808Snare2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR 909Snare2 Rap Snare JungleSnare1 House Snare House Snare House Snare Congas SW Congas_SW2 Congas_SW4 MamboCowBell Tabla Dhut BongoCowBell Tabla_Ge Tabla Ge Hi Talking Drum Bend tlk_drm Udo_Short Udo_Long Udo_slap Tabla_Te Tabla_Na Tabla_Tun Ohkawa H kotsuzumi L Kotsuzumi Tabla Tong Tabla Tak Tabla Tung Tabla_Tang Tabla_Dung Harmess bell1 Harmess bell2 Harmess bell3 CembaloEnding CembaloFree PC 102 CC32 4 IndoMix2 CongaLoOpen P5 Castanets Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga MtLow Conga Slap NewShekere1 NewShekere2 NHBngoMute L BongoMute CajonHi CajonHiFlm Cajon Low CajonLoFlm FImncoHClap1 FImncoHClap1 BongoCowBell PopSnareFl MamboCowBell PopSnareDrag HiHatPhrase3 CrashPhrase1 CrashPhrase2 CrashPhrase3 CrashPhrase4 CrashPhrase5 Crash Stop RidePhrase1 RidePhrase2 RidePhrase3 Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Small Club Explosion Wind Thunder Helicopter Applause Screaming Laughing GtFretNoise Wind Chimes PC 103 CC32 4 IndoMix3 AfricanCowBell Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Udo_Long 808 Tom 2 808 Tom 2 808 Tom 2 808 Tom 2 808 Tom 2 808 Tom 2 808 Cowbell 808 Conga 808 Conga 808 Conga Bend Gong FlmncoHClp1 FlmncoHClp1 BongoCowBell Bend tlk_drm MamboCowBell Tabla_Ge Tabla Ge Hi Talking Drum Bend tlk_drm Udo_Short Udo_Long Udo_slap Tabla_Te Tabla_Na Tabla_Tun
115. 88 To CPT Value 1270127 This is where you set the transposition interval in semi tone steps Select 2 for example to transpose a pattern in C to D Be careful when apply ing Key to the AccDrums track Trans posing all notes of this track leads to dra matic changes From Note O C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified From To time range To Note O C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified From To time range Press the WRITE button its indicator flashes to confirm your settings and edit the data 9 353 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options Mi Change Velo The Change Velo function allows you to modify the dynamics called velocity of a track or excerpt Only note events can be changed Parameter Track Mode Division From Bars To CPT Bias Change velo Mode Division From Bar From Beat Fram Cpt To Bar To Beat Major Introl DOT S ooo om dl BA ADrums Acc6 Major Minor 7th Intro 14 Main 154 Fill Dwn 153 Fill Up 1 3 End 14 See page 88 99 99 Explanation Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the opera tion applies to all tracks Allows you to select the Mode to be edit
116. 9 Kick Dance Kick 2 909Comp Kick TR 909 Kick2 HipHop Kick2 BassDrumSet TechnoKick1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell 808 BassDrum TR 808 Kick 808 Rimshot 808 Snare 1 808 Clap TR 808Snare2 808 Tom 2 TR 808HiHatC 808 Tom 2 808 HiHat Cl 808 Tom 2 TR 808HiHatO 808 Tom 2 808 Tom 2 808 Crash 808 Tom 2 606 Ride Cym ChinaCymbal Ride Bell CR78 Tambour Splash Cym 808 Cowbell 909 Crash Vibraslap Ride Cymbal CR78 HiBongo CR78 LoBongo 808 Conga 808 Conga 808 Conga High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa 808 Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro CR78 Guiro 808 Clave Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo MuteTriangl OpenTriangl 626 Shaker Jingle Bell 129 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Drum Sets 84 C6 PC 11 CC32 4 Jungle Bell Tree Ae tom Castanets 86 D6 Mute Surdo Get CH Open Surdo 88 E6 89 F6 Small Club Kick Roll ie 10 Snare Roll 91 G6 66 Snare 260 PPA Ct Dance Snare1 93 A6 909 SD 1 oY im 5 Elec Snare 2 95 B6 96 C7 Dance Snare1 Rap Snare oy Men E 7A Techno Hit 98 D7 Philly Hit ie Le aa DE JAB Shock Wave 100 E7 101 F7 Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit UE Bim Hit 103 G7 TapeRewind ut et z Phono Noise 105 A7 Dance Snare1 Koi yA Power Snare2 107 B7 108 C8 Flec Snare 1 Da
117. ALUE dial to select the memory whose settings you want to use then press the ENTER SELECT button to confirm your selection The PERFORMANCE LIST button lights to signal that the BK 5 is now using the settings of the selected Performance memory The name of that memory is highlighted Music Assistant erg ted er ee Sete Bu i ON d j E UI s I 4 azi zeck A fT Ok 124 C j i alal i egg 3 om 3 mm ENTEF The selected memory also refers to a rhythm or song which can be started in the usual ways START STOP button SYNC START etc zi 6 During playback of that rhythm or song you can already select a new Performance Music Assistant Factory Songs memory If you need to return to the main page press the EXIT button To return to the page that lists the memories press PERFORMANCE LIST again Quickly locating Performance memories Performance memories can also be loaded using the BK 5 s Numeric function See Using the Numeric function to select Tones Rhythms and Performances on p 25 for details Saving your settings as a Performance Select a rhythm or song Select all settings you would like to use for this rhythm or song You can for instance assign the desired Tones to the real time parts switch on the INTRO button modify the Performance Edit settings etc Press the WRITE button to jump to the Write Performance page
118. Barahona 3 Ave 11 Calle S O San Pedro Sula HONDURAS TEL 504 553 2029 MARTINIQUE Musique amp Son Z Les Mangle 97232 Le Lamentin MARTINIQUE EWL TEL 596 596 426860 Gigamusic SARL 10 Rte De La Folie 97200 Fort De France MARTINIQUE EWL TEL 596 596 715222 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 55 5668 6699 NICARAGUA Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Nicaragua Altamira D Este Calle Principal de la Farmacia 5ta Avenida 1 Cuadra al Lago 503 Managua NICARAGUA TEL 505 277 2557 PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PANAMA TEL 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL 595 21 492147 PERU Audionet Distribuciones Musicales SAC Juan Fanning 530 Miraflores Lima PERU TEL 511 4461388 TRINIDAD AMR Ltd Ground Floor Maritime Plaza Barataria TRINIDAD W TEL 868 638 6385 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C P 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02 924 2335 VENEZUELA Instrumentos Musicales Allegro C A Av las industrias edf Guitar import 47 zona Industrial de Turumo Caracas VENEZUELA TEL 212 244 1122 0000052701 BELGIUM FRANCE HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Central Europe N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 57
119. C 2004 108 EC Dieses Produkt entspricht der europ ischen Richtlinie EMC 2004 108 EC Ce produit est conforme aux exigences de la directive europ enne EMC 2004 108 EC Questo prodotto conforme alle esigenze della direttiva europea EMC 2004 108 EC Este producto cumple con la directrice EMC 2004 108 EC de la CE Dit product beantwoordt aan de richtlijn EMC 2004 108 EC van de Europese Unie For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the re
120. C 9 CC32 4 Room Std 1 Kick Std 1 Kick2 Std 2 Kick1 Std2 Kick2 Kick 1 Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Room Kick 1 Room Kick 2 Power Kick1 Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 TR 808 Kick TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 Voice One Voice Two Voice Three St Kick 1 St Kick 2 MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Rm Kick 1 Rm Kick 2 Side Stick Rm Snare 2 808 Clap Rm Snare 1 Room Tom 5 Closed HiHat Room Tom 5 Pedal HiHat Room Tom 2 R8OpenHiHat2 Room Tom 2 Room Tom 2 Crash Cymb1 Room Tom 2 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell PC 13 CC32 4 Room L R Voice One Voice Two Voice Three MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Rm Kick 1 Rm Kick 2 Side Stick Rm Snare 2 808 Clap Rm Snare 1 Room Tom 5 Rm HiHatClsB Room Tom 5 Pedal HiHat Room Tom 2 Rm HiHatOpnB Room Tom 2 Room Tom 2 Crash Cymb 1 Room Tom 2 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ridbl_c B Tambourine Splash Cym
121. CT button to select the keyboard part you want to edit LWR UP2 UP1 The display shows the settings for the selected key board part Use the dial to select and set the desired parameter s The following parameters are available Tone Allows you to select a different Tone See page 119 for a list of available Tones and Drum Sets While selecting a Tone you can press a Tone selection but ton to select a different family Parameter Explanation Tone The number of Tones depends on the selected family Volume Adjusts the volume of the selected keyboard part Selecting O means that the part is question is no longer audible Parameter Setting Volume 0 127 Reverb Send Use this parameter to set the reverb send level i e the amount of effect that should be added Parameter Setting Reverb Send 04127 Chorus Send Use this parameter to set the chorus send level i e the amount of effect that should be added Parameter Setting Chorus Send 04127 Panpot Use this parameter to change the stereo placement of the selected keyboard part L63 means hard left and R63 represents hard right Choose 0 if the sound should be at the center of the stereo image Parameter Setting Panpot L63 O R63 Key Touch velocity sensitivity The BK 5 s keyboard is velocity sensitive allowing you to control the timbre and volume of the key board parts by varying the strength with
122. FILL IN button it lights This means that when you select a different VARIA TION pattern the BK 5 will play a transition fill in before switching to the new pattern 11 Press a VARIATION 1 2 3 or 4 button to select a more complex or a simpler accompaniment BK 3 e f you press it before the last beat of the current measure the fill in starts immediately and lasts until the end of the current measure then the newly selected VARIATION pattern is played back e f you press the desired VARIATION button on the last beat of a bar the fill in starts at the next downbeat and lasts an entire bar Only then will the BK 5 switch to the newly selected VARIATION pattern 12 If necessary you can change the rhythm s tempo e Press the TEMPO lt a or gt button to decrease or increase the tempo Di E Di at mi nas Di kd nm A ae BE e 55 aen eg e e Press the TAP TEMPO button at least three times at the desired tempo The BK 5 calculates the intervals between your presses and sets the corresponding tempo value Simultaneously press the TEMPO lt a and b gt buttons STANDARD to return to the rhythm s preset tempo You can press and hold the TAP TEMPO button to lock the tempo setting see p 54 13 Press the ENDING button to end rhythm playback with a suitable closing section You could also stop playback simply by pressing the START STOP button or by releasing all keys on the
123. FlessBs 8 4 36 0313 String Slap 2 4 121 0386 Orchestra 2 8 4 49 0239 Smooth Bass 19 4 40 0314 Bass Slide1 5 4 121 0387 Orchestra 3 20 4 49 0240 Mr Smooth 5 4 36 0315 Bass Slide 47 4 121 0388 FilteredOrch 3 4 52 0241 Mild Bass 37 4 40 0316 DoubleSlide 48 4 12 0389 Tremolo Orch 10 4 49 0242 Mute Bass 84 4 33 A Guitar 0390 Film Octaves 7 5 49 0243 Muted PickBs 8 4 35 0317 Nylon Gt o 16 4 25 0391 Oct Strings1 32 4 49 0244 Nu Slap Bs 80 2 37 0318 Nylon Gt 1 64 4 25 0392 Oct Strings2 33 4 49 0245 Finger Slap 1 4 34 0319 Nylon Gt 2 32 4 25 0393 Marcato 8 5 49 0246 Slap Pop 1 4 37 0320 Nylon str Gt 0 4 25 0394 St Pizzicato 3 4 46 0247 Slap Bass 1 0 4 38 0321 Nylon Harp 2 4 100 0395 Solo Pizz 8 4 46 0248 Slap Bass 2 1 4 38 0322 Steel Gt1 52 4 26 0396 PizzicatoStr 0 4 46 0249 Beef FM Bass 8 4 40 0323 Steel Gt2 64 4 26 0397 Ves amp Cbs Pizz 1 4 46 0250 WireStr Bass 11 4 40 0324 Steel Gt3 65 4 26 0398 X Violin 80 4 41 0251 X Wire Bass 10 4 40 0325 Steel Gt5 70 4 26 0399 Folk Violin 16 2 41 0252 Drum n Bass 82 4 39 0326 Steel Gt4 69 4 26 0400 FolkViolinVb 17 2 41 0253 RubberBass 1 13 4 40 0327 Steel Gt6 32 4 26 0401 Violin Atk 1 4 41 0254 RubberBass 2 16 4 40 0328 Steel str Gt 0 4 26 0402 ViolnSoloSRX 0 5 41 0255 Synth Bass 2 0 4 40 0329 Steel 4 Body 33 4 26 0403 Slow Violin 8 4 41 0256 Reso Slap 8 4 37 0330 Ac Guitar1 48 4 26 0404 Solo Spic 16 4 46 0257 Bass Invader 80 4 40 0331 Ac Guitar2 49 4 26 0405 Viola 0 4 42 0258 TB Saw Bass 81 4 39 0332 Ac Guitar3 50 4 26 0
124. G 1 TR 808 Kick RECE OOS BassDrum 9 A 1 TR 909 Kick uf Dance Kick 2 7 11 B 1 909Comp Kick 12 CO TR 909 Kick2 ES af HipHop Kick 14 DO BassDrumSet Se DE 10 TechnoKick1 16 17 EO FO Bounce Voice One si 10 Voice Two 19 GO Voice Three 21 AO PPE YO MC 500 Beep 23 24 BO C1 MC 500 Beep Concert Snr VASI 4 E Snare Roll 26 D1 FingerSnaps2 PESTII High Q 28 29 E1 F1 Slap Scrtch Push2 IZ AR Scrtch Pull2 31 G1 Sticks EP ci a Ba SquareClick 33 A1 Mtrnm Click eye sien Mtrnm Bell 35 B1 TechnoKick2 36 C2 TR 909 Kick2 EY Ae 238 TR 909 Rim 38 D2 909SD 1 EES vam 909 HandClap 40 41 EZ F2 TR 909Snare2 909 Tom SES 238 TR 707HiHatC 43 G2 909 Tom CD Sei TR 707HiHatC 45 A2 909 Tom Cici 3 eva 909HiHat Opn 47 B2 909 Tom 48 C3 909 Tom ate EREE 909 Crash 50 D3 909 Tom Sa DI 009Ride Cymb 52 53 E3 F3 ChinaCymbal Ride Bell SY ER Tambourine 55 G3 Splash Cym let ER 808 Cowbell 57 A3 CrashCymb2 Si lee Vibraslap 59 B3 Ride Cymbal 60 C4 BongoHigh Ge CM Bongo Low 62 D4 MuteH Conga SES Conga Hi Opn 64 65 E4 F4 Conga Lo Opn High Timbale clei 74M LOW Timbale 67 G4 Agogo GW CH Agogo 69 A4 Cabasa HIER 808 Maracas 71 72 B4 ShrtWhistle Ch LongWhistle YES A8 Short Guiro 74 D5 CR78 Guiro VASI DE is 808 Clave 76 77 E5 Woodblock
125. H Agogo 69 A4 Cabasa HIER 808 Maracas 71 72 B4 C5 ShrtWhistle LongWhistle YES A8 Short Guiro 74 D5 CR78 Guiro VASI DE is 808 Clave 76 77 E5 F5 Woodblock Woodblock 178 F 5 b9 79 G5 Hoo GAR ER MuteTriang 81 A5 OpenTriangl SPAN yey 626 Shaker 83 B5 Jingle Bell PC12 CC32 4 Techno Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 Kick 1 CR78 Kick 2 TR 606 Kick1 TR 707 Kick1 808 Kick TR 808 Kick 808 BassDrum TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909Comp Kick TR 909 Kick2 HipHop Kick2 BassDrumSet TechnoKick1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three HipHop Kick2 TR 909 Kick2 MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell TechnoKick1 TR 909 Kick2 808 Rimshot Dance Snare1 707 Claps 909 SD 1 606 Dist Tom TR 707HiHatC 606 Dist Tom CR 78HiHatCl 606 Dist Tom 909HiHat Opn 606 Dist Tom 606 Dist Tom 909 Crash 606 Dist Tom Ride Cymbal ReverseCymbl Ride Bell Shake Tamb Splash Cym 808 Cowbell 909 Crash Vibraslap Ride Cymbal CR78 HiBongo CR78 LoBongo 808 Conga 808 Conga 808 Conga High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa 808 Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro CR78 Guiro 808 Clave Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo MuteTriangl OpenTriangl 626 Shaker Jingle Bell PC14 CC32 4 House Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 Kick 1 CR78 Kick 2 TR 606 Kick1 TR 707 Kick1 8
126. HaturalFiano 1 HaturalFiano 14 HI stecrata 15 HaturalFiano 15 HaturalFiano When you start playback you will notice that active parts are indicated by moving bar graphs that simu late level meters The bar graphs of muted parts do not move Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to move the cursor to the track you want to mute Press the ENTER SELECT button to high light the corresponding parameter Rotate the dial to change the setting and press ENTER SELECT to confirm you set ting The possibilities are Display indication cho indication gt The associated track is played back The associated track is no longer played back muted If you want to save your selection of the track s that should be muted for any rhythm or SMF file you play back see Save Global on p 70 If there is no need to save your settings press and hold the EXIT button to return to the main page Using the Melody Intell igence function The Arranger can add a counter melody to the notes you play with the Upper part UP1 Those automatic harmonies are based on the chords you play in the chord recognition area The counter melody is played by the MELODY INTELL part There are 18 harmony types to choose from 1 Press the MELODY INTELL button so that it lights Loe vd a Z INTELL e ee i bb Je This adds a harmony to the notes you play 2 Press the MELODY INTELL button again its in
127. ION 4 button The VARIATION 3 and 4 buttons go dark and your loop setting is deleted 10 Other important functions Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Other important functions This section presents other important functions you may need regularly Changing the key This function allows you to transpose the BK 5 s pitch in semi tone steps Depending on the mode setting this transposition applies to all sections or just a specific setting If you choose to transpose the real time parts rhythm play back is also transposed 1 Press KEY button em uno a D I n a ie Giai DE G The display changes to The current KEY setting transposition interval is displayed and already selected Pressing and holding the KEY button locks the Key set ting 2 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the desired Key setting Key setting 6 0 5 semitone units If the Key setting differs from O the KEY indica tor lights After a few seconds the KEY pop up window disap pears Press the EXIT button to close it immediately If you also need to change the Mode setting see p 62 Changing the octave This function allows you to transpose the real time parts UP1 UP2 and LWR up or down in octave steps If necessary press the EXIT button to return to the main page M 001L 1 414 J 130 Kev 0 RHYTHM IS Broken Dance SHE TOUCH mt m i i TONE oC EBA N00
128. Lower and Upper2 on and off The Upper1 part UP1 is always active and cannot be switched off ONE TOUCH button This button is used to enable the recall of One Touch memories Pressing and holding it calls up a display page where you can edit and save One Touch memo ries Use the TONE buttons 1 4 to select or deselect a One Touch memory see p 31 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Front panel MELODY INTELL button This buttons is used to add an automatic counter melody second or third voice to your solos or melo dies Pressing and holding it calls up a display page where you can view the Melody Intelligent parame ter NUMERIC button Press this button if you want to use the TONE buttons 62 to enter numeric values see p 25 TONE buttons Tone selection 0 9 numeric but tons These buttons allow you to select Tones by category page 24 You can also use them to input numeric values To do so first activate the NUMERIC button 3 Pressing and holding any of these buttons locks the Tone page 54 1 3 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Panel description Rear panel O o USB COMPUTER port Use a USB cable to connect the BK 5 to your com puter via this connector page 17 AUDIO INPUT STEREO mini jack This mini jack allows you to connect the audio out puts of an external signal source CD mp3 player synthesizer etc AUDIO OUTPUT R amp L MONO sockets These sockets transmit all audio si
129. ONE buttons to enter the desired characters 1 7 B acking Keyboard BK 5 Performance Lists 3 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above to complete the name Press the WRITE button to save the Perfor mance List under the new name The display briefly confirms the operation and the returns to the page with all Performance List files on your USB memory If the USB memory already contains a file of the name you have entered the display asks you whether it is OK to overwrite the other Performance List file In that case select YES to replace the other Perfor mance List file with the one whose name you changed Select NO to return to the page where you can change the name Then press the ENTER SELECT button If you select Delete The display changes to Performance List Delete This page allows you to delete the selected Perfor mance List Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select YES then press the ENTER SELECT but ton to delete the Performance List Select NOT if you do not want to delete the Perfor mance List after all The display briefly confirms that the selected Perfor mance List has been deleted and then returns to the page with all Performance List files on your USB memory If you select Make New List The display changes to hos Delete Insert Ais DA HEHE abc def ghi EA G EEE jkl mno pors tuw weyz Hold L IR wee Paa This page allows you
130. Ohkawa Shimedaiko H kotsuzumi L Kotsuzumi Tabla_Ge Tabla_Na Tabla_Te Tabla_Tun Udo_Long Djembe_rim 909 HandClap Tambourine ChaChaCowb Agogo Agogo NewShaker2 NewShaker1 PopSnare40 1 Elec Snare 2 909 Snare 2 909 Snare 1 Elec Kick 2 TR 909 Kick2 Std 2 Kick1 Pop Stick1 PopSnare38 1 HandClap1st Hand Clap 21 TR 707 Snare JazzClosedHH Real Tom 6 Pedal HiHat Real Tom 4 JazzOpenHH Real Tom 4 Tom 43 Crash Cymb1 Tom 47 RockRideCym1 Pop Ride2 Dholla Dom Dholla Sak 1 Dholla Sak 2 Dholla Sak 3 Dholla Rim Dholla Raka Dholla Tak 1 Dholla Tak 2 DofDom 1 DofDom 2 DofDom 3 DofTak 1 DofTak 2 DofSak 1 DofRim 1 DofSak 2 DofRim 2 DofSak 3 DofFinger 1 DofFinger 2 Tabla Raka 1 Tabla Tak 1 Tabla Tik 1 Tabla Dom Tabla Sak Tabla Roll Tabla Tak 2 Tabla Raka 2 Tabla Rim 1 Tabla Toks Tabla Rim 2 PC 117 CC32 4 Oriental4 TR 707 Kick1 TR 707 Kick1 TR 707 Rim TR 707 Snare Hand Clap 2 TR 707 Snare Tom TR 707HiHatC Tom TR 707HiHatC Tom TR 707HiHatO Tom Tom TR 707 Crash Tom Ride Cymbal Dholla2 Dom2 Dholla 2 Sak Tambourine Dholla2 Rim1 Cowbell Dholla2 RimC Cabasa Doff 2 Dom 2 Doff2 Sak 1B Low Bongo Doff 2 Sak 2 High Bongo Doff 2 Rim 3 Tabla1 Dom 2 Tabla Roll Tabla 2 Sak Tabla Fx Tabla2 Tak1D Tabla 2 Tik Tabla2 Rim 2 Rek 2 Dom 1B Rek 2 Rim 2 Rek Dom 1 Rek 2 Tak 1 Rek 2 Tak 2C Rek 2 Sak 1 Hager 2 Rek2Khan Cl2 Zir 2 Rek2Khan Op2 Rek 2 Roll Rek 2 Sak 1 PC 118 CC32 4 Greek 1 HipHop
131. Open HiHat2 Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 1 Crash Cymb1 Rock Tom 1 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell PC 25 CC32 4 Electronic Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 Kick 1 CR78 Kick 2 TR 606 Kick1 TR 707 Kick1 808 Kick TR 808 Kick 808 BassDrum TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909Comp Kick TR 909 Kick2 HipHop Kick2 BassDrumSet TechnoKick1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 Side Stick Elec Snare 808 Clap Elec Snare 2 Synth Drum 2 JazzClosedHH Synth Drum 2 Pedal HiHat Synth Drum 2 JazzOpenHH Synth Drum 2 Synth Drum 2 Crash Cymb1 Synth Drum 2 Ride Cymbal ReverseCymbl Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl Opentriangl Shaker Jingle Bell PC 15 CC32
132. Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR 909Snare2 Rap Snare JungleSnare1 House Snare House Snare House Snare Voice Tah Noise Slap PC17 CC32 4 Power Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2 Std 1 Snare1 Std 1 Snare2 Std 2 Snare1 Std 2 Snare2 Tight Snare StandrdSnar1 LD Snare M LD Snare C Jazz Snare 1 Jazz Snare 2 Room Snare 1 Room Snare 2 Dance Snare1 Power Snare1 Rev Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare Elec Snare 3 TR 707 Snare 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 Rap Snare JungleSnare1 House Snare House Snare House Snare PC 25 CC32 4 Electronic Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Small Club Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare Elec Snare 3 66 Snare 260 TR 707 Snare 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR 808Snare2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR 909Snare2 Rap Snare JungleSnare1 House Snare House Snare House Snare Voice Tah Noise Slap PC 15 CC32 5 909 808 Kit 808 Maracas TR808 Claves Triangle Mt Triangle Op Narrow Hit 2 TR808 Cym1 MG Zap 4 Scratch 1 MG Zap 1 TR606 Snr 2 Synth Saw Digi Breath TR808 Cym2 TR808 Conga1 TR808 Conga2 Cajon 1 Vint Snr 3 Door Creak Vint Phone Door Creak PC29 CC32 4 TR 606 Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Small Club Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam
133. Synth Drum 2 Synth Drum 2 Synth Drum 2 HipHop Kick SimpleKick Side Stick St Snare2 707 Claps St Snare1 85St Tom16 HipHopCHH 85St Tom16 HipHopCHH 85St Tom12 HipHopOHH 85St Tom12 85St Tom10 855t CrsCym1 855t Tom10 855t RdCym ChinaCymbal 855t RdBell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal NewHighBongo NewLowBongo NewCongaSlap NewCongaOpen NewLowConga High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas Bongo1_SW1 Bongo1_SW3 Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock CR78 HiBongo CR78 LoBongo MuteTriang OpenTriangl Shaker CowBellSide PC 65 CC32 4 Or R amp B House Kick HipHop Kick TR 808 Kick 909 Kick2 HipHopSnare2 Techno Snare TR 808Snare2 R amp B Clap 707 Claps Tambourine R amp B OHHsh R amp B OHH Wadaiko Ohkawa Shimedaiko H kotsuzumi L Kotsuzumi Tabla_Ge Tabla_Na Tabla_Te Tabla_Tun Udo_Long Djembe rim 909 HandClap Tambourine Pop Hi Hat1 Pop Hi Hat2 Pop Hi Hat3 NewShaker2 NewShaker1 IPopSn40st HipHop Snare Jungle Snare House Snare 808 BassDrum 909 Kick 3 SimpleKick Side Stick R amp B Snare HandClap1st Hand Clap 21 909Snare2 R amp B CHH Pop Kick 36 R amp B CHH IPopCStk37st R amp B OHH Tom 43 Tom 47 Pop Cymbal2 Tom 50 Pop Ride Pop Cymbal Dholla Dom Dholla Sak 1 Dholla Sak 2 Dholla Sak 3 Dholla Rim Dholla Raka Dholla Tak 1 Dholla Tak 2 DofDom 1 DofDom 2 DofDom 3 DofTak 1 DofTak 2 DofSak 1 DofRim 1 DofSak 2 DofRim
134. T button Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select one of the available presets The available presets are 1 Flat 4 Jazz 6 Standard 2 Rock 5 Classic 7 User 3 Pop 5 If none of the preset memories contains the settings you need you can change the fol lowing parameters by first pressing the ENTER SELECT button and then using the CURSOR VALUE dial Parameter Setting range Explanation Level 0 127 Use this parameter to set the equalizer s input level This may be neces sary when the level of the input signals is so high that the sound dis torts Do not set this param eter to 0 if the equal izer is switched on because doing so means that the key board parts SMF song rhythm is are no longer audible Gain 9 0 9dB Use this parameter to correct the level at the equalizer s outputs If the settings of the remaining parameters lead to a Significantly lower level select a posi tive value If your set tings lead to a significantly higher level select a negative value 0 means that the level is neither boosted nor attenuated High 2000 Frequency 12000Hz Allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the high band this is a shelving filter High Gain 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected High frequency Posi tive values boost increase the volume of that frequency band negative values cut attenuate it Mid Fre 200 8000Hz Allows you to set t
135. TEMPO and Key press and hold KEY settings as well as to Tone selection for each of the real time parts individually Connect the USB memory and load a Perfor mance memory page 45 or a rhythm page 29 Press and hold one of the RAYTHM FAMILY buttons POP DISCO JAZZ BALL LATIN TRADIT ROCK DANCE BLUES ROOM WORLD 1 WORLD 2 A Rhythm pop up window appears with a closed lock see left If you repeat step 2 the pop up win dow will display an open lock to inform you that the lock function has been cancelled Start playback of the selected rhythm Select a different Performance memory If the lock next to RHYTHM on the main page is closed recalling another Performance does not change the rhythm Again press and hold any RAYTHM FAMILY button to unlock the RHYTHM function Menu options Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Menu options The BK 5 s MENU button provides access to the available parameters and functions General procedure 1 Press the MENU button its indicator lights The display changes to ASTE nioo al i ER IE CURSOR IE 2 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the desired function group 4 Di nEs The following function groups are available Function group Explanation Internal Lyrics Allows you to activate the display of lyrics data on the BK 5 itself Only for SMF and mp3 files for which there are lyrics data External Lyrics Allows you to canc
136. TER SELECT button to see its contents and then select the file If you opened a folder by mistake press the EXIT but ton to return to a higher level Press and hold the EXIT button to return to the main page Playing back a song or rhythm from a USB memory If you selected a rhythm see Playing back rhythms on p 30 because operation is the same as for internal rhythms In the following we will therefore only show you how to play back song files located on a USB memory The BK 5 has no internal memory where you could store SMF or audio files Select a song SMF or audio file on the USB memory See page 34 Press the START STOP button to start play back This button is also labeled 5 1 BK 3 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Playing back a song or rhythm from a USB memory The u button s indicator lights and song playback Starts If necessary you can change the song s playback tempo e Press the TEMPO lt a or gt button to decrease or increase the tempo ui A at nau E e e eeng eg e Oster If you set a tempo value close to the upper or lower limit for an mp3 or WAV file playback may sound a little strange e Press the TAP TEMPO button at least three times at the desired tempo This function is not available if you selected an audio file WAV or mp3 SS i DEDE Sie The BK 5 calculates the intervals between your presses and sets the corresponding t
137. The WRITE indicator flashes and the display changes to Write Performance Ben Dance _ Alfa 0 9 Delete Insert HEHE abc def ghi EA G EEE jkl mno pars tuw weyz Hold L IR wee Baa By default the BK 5 assigns the name of the selected rhythm song or of the last Performance you loaded to the Performance settings you are about to save If you agree with that name proceed with step 7 below Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the desired position 5 Use the TONE buttons to enter the desired characters TONE PIANO ORGAN E GUITAR STRINGS PERCUSS IN SAX PAD EPIANO ACCORD BASS A GUITAR VOCAL BRASS SYNTH ETHNIC SFX DRUM 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter the remaining characters You can press the NUMERIC button to switch between upper and lower case characters as well as numbers The LWR button can be used to delete the selected character The UP2 button allows you to insert a character I Press the WRITE button to save your set tings thereby creating a new Performance memory This memory is added at the end of the currently selected Performance List see Loading a Perfor mance Music Assistant Factory Songs List on p 45 If you haven t loaded any Performance List since switching on the BK 5 a new Performance List is created and your Performance memory becomes its first entry Other Performance List functions 1 Connect a USB memory with at least one
138. Yangin Hrd 0965 Yangin Trm 0966 Erhu 0967 Erhu Harm 0968 Erhu Harm 0969 Erhu Vib 0970 SihuHorsScrm 0971 Oygur 0972 Log drum 0973 Matoquin 0974 Mizmar 0975 Mizmar Solo 0976 Uillean Pipe 0977 Sitar 1 0978 Sitar 2 0979 Hichiriki 0980 Pi Pa 0981 Drone Sitar 0982 Sitar Drone 0983 Sitar 3 0984 Tsugaru 0985 San Xian 0986 Koto 0987 Syn Shamisen 0988 Gu Zheng 0989 Taisho Koto 0990 Kanoun 0991 Bodhran 0992 Bodhran Mute 0993 Didgeridoo 0994 Kanoon Choir 0995 Oct Harp 0996 UillnPipe Nm 0997 Er Hu 0998 Gao Hu 0999 Shanai 1 1000 Shanai 2 1001 Suona 1 1002 Suona 2 1003 Tinkle Bell 1004 Gender 1005 Pemade 1006 Rababa 1007 BOUZ BAG 1 1008 JV Bousouki 1009 Gajde 1010 Kajar 1011 Kelontuk Sid 1012 Atarigane 1013 Guzheng 1014 Guzhng Trm 1015 Guzhng Trm 1016 St GuZhngSRX 1017 SitarGlisSRX 1018 Shamisen SRX 1019 Zheng Zither 1020 Pipa 1021 Pipa 4 1022 Pipa Harm 1023 Pipa Vib 1024 Pipa Trem 1025 Pipa Harm 1026 Pipa Vib 1027 Pipa Trem CCOO CC32 0 oF ON co gt wooo gt oO P N NO olo Le Flo N gt Aaa N ch ww D S co Of OP OC calm co Nm nm FP wn re O nn BO N QO OO o Oo o a aoa OO Om nn Oo o FBO KY KY HLA RP A FF E FF E Fb E PR Fb E RP RR Fb Fb P Fb P ROKR FF P Fb TR TSO aa D Om Om OO um OD P Ou OO oo 13 13 13 13 13 13 47 13 13 13 13 13 13 41 41 41 41 49 13 13 49 112 112 110 105 105 112 106 105 105
139. a 0548 Tuba Horn 0549 Euphonium 0550 French Horns 0551 Fr Horn 0552 Wide FreHrns 0553 F Hrn Slow 0554 Horn Orche 0555 Trombone 1 0556 Trombone 2 0557 Bright Tb 0558 V Twin bones 0559 Be Trombone 0560 Dual Horns 0561 F Horn Rip 0562 SoaringHorns 0563 Truba 0564 TrubaStp 0565 Trumpet 0566 Trumpet2 0567 Rom Mar Tp 0568 FolkTrumpVb 0569 MariachiTp 0570 Bright Tp 0571 Romantc Tp 0572 Tp Mar Shk 0573 Trumpet amp Nz 0574 Warm Tp 1 0575 Dark Trumpet 0576 Tp Shake 0577 Atk Trumpet 0578 FolkTrumpet 0579 Twin Tp CCOO CC32 3 80 36 24 14 43 44 26 olo Nn HB HL Ol rm ca wl o ae BIN on P 48 51 18 50 24 49 52 25 53 47 27 ARR RR RR RRR III P k NY Fb Fb E KR RRR RRR RR RRR RRR RRR RRR RR RRR SES SSL SELE LIA SE SE SELE SLA NE SENESE SENESE SELLE NE NELLE PE 62 64 62 62 62 62 62 62 64 62 62 62 62 62 62 62 62 62 62 64 62 62 63 64 63 63 64 63 62 63 63 64 64 63 63 64 64 64 59 59 59 59 59 59 58 61 61 61 61 61 58 58 58 58 58 61 61 64 58 58 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 No Name 0580 Warm Tp 2 0581 TrumpetFall2 0582 Muted Tp 1 0583 Muted Tp 2 0584 MuteTrumpet1 0585 MuteTrumpet2 0586 MuteTrumpet3 0587 Muted Horns 0588 FlugelHorn 0589 FluteVibAtk 0590 FITraverso 0591 Hute Exp 0592 Flute 1 0593 Flute 2 0594 Piccolo 1 0595 JazzClariVib 0596 FolkClarinet 0597 FolkClarinVb 0598 Folk Clarin 0599 S
140. a number 14 the ONE TOUCH function is currently on If the ONE TOUCH field is followed by a dash the ONE TOUCH function is off M 0011 4 4 130 kero Bf Mooi 44 J 124 KEYO RHYTHM RHYTHM TED Broken Danar VIE Broken Doraz ONE TOUCH _ ONE TOUCH gt CME HU E C Maj tempo fE LUNA SC LUNA rar TONE OCT TONE OCT lupa 0001 MaturalPiano CO AE Winter GH upa 0037 MIDI EFiano2 0 upa 0443 Fern Mm Srt l Lu 0788 Attack Pad H we HE Pad with 0 The ONE TOUCH function is off The ONE TOUCH function is on and memory 1 is selected Programming your own ONE TOUCH settings One Touch Edit The BK 5 allows you to save your own ONE TOUCH set tings which may come in handy for CUSTOM rhythms for which there are no presets The following opera tion saves the rhythm and its new ONE TOUCH settings to the My Rhythms folder on the USB memory con nected to the USB MEMORY port 1 Connect an optional USB memory to the BK 5 gt 2 After a few seconds the display shows the contents of the USB memory This page is of no importance here USE Mernory pa My Recordings My Rhythms My Songs emt Amazing Grace MID emt Aura Lee smf Guantanamera MID G My Performances di di di 2 Press and hold the ONE TOUCH button The display changes to D D KG Hold This One Touch Edit page can also be selected via the BK 5 s menu Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to sel
141. a simbol ozna uje da je treba proizvod v dr avah EU zbirati lo eno od gospodinjskih odpadkov tako kot je dolo eno v vsaki regiji Proizvoda s tem znakom ni dovoljeno odlagati skupaj z gospodinjskimi odpadki To ovufoio auto unosniwvei OTL otis YMOES TNS E E to ovyxexoru vo TEOLOV TMOETEL va OVAAEYVETAL YMOLOT ATO ta VITOAOUTA OLKLAKO ATOEELUUATA obupwva ue OO TOOPAEMOVTAL oe xADe TEQLOYN Ta MEOLOVTA TOV PEQOVV TO ovyxexoru vo ovpBoAo dev none va ATOEQEiTTOVTAL pati HE TA OLALAXG ATOQQ ULATA For China HAR m OB PE JN A SE EL SAA pe m PIT E BE EI a Jk BR EH UH AGERE 2007 F3 H1 AAR SA FII siliti IP m e RK REA HR cas H TEF EI EI IS IRI E FA A Ad RARA AE PIRA SA ate E NG HINA XE HIR H Abr TA ED RP BS IA BES BE DRWA A MERER GN HARA EH PR ZE BE E FI VIP EO MAN PAGA NGA GS eB EY R i INIG S e Pi AFA EV RAR ARRSE pa AGA EY MATE 413 Pb NME Cr VD ERBA PBB 34 PBDE Ii GU o o o o o Gran CELIO x 0 x o o o o o o o PEPE CEE RIDERE O KHA BEA I ILE ATI PL AE SJ T11363 2006 MAENEO X KRAFA A LED EAE MR DUHR AEB MY SJ T11363 2006 Aree HY BLE BER KA MERA BRAA URE WEE Roland MINI 602 00 0527 01 RES873 11 BK 5 OM E
142. ack during a fill in See Fill Ritardando on p 63 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Rhythm functions The Help function is available in this environment see p 26 You can also press and hold NUMERIC to check the MIDI address of the selected rhythm see p 26 Playing back rhythms Let us now take a closer look at the interactive aspects of the BK 5 s rhythms and at how to use them 1 Switch on the BK 5 see p 20 2 Set the BK 5 s VOLUME knob to a reason able level about 1 4 The main page displays the name of the last chord the BK 5 recognized MOOLI 4 4 g 130 KEY Oo gt Broken Dance ONE TOUCH C Maj RHYTHM WAR ron mp TONE OCT ue C007 sturalPianc i upa SE Mt Piano Qa D738 a tsch bad OG H Press the START STOP button to start rhythm playback O luha bo o kao ka ken kend be lo e e geg 5 K PEREON 3 Press the SPLIT button if you want to play in Split mode BK 3 4 Select the rhythm you want to use see p 29 5 Press the INTRO button it lights to start rhythm playback with an introduction 6 Press the VARIATION 1 2 3 or 4 but ton to select the complexity of the INTRO pattern I Play a chord on the keyboard SO The START STOP indicator lights and the BK 5 starts playing back the introductory phrase 9 Play different chords on the keyboard and listen to the effect this has on the rhythm 10 Switch on the AUTO
143. ad 45 4 92 0822 Happy Synth 15 4 91 0674 2600 Sine 8 4 81 0748 Pad With 81 4 90 0823 ForwardSweep 16 4 91 0675 KG Lead 10 4 81 0749 OB Soft Pad 6 4 90 0824 ReverseSweep 17 4 91 0676 OB Square 17 4 81 0750 Oct PWM Pad 12 4 90 0825 Warriors 4 4 96 0677 JP 8 Square 18 4 81 0751 PWM Soft Pad 43 4 90O 0826 Shwimmer 9 4 96 0678 Dist Sguare 19 4 81 0752 JP8 Sqr Pad 2 4 93 0827 Celestial Pd 10 4 96 0679 303SquarDst1 20 4 81 0753 SoftBellPad 1 4 93 0828 Minor Rave 24 4 91 0680 303SquarDst2 21 4 81 0754 Warm Voices 82 4 95 0829 Bamboo Hit 7 4 92 0681 Pulse Lead 24 4 81 0755 Vox Pad 83 4 95 0830 AuhAuh 10 4 92 0682 JP8 PulseLd1 26 4 81 0756 Octave Pad 8 4 90 0831 Saw Impulse 5 4 97 0683 JP8 PulseLd2 28 4 81 0757 Sync Brs Pad 11 4 90 0832 Strange Str 6 4 97 0684 260RingLead 29 4 81 0758 Silky Pad 2 11 4 104 0833 Crystal 0 4 99 0685 303DistLead 30 4 81 0759 Ambient Pad 6 4 100 0834 Syn Mallet 1 4 99 0686 JP8000DistLd 31 4 81 0760 Harpvox 3 4 100 0835 Soft Crystal 2 4 99 0687 HipHop Sq 33 4 81 0761 Itopia 3 4 92 0836 Round Glock 3 4 99 0688 Flux Pulse 35 4 81 0762 Holy Voices 12 4 92 0837 Loud Glock 4 4 99 0689 Panning Lead 10 4 103 0763 Vox Sweep 2 4 95 0838 Digi Bells 9 4 99 0690 Pulse Saw 2 4 82 0764 SC Heaven 4 92 0839 Blow Bell 12 4 99 0691 GR 300 Saw 6 4 82 0765 Tears Voices 12 4 95 0840 Choral Bells 16 4 99 0692 LA Saw 7 4 82 0766 Space Voice 4 92 0841 Air Bells 17 4 99 0693 Doctor Solo 8 4 82 0767 Heaven II 1 4 92 0842 Bell Harp 18 4 99 0694 Fat Saw Lead 9 4 8
144. ag MODE DIVISION YA m Era Intral ABASS ACC DC Ce ACES DC CA ACCS ACCE TAP Hold GE The field below the TRACK parameter shows the name of the Tone or Drum Set assigned to the selected track TR 909 in our example Press the TRACK MUTE button BK 5 EWECH ja Di nds LI E ni nl H kelen kas kos e em S elen Je amj He or elen e E CENTER CANCEL TI An M appears next to the track you have just muted TAP Hold Pret Press the TRACK MUTE button again to switch off the mute function the M dis appears This mute setting only applies to the Rhythm Composer page During normal Arranger playback all tracks that con tain data are played back Use the Erase function to remove parts that should not appear in your accompani ments see p 89 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Rhythm Composer programming your own rhythms Solo If you need to listen to a track in isolation press and hold the TRACK MUTE button and start playback This mutes all other tracks while the selected track is flagged with an S MOTT Reich MODE Groe CA oi Major Introl TAP Hold Pret Press the TRACK MUTE button again to switch off the function of the Solo function NOTE If the track you solo was muted it will be soloed like any other track After switching off the Solo function the track in question is once again muted Playback in Arranger mo
145. ages Try to select other Menu functions by pro ceeding as follows Press the EXIT button once to return to the Menu page Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select an entry then press the ENTER SELECT button to go to the corresponding function group or setting Press and hold the EXIT button to return to the BK 5 s main page The EXIT button stops flashing Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Basic operation of the BK 5 2 3 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Playing the BK 5 s real time parts Playing the BK 5 s real time parts Your BK 5 contains three real time parts that can be controlled via MIDI UP1 UP2 and LWR Feel free to use only UPI or to control all three simultaneously You can assign the desired sounds or Tones to each of these parts See page 119 for a list of the available sounds Switching the UP2 and LWR parts on and off The UPI part is always active The UP2 and LWR parts 3 however can be switched on or off 1 Press the UP2 or LWR button to switch the corresponding part Upper2 or Lower on indicator lights or off indicator goes dark BK 3 A ee lo elen a If the Tone you need belongs to another family see p 119 press another Tone but ton Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the desired Tone then press the ENTER SELECT button to confirm your selection 4 Press EXIT to leave the Tone selection page If you switch on one of these parts t
146. all Performance memories to which the selected List refers you can press the MENU button to edit the memories The Edit option allows you to do the following My List 001 Edit Delete Performance Move Performance Save Performance List CURSOR i DE Operation Explanation Delete Deletes the selected Performance Performance memory from the active list Move Performance Allows you to change the order in which the Performance memories appear in the selected Performance List Save Performance List Allows you to save the edited list Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Editing Performance memories If you did not save the Performance List the BK 5 now signals that you need to save it to preserve your 1 Select the Performance memory you want to changes remove from the list 2 Press the MENU button AM savePerformance List P My List 001 Edit Delete Performance Save the edited Performance List Delete Performance Move Performance Save Performance List TED CY 9 Rotate the dial to select YES to save your changes to the USB memory or NO if you 3 If necessary rotate the CURSOR VALUE wish to keep the previous version dial to select Delete Performance then 10 Press the ENTER SELECT button to confirm press the ENTER SELECT button your selection The display changes to WE Move Performance lelete ge 1 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the Performance memory y
147. als you play back and audio versions of the MIDI parts you control See page 52 This button is also used to select the Rhythm Com poser function see p 81 BASS INV button This button is used to switch the Bass Inversion func tion on and off page 29 OD AUTO FILL IN button This button is used to activate the Auto Fill In func tion which causes a transition to be played before selecting the new rhythm variation which is selected with the VARIATION buttons 2 VARIATION 1 2 3 4 buttons These buttons are used to select a rhythm Variation i e a simpler or more complex arrangement of the selected rhythm d CURSOR VALUE Roland M 001 1 44 d 120 KEY 1 RHYTHM 002 Countdown Rock ONE TOUCH 1 0001 NaturalP iano up 0423 Warm Voice 1 PIANO ORGAN EGU van 0202 St Strings 2 3 INTRO button When you activate this button rhythm playback starts with a musical introduction whose complexity depends on which VARIATION button currently lights there are four different introductions per rhythm After selecting a song file this button allows you to rewind You can also press this button during rhythm playback ENDING button When you activate this button rhythm playback stops with a musical ending whose complexity depends on which VARIATION button currently lights there are four different ending phrases per rhythm After selecting a song file this button allows you to fast forward START STOP button
148. and the filter TVF The cutoff frequency will rise as the envelope rises and fall as the envelope falls Attack T This parameter adjusts the onset of the sound Nega tive values speed up the attack so that the sound becomes more aggressive Parameter Setting Attack 12 5 127 Decay T This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound s volume and cutoff frequency fall from the highest point of the attack down to the sustain level Parameter Setting Decay NIT WIND Percussive sounds usually have a sustain level of O Piano and guitar sounds are in this category Holding the keys for a long time will have little effect on the duration of the notes you are playing even if you select a high value here Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Makeup Tools rhythms and SMF Release T This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound will decay after the note is released until it is no longer heard The cutoff frequency will also fall according to this setting Parameter Setting Release 12774127 Some sounds already contain natural sampled vibrato whose depth or speed cannot be changed Use the following three parameters if you think the instrument in question has too much or could use a little more vibrato Vibrato Rate T This parameter adjusts the speed of the pitch modu lation Positive settings make the preset pitch modulation faster and negative settings make it slower Para
149. andClap 808 Clap Hand clap2 909 HandClap Pedal Hi Hat GospelHClp1 Snare Roll 1 Pop Kick 35 Pop Kick 36 Pop Stick PopSnare38 1 Snare Ghost PopSnare40 1 Flam Tom 41 Pop Hi Hati Tom 43 Pop Hi Hat2 Flam Tom 45 Pop Hi Hat3 Tom 47 Flam Tom 50 Pop Cymbal2 Tom 50 Pop Ride Pop Cymbal Pop Ride2 Tambourine Splash Cym ChaChaCowb CrashCymbal2 Vibraslap RockRideCym1 HiBongo LoBongo CongaSlap CongaOp LoConga Timbal Hi Timbal Lo Agogo Agogo Shaker2 Shaker1 ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Quide1 Quide2 Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell PC 45 CC32 4 New BrushPop HipHop Kick1 Jazz Kick 1 Mex Kick Rm Kick 1 Rm Kick 2 HipHop Kick2 TechnoKick1 BassDrumSet HipHop Kick1 909Comp Kick St Kick 1 JazzKick RockKik Cymbal Roll Rock Stick 2 Rm Snare 1 Rm Snare 2 St Snarel St Snare2 JazzSnare2 JazzSnare1 R amp B Snare RockSnare2 2 RockSnare1 2 PopSnare38 2 Snare Ghost1 PopSnare38 2 FingerSnaps2 909 HandClap 808 Clap Hand clap2 909 HandClap Pedal Hi Hat GospelHClp1 Snare Roll 1 Pop Kick 35 Pop Kick 36 Pop Stick1 PopSnare38 1 Snare Ghost PopSnare40 1 Flam Tom 41 Pop Hi Hat1 Tom 43 Pop Hi Hat2 Flam Tom 45 Pop Hi Hat3 Tom 47 Flam Tom 50 Pop Cymbal2 Tom 50 Pop Ride Pop Cymbal Pop Ride2 Tambourine Splash Cym ChaChaCowb CrashCymbal2 Vibraslap RockRideCym1 HiBongo LoBongo Conga Slap Conga Op Lo Conga Timbal Hi Timbal Lo Ag
150. anniversaries etc Per formance Lists always reside on a USB memory It is perfectly possible to program several Performance memories for one song Selecting a Performance mem ory is a lot faster than calling up one of the BK 5 s func tions modifying the settings etc while playing You could program one Performance memory for the first part of a song another for the bridge and a third one for the closing section Doing so allows you to play with the effect settings of the various processors for exam ple The BK 5 is supplied with one Performance List called Music Assistant and a second called Factory Songs that contains 5 SMF files These lists cannot be deleted or edited Loading a Performance Music Assistant Factory Songs List 1 Switch on the BK 5 See page 20 2 Connect an optional USB memory to the BK 5 This step is unnecessary if you want to use the Music Assistant or Factory Songs list because these lists reside in the BK 5 s internal memory 3 Press the PERFORMANCE LIST button Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Performance Lists The display now shows all Performance Lists it found on the USB memory The internal Music Assistant and Factory Songs lists are always displayed in the top line Performance List ZE uer gel ENTER If you already loaded a Performance List the display imme diately displays the Performance memories it contains To load a different Per
151. arPhr FolkSnrFlam5 FolkSnrFlam3 FolkSdSnr1Sh FolkSdSnr2Sh FkSdSnrPhr1 FolkRimShtNS FolkSplash1 FolkSplash2 PopRide_Phr4 PopRide_Phr5 AAhhh Uaahh Egg S4 Egg S1 Egg EndOff CembaloEnding CembaloFree PC 47 CC32 4 New Pop Perc Belltree Castanets Surdo_mute Surdo_open Cana TimbalHiFlm TimbalLoFlm TimbalPHS Shekere1 Shekere2 Bongo Mute LBongoMute CajonHi CajonHiFlm CajonLo CajonLoFlm FlmncoHClp1 FlmncoHClp1 BongoCowBell Crotals MamboCowBell CrashPhrase4 CrashPhrase5 RidePhrase1 RidePhrase2 RidePhrase4 Egg_M3 Egg_MEndOff Egg_M_SW1 Egg_L4 Egg_LEndOff Egg L SW1 Egg TuttiEndOff Egg S4 Egg SEndOff Egg S SW1 Chimes DoorKeys Pinchimes Harmess bell1 Harmess bell2 Harmess bell3 CembaloEnding CembaloFree PC 46 CC32 4 NewPBrshPerc Belltree Castanets Surdo_mute Surdo_open Cana TimbalHiFlm TimbalLoFlm TimbalPHS Shekere1 Shekere2 Bongo Mute LBongoMute CajonHi CajonHiFlm CajonLo CajonLoFlm FlmncoHClp1 FlmncoHClp1 BongoCowBell Crotals MamboCowBell CrashPhrase4 CrashPhrase5 RidePhrase1 RidePhrase2 RidePhrase4 Egg_M3 Egg_MEndOff Egg M SW1 Egg L4 Egg LEndOff Egg L SW1 Egg TuttiEndOff Egg 54 Egg SEndOff Egg S SW1 Chimes DoorKeys Pinchimes Harmess bell1 Harmess bell2 Harmess bell3 CembaloEnding CembaloFree PC 44 CC32 4 V JazzBrush Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana Timbal HiFlm Timbal LoFlm NewTmbIPHS NewShekere1 NewShekere2 NHBngoMute L BongoM
152. as soon as you play a note on the key board There will be no count in Specifies the number of bars the pattern should contain The setting range is 1 136 or more depending on the time signature and Off Select Off if you haven t decided how long the pattern should be In that case the length is set when vou stop recording It is perfectly possible to specify a different length value for each track and Division Parameter Setting Explanation Rec Mode Replace Mix Replace Everything you record replaces the data of the selected track This mode is automatically selected when you activate the record function for a track that does not yet contain data If you select a track that already contains data this parameter is set to Mix but could be changed to Replace if you wanted to over write the previous ver sion Mix The data you record are added to the existing data of the selected track The AccDrums track can only use Drum Sets only the TONE DRUMS button is available for this track On the other hand you can use a second or third drum track by assigning the value 111 to control change CC00 of the Acc1 Acc6 track s See Ed iting individual rhythm events Micro Edit on p 99 You can however turn any Acc1 6 track into an additional drum track when you start recording The AccBass track however can only be used for bass parts You can use one clone function
153. ation Variation2 Variation3 Variation4 Bass Inversion Arranger Hold Arranger Chord Off Half Bar On Fill In Break Mute Reset Start Split Explanation Starts and stops rhythm or song playback Same function as the START STOP button Same functions as the INTRO ENDING VARIATIONT VARIATION2 VARIATION3 VARIATION4 BASS INV buttons See Using rhythms on p 27 Allows you to switch the Arranger Hold function on and off See page 63 Allows you to switch the Arranger s chord recognition off in which case only the drum percussion part is played Allows you to switch the Fill In Half Bar function on and off See page 63 When you press the footswitch rhythm playback is muted for the remainder of the current measure This function allows you to have the BK 5 start on the first beat of the currently selected rhythm pattern when you press the assigned foot switch Use it when you are accom panying a singer or soloist whose timing is a little shaky and suddenly notice that the playback lags one or two beats behind the singer soloist You can alternate between Intelli gent and Pianist2 modes When the former is selected the chord rec ognition area see Zone on p 62 is automatically set to Left When you switch to Pianist1 the chord recognition area is automatically set to Whole 69 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options Function Explanation Scale Upper Al
154. be set to USER Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Using one of your own pictures as background 3 To revert to the colored background or logo you must select it using the Background Mode parameter see p 68 If you once again select a JPG picture see above the Background Mode parameter is again set to User WE User background and slide shows Even after selecting a new background picture User you can still take advantage of the BK 5 s slide show functionality see p 50 If you select a song for which there is no picture folder on the same file level as the song file however your User background is displayed W Picture display and song lyrics If the first words Lyrics data of the last song you played back remain on the external screen while they are no longer needed switch off the External Lyrics function see p 55 to make them disappear Backing Keyboard BK 5 Recording your performance as audio data Recording your performance as audio data Your BK 5 allows you to record everything it can transmit to its outputs i e rhythm or song playback your playing your singing and any audio signal transmitted to the BK 5 The metronome signal is not recorded Feel free to connect the master outputs of an external mixing console to the BK 5 s AUDIO INPUT STEREO socket if you want to record your band or the signals of an accordion additional synthesizers pianos drum machines etc as
155. bertatii 1 535500 Gheorgheni ROMANIA TEL 266 364 609 RUSSIA Roland Music LLC Dorozhnaya ul 3 korp 6 117 545 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 495 981 4967 SERBIA Music AP Ltd Sutjeska br 5 XS 24413 Palic SERBIA TEL 024 539 395 SLOVAKIA DAN Acoustic s r o Povazska 18 SK 940 01 Nove Z mky SLOVAKIA TEL 035 6424 330 SPAIN Roland Systems Group EMEA S L Paseo Garcia Faria 33 35 08005 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 493 91 00 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Marbackagatan 31 4 tr SE 123 43 Farsta SWEDEN TEL 0 8 683 04 30 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland AG Landstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4452 Itingen SWITZERLAND TEL 061 975 9987 UKRAINE EURHYTHMICS Ltd P O Box 37 a Nedecey Str 30 UA 89600 Mukachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 702701 MIDDLE EAST BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 1231 amp 1249 Rumaytha Building Road 3931 Manama 339 BAHRAIN TEL 17 813 942 IRAN MOCO INC Jadeh Makhsous Karaj K 9 Nakhe Zarin Ave Jalal Street Reza Alley No 4 Tehran 1389716791 IRAN TEL 021 44545370 5 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha alia Hashnia St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN MUSIC HOUSE CO LTD FREDDY FOR MUSIC P O Box 922846 Amman 11192 JORDAN TEL 06 5692696 KUWAIT EASA HUSAIN AL YOUSIFI am
156. button its indicator flashes The display changes to Rhythm Composer Broken Dance Initialize Rhythm Track Edit Micro Edit Save CURSOR To DE 4 Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select Micro Edit then press the ENTER SELECT button The display changes to DOTO l CC 00 BankMse O 001 01 000 CC 32 Bank LSB 4 001 01 000 PC Program Change 31 001 01 000 CC 10 Panpot Bi GES You can use the CURSOR VALUE dial and ENTER SELECT button to edit the available functions This page doesn t allow you to select a different rhythm pattern ADrum Major Intro1 in our example Be sure to select the correct button before calling up the Micro Edit page see step 2 above 1 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Editing individual rhythm events Micro Edit E General notes about Micro Edit Micro Edit Micro Edit ADrum Introl 001 01 000 EI a E 3 d d ke a E rt a o 00 Bank MSB 0 CC U Expression 80 001 01 000 001 01 000 CC 32 BankLsB 4 CC at Reverb 50 UOLOL DO 002 01 000 PC Program Change 31 CC 93 Chorus o 001 01 000 DD1 01 000 CC 10 Panpot Gd Note 42 F 2 LES 1 Position indications Sequencers only register events whose positions and distances specify when the notes are to be sounded or when they should change i e their sequence Each event is executed ata given point in time which is why they all have a position indication 1 01 119
157. button to leave the demo function No data for the music that is played back will be output from MIDI OUT All rights reserved Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private personal enjoyment is a viola tion of applicable laws Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Demo of the BK 5 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Basic operation of the BK 5 6 Basic operation of the BK 5 About the display and cursor The setting field of the selected parameter is dis operation played in reverse This section introduces the information that appears on SPOOR boa eg the main page in the BK 5 s display and how to navi E Broken Dance ate the menu ONESTOUCA 9 C Maj Ee TEMPO weiter St TOHE OCT Main page 1 ui i T amp aturalFiano di Current measur empo setting or time 1 ain ti Time signature stretching pro MI dE GE attackiPad gt Current Key Selected file type y e d setting i A 3M Moo 4 4 J 124 KEY O In our example we want to assign a different Tone to Mp3 mii THM Name of the the U UP1 t ED Broken Dance selected rhythm e Upper pari Recording ti or loaded file ecoreing me Rec 00 02 EE e 3 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to change C hd 1 RHYTHM O T h 2 chora you Ge WURTH 272 E ory indication the value you pray TONE D x Li n TONE SET Lock status of 4 Press the ENTER SELECT button again to eal time part field up coo turalFi giis UPI UP2 LWR The Mati SERB NaturalPiano i
158. ceiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le materiel brouilleur du Canada For C A US Proposition 65 WARNING This product contains chemicals known to cause cancer birth defects and other reproductive harm including lead For the UK IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to t
159. ch Scale Tune Onetouch Hold Performance Hold F ED CES This parameter allows you to tune your BK 5 to acoustic instruments that cannot be tuned The default is 440 0H7 Parameter Setting Tuning 415 3 466 2Hz Rhythm SMF TrackMute See Using Track Mute and Center Cancel on p 42 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options Scale Tune Switch This parameter can be selected using MENU button gt Global gt Scale Tune Switch Upper OFF Lower FF Rhythm DEF CURSOR Parameter Explanation lt O O O 5 Select On if the Scale Tune settings see below should apply to the Upper1 Upper2 and Mel ody Intell parts Upper O O Select On if the Scale Tune settings see below should apply to the Lower part Lower Rhythm O O Select On if the Scale Tune settings see below should apply to the rhythm parts Scale Tune This parameter can be selected using MENU button gt Global gt Scale Tune Scale Tune I CURSOR HI qe ENTER This parameter allows you to change the tuning of all notes of one octave which may come in handy to create oriental tunings Parameter Value Explanation CxB 64 0 63 Changes the pitch of each note can the notes C B in steps be set individu of 1 cent The value ally that you specify is applied to all notes of the same name If you change the tuning of
160. ch the BK 5 is connected Are you using a supported TV or monitor screen Thin horizontal lines flicker in the television Thin horizontal lines may flicker on the television screen but this screen is due to the television itself and is not a malfunction of the BK 5 Can t see the edge of the image on the television In some cases the edge of the image may not be visible on the screen television screen but this is due to the characteristics of the tele vision and is not a malfunction on the BK 5 Lyric display is wrong For some types of music files the lyrics may sometimes be dis played incorrectly Some words may be incorrectly shown outside the screen display area Insufficient volume from a device connected to Could you be using a connection cable that contains a built in the BK 5 s AUDIO INPUT STEREO socket resistor Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor Check the setting of the Audio In Level parameter and correct it if necessary page 68 The songs won t play The file type of the song is not one of the file types that the BK 5 34 can play It may be that the song data is damaged No Performance Lists are displayed The USB memory doesn t contain any Performance List files For some reason the USB memory is not recognized 16 ED Rhythm list No Name Pop Rock 1 Flood Pop 2 Frank s Way 3 Easy Ballad 4 Sky Beat 5 Home Beat 6 Slow Beat 7 Fate
161. ck Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the BK 5 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this set ting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options Parameter To Bar To Beat To CPT Data Type select the data to be edited Setting Explanation l last mea This is where you spec sure of the ify the last measure to track or pat be edited By default tern the To position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the long est track when you select All 1 number of Specifies the beat posi beats per bar tion The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signa ture 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit opera tion should not end exactly on the selected beat Ow ALL All parameters listed below Only note messages Modulation CCO1 messages usu ally used for adding vibrato i e use of the BENDER MODULA TION lever PanPot CC10 messages that specify the stereo posi tion Expression CC11 messages that are used for tempo rary volume changes Reverb Reverb Send messages how strongly the part should be processed by the reverb effect Chorus Chorus Send messages how strongly the part should be processed by the chorus effect Program change mes sages used to select sound
162. compression technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS Corporation and THOMSON Multimedia Corporation Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Copyright 2003 by Bitstream Inc All rights reserved Bitstream Vera is a trademark of Bitstream Inc MMP Moore Microprocessor Portfolio refers to a patent portfolio concerned with microprocessor architecture which was developed by Technol ogy Properties Limited TPL Roland has licensed this technology from the TPL group Backing Keyboard BK 5 Features ER Features The BK 5 is a professional keyboard designed to provide everything the entertaining artist and serious amateur musician needs on stage in the studio or at home All in one arranger instrument The BK 5 is a superb instrument that uses Roland s latest technology for professional grade sounds and 128 notes of polyphony High quality rhythms Your BK 5 comes loaded with over 300 stunning accompaniments rhythms that cover a variety of musical genres for various geographic areas includ ing Eastern Europe Latin America and Asia Each rhythm comprises 4 intros 4 main accompaniments 4 endings 3 Up and 3 Down fill ins Four suitable settings for each rhythm One Touch For each rhythm the Roland team has prepared four sets of suitable tones effects and other settings that can be loaded for the realtime parts One Touch function USB based Standard MIDI Files and rhythm play
163. d By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to speakers and other devices Turning the power on 1 Turn the VOLUME knob all the way to the left to minimize the volume Before turning the BK 5 on off always be sure to turn the volume down Even with the volume turned down you might hear some sound when switching the BK 5 on off However this is normal and does not indicate a malfunc tion 2 Press the POWER switch to turn on the power The power will turn on an opening message will appear in the BK 5 s screen and then the main page will appear After a brief interval the BK 5 will be ready to pro duce sound MOOLI 4 4 124 KEY O Broken Dance cmai g lane DEA EE TONE OCT uri KS CDD hl tur albiano OD uzi MIDI EPiano a Lup 9 attackiPad OT This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief inter val a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally 3 Switch on your amplification system or con nect a pair of headphones see p 19 2 O 4 Use the VOLUME knob to adjust the vol ume Turning the power off Turn the VOLUME knob all the way to the left to minimize the volume Never switch off the BK 5 while playback or recording is running or while data are being read from or written to an external USB memory Switch off your external amplification sys tem if you are using one Pres
164. d H the desired numeric field then press the ENTER SELECT button The numeric field is displayed in reverse M 001 1 414 124 Kev oO RHYTHM 057 Broken Dance ONE TOUCH mt m i i lup Tr oon P aturalPiano d B pa DU MIDI EPiano2 O D738 attack Pad CD Rotate the dial to select the desired Tone If necessary use the TONE buttons to select a differ ent family TONE PIANO ORGAN E GUITAR STRINGS SAX PAD PERCUSS E PIANO ACCORD BASS A GUITAR VOCAL BRASS SYNTH ETHNIC SFX DRUM St CURSOR Hold ee You can also use the Numeric function see below to select the desired Tone In that case you need to confirm your selection by pressing the BK 5 button Pressing the same TONE button several times allows you to select the first sound of the various categories within that family NaturalPiano Vintage EP1 gt Clav 1 Press EXIT to leave the Tone selection page The display returns to the main page where the name of the newly selected Tone is shown On the main page you can also use the Numeric function to select Tones The procedure is as follows Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the numeric field of the part you wish to assign a different Tone to Press the NUMERIC button a pop up window is dis played Use the 0 9 button to enter the number of the Tone you want to use Press the ENTER SELECT button to confirm You can also select the BK 5 s To
165. d information Parameter Setting Rx Off On Rx Octave Use this parameter to transpose the notes received on the selected MIDI channel Ch in steps of one octave Parameter Setting Rx Octave 4 0 4 Rx Global Limit Low High These parameters allow you to set the note range to be received If not all note messages of the selected MIDI channel should be received by the NIA part set the range to the desired values Parameter Setting Rx Global Limit Low C G9 Rx Global Limit High C G9 The Limit Low value cannot be higher than the Limit High value and vice versa Parameters The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using MENU button gt MIDI gt Edit System gt Parameters Parameters Tx velocity TxSysex m Tx Data Change offo Ta Octave Absolute Ru Velocity On Rx Sysex On Rx Transpose o Lei This page contains several parameters that are not related to one another the other MIDI pages always concentrate on one aspect Part Switch This parameter allows you to specify whether or nota muted part should go on sending MIDI messages Parameter Setting Part Switch Internal Int MIDI Internal A muted part can no longer be played via the BK 5 s keyboard or Arranger song player but con tinues to send MIDI messages Selecting Internal and muting a part thus has the same effect as select ing Local Off see p 103
166. d part you like See Mfx on p 58 There are also 3 Mfx processors for the rhythm song parts Mfx Switch Select Off if you don t need the Mfx processor Parameter Mfx Switch Mfx Type Setting Off On The BK 5 provides 84 different multi effect types some of which are combinations of two effects for added flexibility This parameter allows you to select the desired type The available types are 1 Thru 2 Stereo EQ 3 Overdrive 4 Distortion 5 Phaser 6 Spectrum 7 Enhancer 8 Auto Wah 9 Rotary 10 Compressor 11 Limiter 12 Hexa Chorus 13 Trem Chorus 14 Space D 15 St Chorus 16 St Flanger 17 Step Hanger 18 St Delay 19 Mod Delay 20 3 Tap Delay 21 4 Tap Delay 22 Time Delay 23 2 Pitch Shifter 24 FBK Pitch 25 Reverb 26 Gate Reverb 27 OD gt Chorus 28 OD gt Flanger 29 OD Delay 30 DST Chorus 31 DST gt Flanger 32 DST gt Delay 33 EH Chorus 34 EH Flanger 35 EH Delay 36 Chorus DLY 37 Flanger gt DLY 38 CHO Flanger 39 CHO DLY 40 Flanger DLY 41 CHO Flanger 42 Isolator 43 Low Boost 44 Super Filter 45 Step Filter 46 Humanizer 47 Speaker Sim 48 Step Phaser 49 MLT Phaser 50 Inf Phaser 51 Ring Modul 52 Step Ring 53 Tremolo 54 Auto Pan 55 Step Pan 56 Slicer 57 VK Rotary 58 3D Chorus 59 3D Flanger 60 3D Step Hor 61 Band Chorus 62 Band Hanger 63 Band Step Hg 64 VS Overdrive 65 VS Distortion 66 GT Am
167. de NOTE Save your rhythm before trying it out with the Arranger If the rhythm stops unexpectedly during playback in Arranger mode try different chords Chances are that you only programmed the major pattern so that the Arranger selects an empty pattern when you play a minor or seventh chord Remember to set the Mode parameter to M m 7 until you have come to grips with the possibilities of the BK 5 s Arranger That way those three patterns will sound alike but at least you are sure that the Arranger does not stop when you play a minor or seventh chord Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options Rhythm Track Edit functions The Track Edit level of the Rhythm Composer provides 12 functions Quantize Erase Delete Copy Insert Key Change Velo Change Gate Time Global Change Shift Clock Track Length and Time Signat There is also a Micro Edit environment that allows you to add delete or change individual events See page 99 for details 1 Return to the main Rhythm Composer page 2 Press the MENU button its indicator flashes The display changes to Rhwthm Composer Broken Dance CURSOR a DE 3 Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select Track Edit then press the ENTER SELECT button The display changes to iy CURSOR You can use the CURSOR VALUE dial and ENTER SELECT button to edit the available functions Track Edit W Quantize Use this function if you chose not to quantize your
168. der 5 Disconnect the USB memory from your com puter in accordance with the standard pro cedure for the operating system you are using 6 Connect your USB memory to the BK 5 s USB MEMORY port BK 3 The BK 5 automatically shows the contents of the USB memory you inserted Select the song you want to play back Amazing Grace in our example by first rotating the CURSOR VALUE dial and then pressing it to confirm your selection Press the 5 1 button to play back the song The slide show of the pictures inside the Amazing Grace folder begins The slide show stops when you pause or stop song play back but the last picture is still displayed You need to load a different song that has no associated slide show to cause the background or logo to be displayed see Using one of your own pictures as background Using one of your own pictures as background The BK 5 allows you to use one of your own pictures as screen background allowing you to customize your per formances Connect the USB storage device that con tains the picture you want to use to the BK 5 s USB MEMORY port mamam m a Jeng elen Je ken Jenken mm saw ke The display shows a list of the files on the USB stor age device Select the JPG file you want to use That picture now appears on the external screen if connected This picture will be considered your User setting and the Background Mode parameter see p 68 will
169. dicator goes dark to switch off the counter melody Press and hold the MELODY INTELL button to open the window where you can change the Melody Intelligence settings see p 64 Using Split mode In Split mode the BK 5 s keyboard transmits notes played to the left of the split point to the Arranger parts The notes to the right of the split point however are played back by the real time parts In most cases the default setting for the split point is note number 60 C4 You can change the split point to a different note see Split Point on p 61 1 Press the SPLIT button its indicator lights The BK 5 is now in Split mode note numbers below the split point see Split on p 56 are used to trans pose rhythm playback in real time and to play the Backing SERA BK 5 Roland Using the Melody Intell igence function LWR part if it is active Note numbers above the split point can be used to play melodies using the UP1 and or UP2 part In Split mode the Type parameter see p 62 is automatically set to Intelligent See page 24 for how to select the real time parts you want to use You can activate a Hold function for the LWR part See Lower Hold on p 62 Press the SPLIT button again The BK 5 leaves Split mode the SPLIT indicator goes dark and chord recognition see Type on p 62 is set to Pianist2 Setting the volume of the real time parts The BK 5 provides an easy
170. e Release This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound will decay after the note is released until it is no longer heard The cutoff frequency will also fall according to this setting Parameter Setting Release 64 63 Vibrato Rate This parameter adjusts the speed of the pitch modu lation Positive settings make the preset pitch modulation faster and negative settings make it slower Parameter Setting Vibrato Rate 64 63 Vibrato Depth This parameter adjusts the intensity of the pitch modulation Positive settings mean that the wobble becomes more prominent while negative settings make it shallower Parameter Setting 64 63 Vibrato Depth Vibrato Delay This parameter adjusts the time required for the vibrato effect to begin Positive settings increase the time before vibrato will begin and negative set tings shorten the time Parameter Setting Vibrato Delay 64 63 GO C1 The function of this parameter depends on the sound you assigned to the selected part It may influence the filter and resonance setting switch between the organ samples with the fast and slow Rotary modu lation etc Parameter C1 Setting 00127 Tone Part MEA parameters This function group can be selected using MENU but ton gt Performance Edit gt Tone Part MFX Your BK 5 contains a multi effects processor that can be used for processing any keyboar
171. e message No item selected is displayed to alert you to the fact that you cannot make any changes 4 Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select Delete My Performances Rename CURSOR 5 Press the ENTER SELECT button The display changes to USE Memory Edit Delete My Performances If you selected a folder in step 2 above the display also contains a warning The folder may contain files Do you want to delete it 6 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select YES delete or NO don t delete I Press the ENTER SELECT button to confirm your selection 1 cking Keyboard BK 5 Roland Using the Search i to locate songs rhythms or pictures Using the Search function to locate songs rhythms or pictures The BK 5 provides a Search function that allows you to search the connected USB storage device for the files vou need This function is available even while the BK 5 is playing back a song or rhythm allowing you to pre pare the next song or picture without keeping your audience waiting Connect an optional USB memory to the BK 5 After a few seconds the display shows the contents of the connected USB storage device USE Memor Guantanamera MID 7 If you know the folder where the file is located select it by rotating the CURSOR VALUE dial and then pressing the ENTER SELECT button If you are not sure about the location do not select a folder to avoid that the Finder
172. e Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Std2 Kick2 Std 2 Kick1 Side Stick Std 2 Snare1 808 Clap Std 2 Snare2 Real Tom 6 JazzClosedHH Real Tom 6 Pedal HiHat Real Tom 4 JazzOpenHH Real Tom 4 Real Tom 1 Crash Cymb1 Real Tom 1 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell PC 3 CC32 4 Standard L R Voice One Voice Two Voice Three MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell St Kick 1 St Kick 2 Side Stick St Snare2 909 HandClap St Snare1 Real Tom 6 St HiHatCIsB Real Tom 6 Pedal HiHat2 Real Tom 4 St HiHatOpnB Real Tom 4 Real Tom 1 Crash Cymb 1 Real Tom 1 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ridbl cB Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell P
173. e level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiologist e This unit in combination with an amplifier and head S Never allow foreign objects e g flammable material coins pins or liquids e g water or juice to enter this unit Doing so may cause short circuits faulty operation or other malfunctions Le Immediately turn the power off remove the AC adaptor from the outlet and request servicing by your retailer A the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page when e The AC adaptor the power supply cord or the plug has been damaged or e f smoke or unusual odor occurs e Objects have fallen into or liquid has been spilled onto the unit or e The unit has been exposed to rain or otherwise has become wet or e The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance In households with small children an adult should pro vide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit Protect the unit from strong impact Do not drop it N Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Using the unit safely e Do not force the units power supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be N especially careful when using extensi
174. e located on the display page that can be selected using MENU button gt MIDI gt Edit System gt Rhythm Tx On Tax Channel lo Rx OFF Rx Channel 10 Rhythm volume Rx Off Rhythm Pc Rs On The Rhythm channel is used for receiving program change and bank select messages that select rhythms and volume messages that change the rhythm s vol ume The MIDI address of a rhythm consists of three ele ments a CC00 number a CC32 number and a pro gram change number The values assigned to CCOO and CC32 define the rhythm see Rhythm list on p 117 whereas the program change number defines the Division Intro Ending etc See Rhythm division program change numbers on p 118 Sending only a program change number selects another Division of the currently active rhythm Be aware however that only sending CC00 and CC32 messages without a program change has no effect When you select another rhythm on your BK 5 it transmits a CC00 CC32 PC cluster on the Rhythm channel which you could record using an external sequencer Tx Switches the transmission of MIDI messages on the Rhythm channel on or off Parameter Setting Tx Off On Tx Channel The channel used to transmit MIDI messages Parameter Setting Tx Channel 1016 Rx Switches the reception of MIDI messages on the Rhythm channel on or off Parameter Setting Rx Off On Rx Channel Use this parameter to assign a MIDI receive channel to t
175. e sound Depending on the material and temperature of the surface on which you place the unit its rubber feet may discolor or mar the surface You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet to pre vent this from happening If you do so please make sure that the unit will not slip or move accidentally Do not put anything that contains water e g flower vases on the BK 5 Also avoid the use of insecticides perfumes alcohol nail polish spray cans etc near the unit Swiftly wipe away any liquid that spills on the unit using a dry soft cloth Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a cloth impregnated with a mild nonabrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzene thinner alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Additional precautions Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored on a USB memory once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Use a reasonable amount of care when using the BK 5 s buttons other controls and jacks connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display When connecting disconnecting cables grasp the connector itself
176. eady recorded pattern its notes and events are reshuffled so that you may end up with incomplete measures None of vour data are deleted however Time Signature aid arl On Mar off Mara Off dard OFF Parameter Setting Explanation Division Intro Main Use this parameter to FillDwn FillUp select the Division you End ALL want to edit Time Signature 1 16 32 2 This parameter allows you to set the time sig nature Parameter Setting Explanation Variation 1 2 3 On Off Use these parameters 4 to select the pattern you want to change If you set Division to Fill Dwn or Fill Up there are only three button icons You can switch on several or all button icons if you like But you cannot switch off all four or three Press the WRITE button its indicator flashes to confirm your settings and edit the data Editing individual rhythm events Micro Edit Select this mode if you need to change just one aspect of an otherwise perfect rhythm In this section we will use the word event for any kind of message An event is thus a command or instruction for the Arranger You can only view and edit one track at a time There fore be sure to check the Track setting before editing the events displayed on this page 1 Return to the main Rhythm Composer page 2 Use the Track Mode and Division parameters to select the pattern you want to edit 3 Press the MENU
177. ecify the number of lines to be used for displaying lyrics Chord View Off On Select On if the BK 5 should display chord symbols along with the lyrics Utility The Utility parameters are found on the display page that can be selected using MENU button gt Global gt Utility Utilit Perform Next Song UPI EQUMFX Link On Rec Audio Level ode Rec Audio Sync On Audioln Level 64 Audion Center anc On USB Driver Generic E HL CES The following table shows the utility parameters Setting Explanation SMF Quick Start Off 2nd Bar Off Playback starts at 1st Note the very beginning of the song file which may contain a few silent bars 2nd Bar Causes play back to start from measure 2 of the selected Standard MIDI File 1st Note This is basi cally the same as the above except that playback starts on the first note of the selected song Parameter Parameter Setting Perform Next Off On Song UP1 EO MFX Off On Link Rec Audio Level 24 18 12 6 0 dB Rec Audio Sync Off On Audio In Level Audio In Center Off On Canc Explanation At the end of the cur rent song the next song in the Perfor mance List starts auto matically If the Performance List step refers to a rhythm the rhythm in question is loaded but you will need to start manually by pressing the START STOP button If you select on the BK 5 selects suitable MFX and equalizer
178. ect the ONE TOUCH memory you want to change and confirm with the ENTER SELECT but ton The display changes to One Touch Edit Ha 3 3 Here ONE TOUCH memory 1 has been selected for editing NOTE You can also select the desired ONE TOUCH memory by first pressing the ONE TOUCH button and then one of the flashing TONE buttons 1 4 4 Change the required settings As soon as you change any setting the display alerts you to the fact that the contents of the selected memory no longer corresponds to the current set tings EDIT One Touch Edit EDIT Hold Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the memory where you want to save your new settings Press the WRITE button its indicator flashes The display changes to One Touch Edit One Touch Export The selected rhythm will be exported on USB device Procede To save your ONE TOUCH changes rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select Yes and press ENTER SELECT The display shows the Executing message and then Operation Complete Select No and press ENTER SELECT if you don t want to save your changes after all The above message is only displayed the first time you press WRITE after editing a ONE TOUCH memory WE If the My Rhythms folder on the USB mem ory already contains a rhythm file of the same name In that case the display shows the following message when you select Yes and press ENTER SELECT see
179. ed Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Allows you to specify by how much the velocity values should change Select a posi tive value to increase the velocity the value is added to the velocity value of the affected notes or a negative value to decrease the velocity values that value is subtracted Select 0 if you prefer to work with the Magnify parameter see below Parameter Setting Explanation 0 200 This parameter works like a Compander effect a dynamics pro cessor that simulta neously acts as compressor and expander although it processes MIDI data by selecting a value above 100 you increase the differ ences between high and low velocity values in the selected range Values below 64 are lowered while values above 64 are increased The result is therefore that the dif ference between pia nissimo and fortissimo becomes far more pro nounced Magnity From Note refers to the lower limit of the note range you want to change To Note represents the upper limit From Note 0 C 127 G9 To Note Even the highest positive or negative value doesn t allow you to go beyond 1 or 127 There is a reason why 0 is impossi ble that value is used to indicate the end of a note note off 127 on the other hand is the highest velocity value the MIDI standard can muster Adding a high positive velocity value may thus lead to all notes bein
180. el Off or activate On the display of song lyrics on an external screen Performance This function group allows you to Edit select different Tones and effects set tings for the keyboard parts the selected rhythm to set the Arranger s behavior the split point ete All set tings of this group can be saved to a Performance memory See Perfor mance Edit parameters on p 56 Global This function group contains parame ters that apply to all sections of the BK 5 see p 65 One Touch Edit This functions allows you to edit the ONE TOUCH memories and to save your changes Function group Explanation Mastering Tools These functions allow you to set the global compressor and equalizer see p 71 Makeup Tools These functions allow you to edit the selected rhythm or SMF song in an intuitive way without caring too much about the underlying MIDI parameters See page 74 Rhythm This function group allows you to cre Composer ate new rhythms or to edit existing ones MIDI This function group allows you to edit the BK 5 s MIDI parameters see p 102 Factory Reset This command allows you to load the BK 5 s factory settings see p 111 Format USB This command allows you to format an Device optional USB memory see p 111 Press the ENTER SELECT button to go to the display page where you can edit the parameters of the selected group or to exe cute the selected command Internal Lyrics T
181. empo value Simultaneously press the TEMPO lt a and b gt buttons STANDARD to return to the rhythm s preset tempo Press the 5 11 button again to pause song playback The n button goes dark Press 5 1 yet again to resume playback Press the SYNC START button to stop playback You can use the following buttons to control song playback see the gray legends SYNC START Backing Keyboard BK 5 Using the BK 5 as a USB player l Button Explanation 5 1 Starts or pauses song playback m Stops song playback lt Rewinds the song gt gt Fast forwards the song Renaming or deleting files folders on a USB memory Rename Here is how to change the name of a file or folder on the connected USB memory Connect an optional USB memory to the BK 5 After a few seconds the display shows the contents of the USB memory Cn At Di Press the USB MEMORY button if you inserted the USB memory at an earlier stage and now want to return to this display page 2 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the file or folder you want to rename 3 Press the MENU button to jump to the USB Memory Edit page The display changes to CURSOR a DE 4 To return to the BK 5 s menu press and hold the EXIT button While the contents of the connected USB memory is displayed pressing MENU takes you to the USB Memory Edit page where you can select Re
182. entem este simbolo n o dever o ser eliminados juntamente com o lixo dom stico Dit symbool geeft aan dat in landen van de EU dit product gescheiden van huishoudelijk afval moet worden aangeboden zoals bepaald per gemeente of regio Producten die van dit symbool zijn voorzien mogen niet samen met huishoudelijk afval worden verwijderd Dette symbol angiver at i EU lande skal dette produkt opsamles adskilt fra husholdningsaffald som defineret i hver enkelt region Produkter med dette symbol m ikke smides ud sammen med husholdningsaffald Dette symbolet indikerer at produktet ma behandles som spesialavfall i EU land iht til retningslinjer for den enkelte regionen og ikke kastes sammen med vanlig husholdningsavfall Produkter som er merket med dette symbolet m ikke kastes sammen med vanlig husholdningsavfall 68 06 06 OO OO 90 Symbolen anger att i EU l nder m ste den har produkten kasseras separat fran hushallsavfall i enlighet med varje regions bestimmelser Produkter med den har symbolen far inte kasseras tillsammans med hushallsavfall Tama merkint ilmaisee ett tuote on EU maissa ker tt v erill n kotitalousj tteist kunkin alueen voimassa olevien m r ysten mukaisesti T ll merkinn ll varustettuja tuotteita ei saa h vitt kotitalousj tteiden mukana Ez a szimb lum azt jelenti hogy az Eur pai Uni ban ezt a term ket a h ztart si hullad kt l elk l n tve az adott r gi ban rv nyes
183. er The BK 5 plays Standard MIDI Files and rhythms directly from a connected USB memory USB based audio player and audio recorder The BK 5 contains an audio player function that allows you to play back mp3 and WAV files directly from a connected USB memory The BK 5 also allows you to record your perfor mances The resulting WAV files audio can be played back on the BK 5 itself Three real time parts The BK 5 comes with three MIDI parts Upper 1 Upper 2 Lower that can be played in real time 16 Song parts The BK 5 also provides 16 Song parts which are used for Standard MIDI File playback but can also be con trolled via MIDI a computer connected to the MIDI IN socket or the COMPUTER USB port This allows you to use the BK 5 as a 16 part multitimbral MIDI tone generator Song and Rhythm Makeup Tools for Standard MIDI Files and rhythms These tools allow you to modify songs in no time without knowing the MIDI commands normally used to perform such changes Performance List function This function allows you to save nearly all of the BK 5 s settings for each song and or rhythm you will be using during your performances The list that con tains these settings can be saved to a USB memory and loaded from there whenever the need arises Possibility to create new rhythms and to edit existing ones The Rhythm Composer function allows you to create new rhythms and to edit i e change existing ones and then save them as User
184. erformance Edit gt Split Split Point Ca Lower Hold Off This page can also be selected by pressing and holding the SPLIT button Split Point The Split Point parameter allows you to set the split point Parameter Setting Split Point C 2 B6 After pressing the ENTER SELECT button you can set the split point either by rotating the CURSOR VALUE dial or by simply pressing the corresponding key on the keyboard Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options Lower Hold This parameter allows you to set the Hold function for the LWR part Parameter Setting Lower Hold Off On If you set this parameter to On the notes of the LWR part go on sounding until you play other notes in the left keyboard area This function is only avail able while the SPLIT button lights If you select Off the LWR part stops sounding as soon as you release all keys in the left area Key This function allows you to transpose the BK 5 s pitch in semi tone steps Depending on the mode setting this transposition applies to all sections or just a specific sec tion It can be selected using MENU button gt Perfor mance Edit gt Key or by pressing the KEY button See Changing the key on p 41 Pressing and holding the KEY button locks this parameter and keeps it from changing when you select Performance memories Ke DU Mode Song Keyboard Key Allows you to set the desired transposition int
185. eries able CD ROMs made for VIMA series instruments VIMA TUNES While a BK 5 song plays you can view a slide show _ ssssa a Cs ff ser i suitable for the character of that song on an external display or television mp3 e MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 mp3 CDG e Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz e Bit rate 32 40 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320kbps Audio files VBR variable bit rate Carefully insert the optional USB memory all the way into wav e 16 bit linear the port until it is firmly in place e Sampling frequency 44 1kHz e Stereo mono The BK 5 supports USB memories with a capacity of up to 2TB Selecting a song or rhythm on a USB memory 1 Connect an optional USB memory to the BK 5 After a few seconds the display shows the contents of the USB memory USE bemor Press the USB MEMOMRY button if you inserted the USB memory at an earlier stage and now want to return to this display page 1 The icons to the left of the file names indicate the file type Icon Explanation STL Rhythm file SMF SMF file MP3 Audio mp3 file WAV Audio WAV file JPG Picture tile Folder Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the file you want to play back or display Press the ENTER SELECT button to load the file The USB MEMORY button now lights to indicate that you selected a file on the USB memory If the file you need is located inside a folder you must first select that folder press the EN
186. erval Each value represents a semi tone step Select 0 if no transposition is required Parameter Setting Key 6 5 Mode Allows you to specify which sections should be trans posed by the Key parameter Parameter Setting Mode Song Keyboard Song Keyboard Song Only song playback is transposed Keyboard Only the notes you play on the keyboard are transposed This also affects the chord informa tion transmitted to the Arranger Song Keyboard Both song playback and the key board parts are transposed Rhythm playback is also transposed Arranger Setting parameters This function group can be selected using MENU but ton gt Performance Edit gt Arranger Setting Zane hole Type Pianist Arranger Hold On Tempo Preset Fillin Half Bar off Fill Ritardando Off Termpoch Acc Rit 20 KEN CURSOR CR DEI The parameters of this function group apply to the Arranger as a whole and allow you to fine tune its behavior Arranger Select Off if you only need the drum part of the selected rhythm and no melodic accompaniment parts ABass ACC1 6 Parameter Setting Arranger Off On Zone When you press the SPLIT button the selected rhythm pattern is controlled by the chords you play in the left half of the keyboard You can also tell the Arranger to scan another part of the keyboard for usable chords Though Left is probably the most popular setting you could select Righ
187. es CC91 Chorus Off On Select On to receive Cho rus messages CC93 Hold Off On Select On to receive Hold messages CC64 Sostenuto Off On Select On to receive Sos tenuto messages CC66 Soft Off On Select On to receive Soft messages CC67 Caf Off On Select On to receive Caf Channel aftertouch RPN Off On Select On to receive Reg istered parameter number messages CC100 101 NRPN Off On Select On to receive Non registered parameter num ber messages CC98 99 System Off On Select On to receive Sys Exclusive tem Exclusive messages CC16 Off On General purpose controller that allows you to influence the C1 parameter see p 60 Select On to receive this message type Select All Off On Select On to receive all MIDI message listed above 1 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland MIDI parameters Edit Tone Parts The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using MENU button gt MIDI gt Edit Tone Parts Part Upperi ya Ta Shift D TxLocal On Tx Event Rx On Rx ch d CH Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the part you want to edit Upper1 Upper2 Lower Mel Intell Press the ENTER SELECT button The display now shows the settings for the selected part Tx Tx Ch Tx Shift Tx Local Tx Event For the explanation of these parameters please refer to page 104 Rx Rx Ch Rx Shift Rx Limit Low High Rx Even
188. ess Reverb Panpot and Chorus when you notice that the effect is too prominent or not strong enough You can also use it to upgrade older rhythms to ensure that they use the BK 5 s new sounds Global Change Mode Major Division Introl Alteration Mode wes From 2000 e To 2200 TRA From 2032 Ha ToCCaz SSC KA Parameter Explanation Track ADrums Acc6 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the opera tion applies to all tracks Mode Major Minor Allows you to select 7th ALL the Mode to be edited Division Intro 1 4 Use this parameter to IntroALL select the Division you Main 1 4 want to edit Fill Dwn 153 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 ALL Alteration Nearest This message type is Mode Degree only available for melodic rhythm tracks i e not for ADrums or ABass tracks Rhythm tracks you only Just recorded do not con tain it See also About Alteration Mode mes sages on p 100 9S Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options Parameter Setting Explanation Nearest Refers to a more musical system for real time shifts of the recorded rhythm notes during Arranger playback Degree This setting refers to the old sys tem for real time con version of track information during rhythm playback See page 100 Select if the selected pattern should ignore this set ting From To CCOO CC32 PC
189. essages before they are transmitted to an external MIDI instrument or computer The maximum possible transposition is four octaves up 48 or down 48 Each step represents a semi tone Parameter Setting Tx Shift 4800448 Tx Local This is where you can disconnect the part from the internal sound source Off or re establish that connection On Parameter Setting Tx Local Off On Tx Event The TX Event section provides a number of filters that allow you to specify whether the messages in question should be transmitted On or not Off Filter Setting Explanation Program Off On Select On to transmit pro Change gram change and bank select CC00 CC32 mes sages T O4 Filter Setting Explanation Select On to transmit Pitch Bend messages Pitch Bender Off On Select On to transmit Modulation messages CCO1 Modulation Off On Select On to transmit Vol ume messages CC07 Volume Off On Select On to transmit Panpot messages CC10 Panpot Off On Select On to transmit Expression messages CC11 Expression Off On Select On to transmit Reverb messages CC91 Reverb Off On Select On to transmit Chorus messages CC93 Chorus Off On Select On to transmit all MIDI message listed above Select All Off On Rx Select On if you want the selected part to receive MIDI data Parameter Setting Rx Off On Rx Ch Allows you to
190. fect they use an internal address which is not usu ally displayed For MIDI applications involving sequenc ers or external controllers knowing the official address may come in handy The BK 5 has a handy system that provides this information instantly there is thus no need to look up the MIDI address in the tables at the end of this manual 1 Select the Tone or Rhythm whose MIDI address you need to know i Ls TA SE rest C Ge CURSOR Hold CURSOR Hold Tone selection window Rhythm selection window 2G 2 Press and hold the NUMERIC button to call up a pop up window UFL Fiano E Piano Disco Dance si MaturalFiano di Press again the Rhythrn button to jump to next Rhythm category Cep Press again the TOME button to jump to next one category Tone selection window Rhythm selection window 3 Press the EXIT button or press NUMERIC again to return to the previous page Using the Help function Whenever the display shows a hold NUMERIC mes sage the BK 5 can provide some explanations about the parameters currently shown in the display To view this information proceed as follows E CURSOR Hold Hwag RREA cd ENTER UPI Piano E Piano 1 Select a page where the above field is dis played then press and hold the NUMERIC button ken kene ken kmo em ken lomo em ko Se O BA A pop up window similar to the following appears
191. ff Arranger Rit Allows you to activate the Arranger s Tempo Change Ritard function page 64 Arranger Acc Allows you to activate the Arranger s Tempo Change Accel function page 64 Language This parameter allows you to choose the character set to be used for the following e Rename function see p 47 Parameter Setting Language Latin Cyrillic East Europe Save Global This function allows you to save all Global parameter settings to ensure that they are loaded automatically each time you switch the BK 5 on Save Global The GlobalParameters are changed Continue You can select this function using MENU button gt Global gt Save Global Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select YES then press the ENTER SELECT but ton to define the current settings as the default state The display shows a confirmation message If you don t want to define the current Global set tings as the default state rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select NO then press the ENTER SELECT button The BK 5 then returns to the Performance Edit page The metronome status On Off see page 67 is not saved to the Global area One Touch Edit See Using the One Touch function on p 31 e Lyrics display for files that contain lyrics e Search functions see p 37 7 O Mastering Tools The BK 5 contains an effects processor that applies to all real time rhythm and SMF
192. for example The first figure refers to the bar the second to the beat within that bar and the third to the clock CPT between the current beat and the next Each beat of a 4 4 bar comprises 120 clocks Pm Monitoring note events The Rhythm Composer can play back the note events you select This may help you identify the occurrence you want to edit When you move the cursor to a note event it is played back General procedure To change information already available on the selected track proceed as follows Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the list entry you want to edit Press the ENTER SELECT button to select the first value In the following examples we selected the CCOO message left and the first parameter of a note event right pra 001 01 000 001 01 000 CC 00 Bank MSE CC ll Expression OU 001 01 000 001 01 000 CC 32 Bank LSE 4 001 01 000 PC Program Change 31 001 01 000 CC 10 Panpot 64 GE des Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to set the value Press the ENTER SELECT button to select the next value and edit it When you re done press the EXIT button to return to the Rhythm Composer page then save your rhythm page 85 CC 91 Reverb GU 001 01 000 EE 93 Chorus 001 01 000 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options W Parameters you can change BM About the Note messages Note velocity and gate time messages These messages always come in pair
193. formance List from the USB memory press the PERFORMANCE LIST button again and proceed with step 4 below The LIST icon at the bottom means that you can press the LIST button to alternate between the list of Performance List files see the illustration above and the contents of the currently selected list see the illustration below Music Assistant GIR ES CELA If the USB memory contains no Performance List files or if the memory is not connected properly the BK 5 only dis plays the Music Assistant and Factory Songs list Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the Performance List you want to use Press the ENTER SELECT button to confirm your selection In our example we selected the Music Assistant list The display changes to Music Assistant KEN SI lire Backing Keyboard BK 5 Performance Lists You can now select a Performance memory see below If you need to load another Performance List press the PERFORMANCE LIST button again Recalling a Performance Music Assistant Factory Songs memory Here is how to select a Performance Music Assistant Factory Songs memory from the last list you loaded see p 45 1 If the display doesn t yet show a list of Per formance Music Assistant Factory Songs memories press the PERFORMANCE LIST button Music Assistant In this example we loaded the Music Assistant List 2 Rotate the CURSOR V
194. g passages Setting and using the loop positions Select the song you want to play back Press the START STOP button to start play back BK jae E ek e When the BK 5 reaches the beginning of the passage you want to play back in a loop press the VARIATION 3 button The VARIATION 3 button flashes to indicate that the position has been set Backing Keyboard BK 5 Using the BK 5 as a USB player 4 Wait until you reach the end of the passage to be played back in a loop then press the VARIATION 4 button The VARIATION 4 button lights while VARIATION 3 keeps flashing The loop s start and end positions have been set and can be used Here is what you have set so far this is only an example E Flashes Pl Lights 3 4 A d dej By els Press the VARIATION 3 button it lights to activate the loop The passage selected above is now played back over and over a Lights D SE EFE EEA Press the VARIATION 3 button again it flashes to deactivate loop playback This does not delete the loop positions The song is once again played back in the usual way i e until the end Press VARIATION 3 yet again it lights to return to the loop start position and activate the loop The marker positions are deleted when you start playback of another song or switch off the BK 5 To delete the first and second marker posi tions press the VARIAT
195. g Baug bd bd PTTL EY DETTE ERETTE i i d i F sus4 Gsus4 Absus4 Asus4 Bb sus4 Bsus4 PETTITT LOAN LEITETE COT PETES PP AL LETE EMITT F 7sus4 G7sus4 Ab7sus4 A7sus4 Bb 7sus4 B7sus4 KA KAL AA DADA LA ELT T YET E AI AI DADA ALANA F 7 13 G7 13 Ab7 13 A7 13 Bb 7 13 B7 13 ba La da d ia d ia du Er EEE LET LET gg LE _ gt i d d MG a em fis d WER Se Backing Keyboard BK 5 Index Index Numerics IMA PE AE 68 DO OA a ana e I ater are ae ee 68 2NA LONG a anand Saree ae wa 64 Isili AD dn ta kan 85 A Absolute 109 ACC acces AA 64 Accompaniment 27 E ete Aa ai Ee 100 Adaptive Chord Voicing 100 Alteration VOC aaa dara ence RR 100 ANGARA 67 Arranger 27 62 Chord RE 69 Ona aaya NA aaralan 63 69 Aspect Ratio 67 Assign 59 Attack 60 71 77 Audio AO zara 19 LOVE nm aia pei Kees 68 fel SAT RE to ati 19 PEC ade a8 natia 52 Recording 52 VINE ae i tacea a aa ones 68 Audio In Center CANG meci e tor ii 68 ka aer sa n ege lait 68 AudioXfade 70 Auto EUR Le BEE 29 OTP n coste St m na al aurii et e 69 B Background 51 CO Oe se eta 68 le 68 BACKING 27 BALANCE iia 27 Balance 27 DIS LO te ee e ceia trata 107 Bender Assign 59 Bender Range 59 BIAS 94 Blocking se
196. g played at 127 Magnify values below 100 have the opposite effect they push all velocity towards the imaginary center of 64 thus reducing differences in playing dynamics Press the WRITE button its indicator flashes to confirm your settings and edit the data E Change Gate Time This function allows you to modify the duration of the notes in the selected time From To and note From Note To Note ranges We recommend you only use this function to shorten notes that suddenly seem too long when you assign a different sound to the track in question You cannot view the duration of the notes here which makes editing the data en bloc a little bit hazardous See Editing individual rhythm events Micro Edit on p 99 for how to change the duration of individual notes After selecting a sound with a slow release i e a sound that lingers on after all notes have been released however Change Gate Time will help you cut the notes down to size and thus avoid undesir able overlaps Parameter Track Mode Division From Bars To CPT Bias Magnify Change Gate Time Mode Division From Bar From Beat From Cpt ToBar ToBeat Major Intro DOL 01 000 001 Hay Ka KEY Setting ADrums Acc6 ALL Major Minor 7th Intro 14 Main 154 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1 3 End 14 See page 88 1920 1920 0 200 Explanation Allows yo
197. ge devices can be used right away Use USB memory sold by Roland M UF series We cannot guar antee operation if any other USB memory is used Before using external USB storage devices Carefully insert the USB memory all the way in until it is firmly in place Never touch the terminals of USB memories Also avoid getting the terminals dirty USB memories are constructed using precision components han dle the storage devices carefully paying particular note to the fol lowing e To prevent damage from static electrical charges discharge any static electricity that might be present in your body before han dling a USB memory e Do not touch the terminals with your fingers or any metal object e Do not bend or drop a USB memory or subject it to strong impact e Do not leave a USB memory in direct sunlight or in locations such as a closed up automobile e Do not allow a USB memory to become wet e Do not disassemble or modify your external USB memories When connecting a USB memory position it horizontally with the BK 5 s USB MEMORY port and insert it without using excessive force The USB MEMORY port may be damaged if you use excessive force when inserting a USB memory Do not insert anything other than a USB memory e g wire coins other types of device into the USB MEMORY port Doing so will damage the BK 5 s USB MEMORY port Never connect your USB memory to the BK 5 via a USB hub Do not connect or disconnect a
198. ghrouta 2 Loop Zaghrouta 2 End 135 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Drum Sets PC 117 CC32 2 Oriental 2 0 C1 ne 38 2 D 1 Est Za A TIE 1 1 1 af UT n L 1 H 1 N P DO Q i 9 A 1 10 Bb 1 11 B 1 12 CO 13 CHO amp 14 DO 15 DEO 16 EO FO 18 FHO 19 GO A0 GO 21 AO 22 Bbo 23 BO 24 C1 25 CHI 26 D1 27 D 1 amp 28 E1 29 F1 30 F 1 BS 31 G1 32 G41 33 Al 34 gt oy am 35 B1 Bass Drum 36 C2 Bass Drum Ee ER Rim Shot 38 D2 Snare Drum WE Hand Clap 1 40 E2 Hand Clap 2 41 F2 Tomi SES H Closed Hi Hat 43 G2 Tom2 UV CE PA Closed Hi Hat 45 A2 Tom ETA Open Hi Hat 47 B2 Tom4 48 C3 Tom5 Li Mei Crash Cymbal 50 D3 Tomb Ride Cymbal 52 E3 Doholla 2 Rim 1 53 F3 Doholla2 Dom SU Si ER Hager 55 G3 Doholla2Rim2 NEI Cowbell 57 A3 Doholla 2 Sak 58 Bb3 Zir 59 B3 Dot 2 Rm 60 C4 Dol 3 Dom ee CH Dot 2 Sak 1 62 D4 Dof2Rim2 MAZE Do 2 Sak 2 64 E4 Tabla2Tak1 65 F4 Tabla2Tak2 SIM Tabla Roll 67 G4 Tabla2 Dom ci et 7 88 Tabla FX 69 A4 Tabla 2 Tak 3 WET YA Tabla 2 Sak 71 B4 Tabla 2 Rim 72 C5 Rek Trill LENES Rek 2 Sak 74 D5 Rek2Dom Closed Est check 2 Rim 76 E5 Rek2Dom Open 77 F5 Rek2Tak1 vie seme Rek 2 Khana Open 79 G5 Rek2Tak2 ICE Rek 2 Roll 81 A5 Rek2 Khana Closed RIA stem lab Noueri Rim 83 B5 Rek2Tak3 N 136 PC 117 CC32 3 Oriental 3 Wadaiko
199. gnals the BK 5 generates as well as the signals you input to the BK 5 If you can want to use only one channel on your external amplifier connect the L MONO socket to its input For opti mum sound quality we recommend working in stereo though VIDEO OUTPUT socket Connect this socket to the appropriate input of your TV or external display The signal format PAL or NTSC and aspect ratio are select able page 67 14 PEDAL HOLD socket An optional Roland DP series or BOSS FS 5U foot switch connected to this socket can be used to hold the notes of the real time parts The MELODY INTELL part can also be sustained in this way This function is also referred to as sustain or damper PEDAL SWITCH EXPRESSION socket Connect a separately available pedal switch Roland DP series a separately available foot switch BOSS FS 5U or a separately available expression pedal Roland EV 5 to this jack page 18 MIDI IN amp OUT sockets You can connect MIDI devices to these sockets page 17 POWER switch Turns the power on off page 20 With the factory settings the BK 5 s power will auto matically be switched off 30 minutes after you stop playing or operating the BK 5 If the BK 5 s power has been turned off automati cally you can use the POWER switch to turn the BK 5 back on If you don t want the power to turn off automatically set the Auto Off parameter to OFF page 69 DC IN socket Connect the s
200. h In most cases you will probably work with multiples of J notes i e 120CPT because 120CPT repre sent one beat of an X 4 bar 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 etc Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options Parameter Setting Explanation Mode Major Minor Choose the Modes to 7th which the new length Major Minor setting should apply Major 7th You can also switch on Major Minor two or all three button 7th icons If you set Track Minor 7th to ALL all three Modes are selected automatically and that cannot be changed Press the WRITE button its indicator flashes to confirm your settings and edit the data MI Time Signature The Time Signature parameter allows you to check and set the time signature of the patterns The major minor and seventh Modes of a pattern must always use the same time signature which is why you can not edit them separately Use this parameter to specify the time signature of the selected pattern Division see below The MAIN INTRO and ENDING instances comprise four variations which is why there are four Time Signa tures values you can select using the VARIATION 1 4 button icons When you select Fill Up or Fill Dwn for Division only three Time Signature instances can be edited The most commonly used time signatures are 2 4 3 4 4 4 6 8 and 12 8 Other values such as 7 4 13 8 etc are also possible When you change the time signature of an alr
201. he quency cutoff frequency of the middle band this is a peaking filter Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Mastering Tools Parameter Setting range Explanation Mid Q 0 5 1 2 4 8 Use this parameter to specify the width of the Mid Frequency band that you want to boost or cut Smaller values mean that neighboring frequencies above below that value are also affected Mid Gain 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected Mid frequency Low Fre 50 80 100 Allows you to set the quency 150 200 250 cutoff frequency of the 300 400Hz low band this is a shelv ing filter Low Gain 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected Low frequency Write User This function allows you to save the settings you made on the Equalizer page Press the WRITE button Write on User Continue Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select YES then press the ENTER SELECT but ton to save the current settings The display shows a confirmation message If you don t want to define the current settings as the default state rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select NO then press the ENTER SELECT button The BK 5 then returns to the Equalizer page There is only one User memory for your own settings By saving new settings you therefore overwrite the previous ones When you switch on the BK 5 it automatically loads the User settings 73 Backing Keyboard BK
202. he BK 5 s display can show the lyrics of Standard MIDI Files or mp3 songs you load If such song files contain Lyrics data the lyrics are always displayed on an exter nal screen you connect to the BK 5 see Connecting a television set on p 18 unless you set the External Lyr ics parameter to Off see below Sometimes however it may be wiser to orient the exter nal screen in such a way that the audience can easily follow the lyrics which may then mean that you no longer see what is displayed If you need to see the lyr ics you can follow them on the BK 5 s internal display Load a song with lyrics data see p 35 2 Select the Internal Lyrics command see General procedure 3 Press the ENTER SELECT button Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options The internal display now shows the lyrics of the selected song 4 lines at a time and the chords of the song only for SMF files Internal Lyrics Amazing Grace AMAZING GRACE Amazing Grace how sweet the sound that saved a wretch like me 4 At the end of the song press and hold the EXIT button to return to the main page The internal display always shows four lines of lyrics and the chord symbols this cannot be changed External Lyrics This is in fact a switch that allows you to cancel Off or activate On the display of song lyrics on an exter nal screen Performance Edit parameters The following parameters can be
203. he Division you Dwn 1 3 Fill want to edit Up 153 End 14 See page 88 Press the WRITE button its indicator flashes to confirm your settings and edit the data E Copy 1 a b This function can be used to copy individual tracks Modes and Divisions to replace existing parts while keeping the remaining parts of the rhythm already in the RAM memory KEY Set Location to Source The following parameters are displayed Parameter Setting Explanation Source Desti Allows you to select nation the rhythm whose tracks you wish to copy Source to another rhythm Des Location tination Track ADrums Acc6 Allows you to select ALL the track you wish to copy Select ALL to edit all tracks Mode Major Minor Allows you to select 7th ALL the Mode to be copied Division Intro 14 Use this parameter to IntroALL Main 1 4 MainALL Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill DwnALL Fill Up 153 Fill UpALL End 194 EndALL select the Division you want to copy From Bars To CPT See page 88 Select a rhythm Selecting a factory rhythm Use the RHYTHM FAM ILY buttons and the displayed parameters to select the desired rhythm Skip to step 3 below Selecting an external rhythm You can also work with a rhythm on a USB memory Press the USB MEMORY button to jump to the USB Memory page Select the rhythm that contains the track s you want to copy Backing Keyboard
204. he MIDI Set again provided you want to keep your changes MIDI Set Write LS EDITED CURSOR Factory Reset The following function allows you to recall the BK 5 s original factory settings This has no effect on the data stored on a USB memory 1 Press the MENU button The display changes to PITY APOS CUP SOF Se 2 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the Factory Reset entry then press the ENTER SELECT button fal AlFactory data willbe restored Continue 3 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select YES then press the ENTER SELECT but ton to load the factory settings Select NO to return to the previous display page without loading the factory settings A confirmation message informs you that the BK 5 has been initialized Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Factory Reset Formatting a USB memory This function allows you to format the connected USB memory USB memories using the FAT 32 file system may not need to be formatted We nevertheless recommend for matting all new USB storage devices with the BK 5 IMPORTANT NOTE Formatting a USB memory means that all files songs rhythms etc it contains are lost Always check the contents of the memory before decid ing to format it 1 Connect the a USB storage you want to for mat device to the USB MEMORY port on the BK 5 s front panel 2 Press the MENU button 3 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial t
205. he Rhythm section Parameter Setting Rx Channel TOS Rhythm Volume Rx Allows you to enable or disable the reception of vol ume messages relating the rhythm Parameter Setting Rhythm Volume Rx Off On Rhythm Pe Rx This parameter allows you to enable or disable the reception of program change and bank select mes sages for rhythm selection Parameter Setting Rhythm Pc Rx Off On NTA The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using MENU button gt MIDI gt Edit System gt NTA HTA Rx Octave o Poe Global Limit Low c Rx Global Limit High Go NTA notes are only received from an external MIDI instrument What you play in the chord recognition area of the keyboard to feed the Arranger is auto matically converted to the corresponding MIDI note numbers so that all rhythm parts transmit their notes to external instruments There is thus no need to transmit the note messages of what you play in the chord recognition area NTA separately These parameters allow you to specify on which MIDI channels the BK 5 should receive chord information used to change the rhythm e key in real time Channel Allows you to select the MIDI channel on which the BK 5 should receive NTA messages Parameter Setting Channel Chi Ch16 Rx This parameter allows you to specify whether On or not Off the selected MIDI channel should be used to receive chor
206. he com pressor of the corresponding band should stop working when the signal level drops below the Threshold value DO 5000ms Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options Parameter Setting Explanation Threshold 36 0dB This parameter allows you to set the level the frequency band High Mid or Low must reach to trigger its compressor The lower the value the more notice able the compression will be The display shows a confirmation message If you don t want to define the current settings as the default state rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select NO then press the ENTER SELECT button The BK 5 then returns to the Compressor page There is only one User memory for your own settings By saving new settings you therefore overwrite the previous Ratio Use this parameter to spec ones ify how strongly the level should be reduced when the band s level exceeds the When you switch on the BK 5 it automatically loads the Threshold level 1 2 0 for User settings example means that level values above the Threshold l level are halved 1 INF is Equalizer useful if you set Threshold To edit the Equalizer parameters use MENU button gt to OdB or thereabout This Mastering Tools gt Equalizer produces a limiter effect which means that no signal SE level will ever exceed the Preset 6 Standard Threshold value This may Level 110 help you protect the
207. he cursor on the You can only listen to Tones for the Upper2 or Lower part if main page automatically jumps to the UP2 or the UP2 or LWR button lights LWR field If UP2 and LWR are both switched off the cursor jumps to the UP1 field Tones can also be selected by simply pressing the NUMERIC key and entering their number Selecting Tones for the real time parts Selecting a Tone on the main page On the BK 5 the sounds you can assign to the real time 1 If the main page is not displayed press and parts are called Tones The BK 5 allows you to assign hold the EXIT button until it appears any of the available Tones to any of the three real time The numbers and names of the Tones assigned to the parts Tone selection always applies to the part UP1 three real time parts are displayed in the lower half UP2 or LWR whose field is currently displayed in of the display eege CPE Tones can be selected in two ways paa TT IE Broken Dance E SORTE Using the UP2 or LWR button to select Tones LI d gt 1 Press and hold the UP2 or LWR button wim arene dt The display now shows a list of Tones where the cur 7E Ra e rently selected sound is displayed in reverse Dr Clip PS The highlighted numeric field refers to the part d whose Tone assignment can be changed To select a different part move the cursor to its numeric field and press the ENTER SELECT button 2 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select di CURSOR Hol
208. he drum instrument uses the equalizer settings of the Drum Set it belongs to Instr The drum instru ment uses its own equalizer settings see below Off The drum instru ment is not equalized Provides access to the EO parameters of the currently selected drum instrument if Instr Equalizer is set to Int See Edit EQ on p 78 for a descrip tion of the available parameters This function allows you to cancel the Drum Instrument D settings of the cur rently selected instru ment and to revert to the previously saved version If you are satisfied with your changes and wish to preserve them save your rhythm song to the USB memory See Saving your new rhythm or song SMF version on p 80 The changes you make using the procedure described above can be burned into the rhythm song file using the Freeze Data command see p 79 Doing so will allow you to hear those changes on any sequencer software you use Changes you don t freeze are nevertheless stored when you save the edited rhythm song file but only the BK 5 can read them Freeze Data To commit your settings use MENU button Makeup Tools s Freeze Data Before saving your made up song to a USB memory you can but you don t have to commit your changes thereby turning them into regular rhythm or song data This may come in handy if you also want to play back your new rhythm song version on an
209. he terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug For the USA DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Compliance Information Statement Model Name BK 5 Type of Equipment Backing Keyboard Responsible Party Roland Corporation U S Address 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 Telephone 323 890 3700 Roland M 3 BACKING KEYBOARD Owner s Manual Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the Roland BK 5 Backing Keyboard To ensure that you obtain the maximum enjoyment and take full advantage of the BK 5 s functionality please read this owner s manual carefully About this manual You should first read the chapter Before you start using the BK 5 on p 16 It explains how to connect the AC adaptor and turn on the power This Owner s Manual explains everything from the BK 5 s basic operations to more advanced functions Conventions in this manual In order to explain the operations as clearly as possible this manual uses the following conventions e Text enclosed in square brackets indicates the name of a button or knob Example the MENU button e Paragraphs that begin with NOTE are cautionary statements that you must read e Paragraphs that begin with MEMO contain useful information that may come in handy e The numbers of pages that you can turn to for additional or related informatio
210. hythm s arrangement VARIATION Explanation 1 The simplest accompaniment pattern A good choice for the first of the songs you play 2 A slightly more complex pattern you may want to use for subsequent verses 3 This pattern would be a good choice for the first chorus 4 This is the most complex arrangement Consider selecting it for the bridge or the final chorus sections of a song Note that the VARIATION patterns are repeated played back in a loop until select a different pattern or stop rhythm playback Mi INTRO BK 3 segue an m um mr DI Selects an introduction which is usually used at the beginning of a song You can however also select this pattern for other song sections The behavior of the Intro pattern depends on when you press the INTRO button INTRO Behavior Pressed before The indicator lights starting rhythm When you start rhythm playback the playback Arranger first plays a musical intro duction This pattern is played back only once Pressed during The indicator flashes to signal that rhythm playback the INTRO pattern will begin on the next downbeat When the intro is finished the BK 5 returns to the previously selected VARIATION pattern There are in fact four different INTRO patterns that can be selected using the VARIATION 1 2 3 and 4 buttons Again the VARIATION buttons determine the complexity of the intro arrangement E ENDING en lss s
211. i Hold L IR ven Paa You can now a Save the song under a new name gt Saving your recording as an audio file on p 53 b Save the song under the name suggested by the BK 5 My recording001 Press the WRITE button After a few seconds the display will return to the main page In this case your audio file is saved in the My Recordings folder c Decide to discard your recording because you are unhappy with it Press the EXIT button The display changes to Save Exit Confirm Your recording will be lost Are you sure gt Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select YES then press ENTER SELECT to erase your recording Selecting NO here takes you back to the state where you can choose between options a and b Listening to your recording If you selected a or b above you can listen to your recorded performance Press the START STOP button to start play back of your recording If your recording seems too loud or too soft you may want to change the setting of the Rec Audio Level parameter MENU button gt Global Utility gt Rec Audio Level on p 68 The BK 5 provides a second recording mode that allows you to start recording before the song you selected MENU button gt Global Utility Rec Audio Sync on p 68 Saving your recording as an audio file When you stop recording see above the display shows the following message NG Recording o
212. iBongo NewLoBongo NewCongaSlp NewCongaOp NewLoConga Timbal Hi Timbal Lo Agogo Agogo NewShaker2 NewShaker1 ShrtWhistle LongWhistle NewQuide1 NewQuide2 NewClaves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell PC 49 CC32 4 Orchestra Std 1 Kick1 Std 1 Kick2 Std 2 Kick1 Std2 Kick2 Kick 1 Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Room Kick 1 Room Kick 2 Power Kick1 Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 TR 808 Kick TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 Voice One Voice Two Voice Three MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap JazzClosedHH Pedal HiHat JazzOpenHH Ride Cymbal Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Jazz Kick 1 ConcertKick Side Stick Concert Snr Castanets Concert Snr Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Con Cymbal2 Vibraslap Concert Cym Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl Opentriangl Shaker Jingle Bell PC 50 CC32 4 Ethnic Finger Snap Tambourine Castanets Crash Cymb1 Snare Roll Concert Snr Concert Cym ConcertKick Jingle Bell Bell Tree Bar Chimes Wadaiko Wadaiko Rim Shimedaiko Atarigane Hyoushigi Ohkawa H kotsuzumi L Kot
213. ied Press the WRITE button its indicator flashes to confirm your settings and edit the data W Track Length This function allows you to modify the length num ber of bars beats and clocks of a pattern after recording Data that lie outside the range you decided to keep are discarded Obviously you only need to change the settings of the Mode whose length you want to modify Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Rhythm Composer programming your own rhythms There is no way to recall the previous version so be sure to save your rhythm before continuing see p 85 Division tra Length Bar DOL Length Beat DL Length Cpt Do Mode Major Parameter Track ADrums Acc6 ALL Division Intro 1 4 Main 154 Fill Dwn 153 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 7 1 number of beats per bar Length Beat 7 Setting Explanation Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the opera tion applies to all tracks Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Use the CURSOR VALUE dial and the ENTER SELECT button to set the length of the selected pattern s in steps of one bar You can also make an exist ing track longer by specifying a Bar value that lies beyond the last notes Specifies the beat posi tion The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signa ture This parameter allows you to fine tune the lengt
214. iginal Choose this if you want to use a USB driver down loaded from the Roland website www roland com This parameter selects the MIDI Set whose settings are loaded when the BK 5 is switched on Select Off if no MIDI Set should be recalled when the BK 5 is switched on This parameter allows you to cause the BK 5 to switch itself off after the selected number of minutes if you are not using it The default setting is 30 Select Off if you prefer not to use this function The values in paren theses indicate when the pop up count down appears This parameter allows vou to select the visual control mode The option to select depends on the mes sages supported by the external device MIDI Visual Control MVC or V LINK Shows the version number of the BK 5 s operating system Pedal Switch Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Global parameters The Pedal Switch setting is found on the display page that can be selected using MENU button gt Global gt Pedal Switch Global Onetouch Hold Lyrics Settings Utility Fedal Switch Language Latin Paos Performance Hold y Metronome video Settings hu Start Stopk CURSOR TD DEI If you do not change the factory setting the foot switch is assigned to the Start Stop function The following table shows the functions you can assign to the footswitch Function Start Stop Intro Ending Vari
215. imSht Studio Tom 4 Dixie HH Cls Studio Tom 3 Dixie HH Pdl Studio Tom 2 Dixie HH Opn Studio Tom 2 Studio Tom 1 Crash Cymbal Studio Tom 1 Rock RdCym1 Crash 1 Rek Dom R8 Tamb Rek Open VDrm Cowbell Rek Tek VDrm Cowbell Rek Trill Afro Feet 1 Slit Drum Afro Feet 2 Afro Clap Bendir 1 Bendir 2 Dawul Sagat Close Sagat Open VDrmCabasaUp VDrm Maracas VDrmCabasDwn AfroDrum Flm AfroDrum Op1 AfroDrum Op2 AfroDrum Rat VDrm Woodblk VDrm Woodblk TalkingDr Dn TalkingDr Up Doholla Dom Doholla Roll Doholla Sak Doholla Stop PC 101 CC32 4 IndoMix1 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 Kick 1 CR78 Kick 2 TR 606 Kick1 TR 707 Kick1 808 Kick TR 808 Kick 808 BassDrum TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909Comp Kick TR 909 Kick2 HipHop Kick2 BassDrumSet TechnoKick1 Dol4 Dance Snare1 GondangAlToba Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 MamboCowBell CowBell Claves Woodblock1 Dol2 Dol3 GonTaput4 GonTaput5 GonTaput6 Sticks Congas SW Congas SW2 Congas SW4 808 BassDrum TR 808 Kick 808 Rimshot 808 Snare 1 GdgTaputRim TR 808Snare2 808 Tom 2 TR 808HiHatC 808 Tom 2 808 HiHat Cl 808 Tom 2 TR 808HiHatO 808 Tom 2 808 Tom 2 808 Crash 808 Tom 2 606 Ride Cym ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym 808 Cowbell 909 Crash Vibraslap Ride Cymbal CR78 HiBongo CR78 LoBongo 808 Conga 808 Conga 808 Conga Timbal Hi Timbal Lo Agogo Agogo Cabasa 808 Maracas GongToba1 GongToba2 Short Guiro CR78 Guiro 808 Cla
216. ing Arranger playback are automati cally transposed to values inside the selected range Rather than specifying two note values you can also choose Std which means that the BK 5 decides automatically when extremely high or low notes need to be shifted down or up by one or several octaves Other edit operations The Micro Edit page allows you to select several func tions 001 01 000 CC 00 BankM8B 0 001 01 000 CC 32 Bank LSE d UOLOL DO PC Program Change 31 D01 01 000 CC 10 Panpot Gd des You can select several consecutive events and edit them in one go select the first event of a series press and hold the ENTER SELECT button and rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial 1 Select the event you want to edit 2 Press the MENU button its indicator flashes The display changes to Micro Edit 001 01 000 CC 00 Bank MSE Create Event Erase Event Move Event Copy Event Place Event CURSOR Ci DE The top line shows the event type that can be edited CCOO Bank MSB in our example and its location 001 01 000 You cannot change the event type on this page If you selected several events see above the display looks as follows Micro Edit Multiple Events Selected Create Event Erase Event Move Event Copy Event Place Event CURSOR To DE 3 Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the desired edit function then press the ENTER SELECT button Bac
217. is is a peaking filter Mid Gain 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected Mid fre quency Mid O 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 Use this parameter to 8 0 specify the width of the Mid Frequency band that you want to boost or cut Smaller values mean that neighboring frequen cies above below that value are also affected Low Freg 90 150 180 300 Allows you to set the 360 600Hz cutoff frequency of the low band this is a shelving filter Low Gain 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected Low fre quency 4 Press the EXIT button to leave the Eg Part Edit page Mfx The BK 5 contains one multi effects processor Mfx that can be used to process the desired key board part s Select Off for parts that don t need to be processed by this Mfx Parameter Setting Mfx Off On Expression Pedal Select Off if you don t need pedal expression for the selected part This means that the keyboard part in question no longer responds to an expression pedal vou may have connected to the SWITCH EXPRESSION socket Parameter Setting Expression Pedal Off On Pedal Exp Down Up The expression pedal allows you to control the vol ume of all parts by foot Up and Down refer to the volume that is used when the expression pedal is pressed Up highest volume or in the upright position Down lowest volume You do not need to specify
218. is capable of receiving on all channels 1 16 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Connecting a MIDI device Connecting the BK 5 to your computer If you use a USB cable commercially available to con nect the COMPUTER port located on the BK 5 s rear panel to the USB port of your computer you ll be able to do the following things e Use the BK 5 as a sound module e By transferring MIDI data between the BK 5 and your sequencer software you ll be able to enjoy a wide range of possibilities for music production and edit ing Use a standard USB cable A B type con nectors commercially available to connect the BK 5 to your computer as shown below Computer USB port Refer to the Roland website for system requirements Roland website http www roland com As an alternative you can connect the BK 5 s MIDI OUT and MIDI IN sockets to a MIDI interface and con nect the latter to your computer If the computer doesn t see the BK 5 Normally you don t need to install a driver in order to connect the BK 5 to your computer However if some problem occurs or if the performance is poor using the Roland original driver may solve the problem For details on downloading and installing the Roland original driver refer to the Roland website http www roland com Specify the USB driver you want to use and then install the driver For details refer to USB Driver on p 69 W Caution e To avoid the ris
219. it the data NI Erase Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Rhythm Composer programming your own rhythms Erase allows you to selectively delete data either within a specified range of measures beats or clocks or from the entire track s When Data Type is set to All Erase substitutes the required number of rests for the data you delete so that you end up with the equivalent number of blank measures If you also want to eliminate the measures themselves use Delete see below Parameter Track Mode Division From Bar From Beat From CPT Erase Mode Division From Bar From Beat From Cpt ToBar ToBeat Major Introl D 000 002 DL OO ADrums Acc6 ALL Major Minor 7th Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 1 last mea sure of the track or pat tern 1 number of beats per bar 0 119 Explanation Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the opera tion applies to all tracks Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Refers to the first mea sure to be edited By default the From value is set to the beginning of the selected track s Specifies the beat posi tion The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signa ture Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clo
220. k Real Time Commands A Ni All Sounds Off X 120 126 127 Reset All Controllers A 121 Aux Local On Off O 1 Song parts Messages All Notes Off X 123 125 Active Sensing O Reset X 2 Recognized as M 1 even if Mz 1 Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No 140 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Chord Intelligence Chord Intelligence ON RN NN INN a ur CM7 C M7 DM7 Eb M7 EM7 FM7 el BOLT ELAT AH LETT RIETI UE TAP CER PUTS MASALA C7 C 7 D7 Eb7 E7 F7 et BAY AA LT tft Let tr DY LETT EN Let Ly Cm C m Dm Eb m Em Fm 2031114107 PAA UBASAN tgp PREITY UE tg Cm7 C m7 Dm7 Eb m7 Em7 Fm7 TTT NN WT vetre RU Pr ti tr CmM7 C mM7 DmM7 Eb mM7 EmM7 FmM7 MARINE Cdim C dim Ddim Eb dim Edim Fdim ATTEN Er DOY Cea og EE LEE rr CEE MPP Let e e Cm7 b5 C m7 b5 Dm7 b5 Ebm7 b5 Em7 b5 Fm7 b5 Aia pb ba d d da d i ENE TAYA Caug C aug Daug Eb aug Eaug Faug 00709 pete TH Cea ete Pg UTP PUTT RL rr parong Csus4 C sus4 Dsus4 Eb sus4 Esus4 Fsus4 07144107 ete ON AAA AA ELEIT LE CE Pe IA raan C7sus4 C 7sus4 D7sus4 Eb 7sus4 E7sus4 F7sus4 TEN EE BAADA DA AI LA WA IE BAADA AA NALIA TE C7 13 C 7 13 D7 13 Eb 7 13 E7 13 F7 13 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Chord Intelligence aen Lai EVEN SAIDA MIA NE DUE POLE aam men a a Wi AG AETA ini sia F m7 b5 Gm7 b5 Abm7 b5 Am7 Bb m7 b5 Bm7 b5 POY LEYTE JALALA JKU m eu te Fe PETE F aug Gaug Abaug Aaug Bb au
221. k amp Roll 250 HU Roma kv 251 HU Twist 252 PL Brathanki 253 PL Dance Hit 254 PL Disco Polka 255 PL Dziew 6 8 256 PL GroovRock 257 PL Laendler 258 PL Polka 259 PL Swing 260 PL Tango 261 PL WiosnaDnc 262 SRB 7 8 263 SRB 9 8 264 SRB Dvojka 265 SRB Rumba 266 SRB Tamburasi 2 4 267 Deepchandi 268 Filmy Masti 269 Garba 270 Goa Masti 271 Gujrati Pop 272 Kaharva 273 Lavani Guddu 274 Marathi T13 CCOO CC32 27 41 27 32 27 42 27 30 27 28 27 29 27 33 27 34 27 3b 27 46 27 45 27 31 8 6 8 7 8 8 16 26 44 33 44 34 67 4 67 3 19 32 16 25 19 oi 17 50 50 84 50 86 50 87 5 33 16 20 16 19 16 15 16 16 50 82 50 85 20 11 20 10 16 18 17 48 Ip 53 16 54 16 55 16 56 16 57 16 58 16 59 16 60 16 61 16 62 16 63 Ip 64 16 65 16 66 16 67 16 68 16 b9 16 70 16 71 16 72 16 73 16 74 16 75 16 76 16 77 16 78 16 79 Ip 33 16 34 16 3b 16 36 16 37 16 38 16 39 16 40 Brazil Brazil Brazil Brazil Brazil Brazil Brazil Brazil Brazil Brazil Brazil Brazil East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe East Europe India India India
222. k of malfunction and or damage to external speakers always turn the volume all the way down and switch off the power on all devices before you make any connections e Only MIDI data can be transmitted and received via USB Audio data for a song recorded on the BK 5 cannot be transmitted or received e Switch on the power to the BK 5 before you start up the MIDI application on your computer Never turn the BK 5 s power on off while your MIDI application IS running 17 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Before you start using the BK 5 Ss Connecting a television set Video cable Commercially available BK 5 rear panel VIDEO OUTPUT Television Before you make connections to other devices you must turn down the volume of all devices and turn off their power to prevent malfunctions or damage to your speak CTS Switch off the BK 5 and the television set you ll be connecting Connect the BK 5 to your television set Use a video cable commercially available to connect the BK 5 s VIDEO OUTPUT jack to the television set Switch on the BK 5 see p 20 Switch on your television set As necessary Specify the television output format see p 67 Specify the aspect ratio for your television set The aspect ratio is the proportional relationship between the width and height of the screen See page 67 TI 3 Optional footswitch Connecting an optional footswitch hold pedal or expression pedal W Footswitch o
223. k x2 Stereo 1 4 phone type AUDIO INPUT jack Stereo miniature phone type AUDIO OUTPUT jacks L Mono R Mono 1 4 phone type USB ports USB COMPUTER connector Type A reception and transmission of MIDI data USB MEMORY Type B data storage devices MIDI connectors MIDI IN MIDI OUT Visual Control function VIDEO OUTPUT jack RCA type CVBS PAL or NTSC selectable Foot pedal jacks HOLD SWITCH EXPRESSION programmable General specifications Speakers 2x 10 cm Rated power output 2x 12 W RMW Power supply AC adaptor PSB 7U adaptor Power consumption 1100mA Auto Off function Off 10min 30min 240min Dimensions Without music rest 1044 W x 317 D x 129 H mm 41 1 8 W x 12 1 2 D x 5 1 8 H inches Including music rest 1044 W x 317 D x 301 H mm 41 1 8 W x 12 1 2 D x 11 7 8 H inches Weight 7 5 kg excluding AC adaptor and music rest 16 Ibs 9 oz excluding AC adaptor and music rest Supplied Accessories Owner s Manual PSB 7U AC adaptor Power cord for connecting the AC adaptor Music rest CD ROM Style Converter 4 0 USB driver Options USB USB flash memory M UF series Pedals DP series BOSS FS 5U foot switch Roland EV series expression pedal Note In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice Backing Keyboard BK 5 Specifications Style Converter 4 system requirements Operating system CPU clock
224. keup Tools MFX 84 types for keyboard parts selectable via Tone Part MFX A amp B for rhythm and SMF section selectable via Makeup Tools Parametric EQ 6 presets 1 User memory Multi band compressor 6 presets 1 User memory Rhythm section Rhythms 305 in 6 Rhythm families localized rhythms for specific areas are included in the WORLD 1 and WORLD 2 families Rhythm Composer Internal Rhythm Composer SMF to Rhythm Converter provided as PC application Win dows on the bundled CD ROM One Touch memories 4 programmable registrations per rhythm Rhythm Makeup Tools Instrument oriented editing Songs Real time player SMF Format 0 1 KAR mp3 WAV mp3 CDG Song chord extractor Automatic chord detection for SMF files SMF Makeup Tools Instrument oriented editing Performance Memories Performance Lists Unlimited number storage on USB memory Over 500 Music Assistant memories internal memory 5 Factory Song memories internal memory Performance memories per List Max 999 Search function Quick location of SMF audio and JPG files on the connected USB memory Demo Demo Yes Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Specifications Recording Media USB Flash memory Save format Audio files WAV 44 1 kHz 16 bit linear Video Lyrics SMF mp3 WAV mp3 CDG Slide shows Picture folder linked to songs recommended resolution 512 x 384 or 1024 x 768 pixels Panel controls Knob VOLUME Rotary encoder Data dial Connectors PHONES jac
225. keyboard see Sync Start Stop on p 28 While rhythm or SMF song playback is stopped the TAP TEMPO button flashes to indicate the selected tempo Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Using the One Touch function Using the One Touch function The ONE TOUCH memories help you select Tones for the real time parts that match the atmosphere of the cur rent rhythm There are four such ONE TOUCH memories per rhythm Select the desired rhythm See page 29 Press the EXIT button to return to the main page Switch on the ONE TOUCH button its indi cator lights If you haven t selected any ONE TOUCH memory since switching on the BK 5 the indicators of TONE buttons 1 2 3 and 4 flash Otherwise the BK 5 automatically recalls the last ONE TOUCH memory you selected The main page displays ONE TOUCH or the num ber of the last ONE TOUCH memory M 001 1 414 J 124 Kev oO RHYTHM 057 Broken Pane SHE TOUCH l TONE OCT MI AED rt oe Et GB ups G f cern Mrn Srt GE Lup anda pad With Si The indicators of TONE buttons 1 4 flash Press the flashing TONE button assigned to the desired ONE TOUCH memory 1 4 TONE PIANO ORGAN E GUITAR STRINGS SAX PAD PERCUSS E PIANO ACCORD BASS A GUITAR VOCAL BRASS SYNTH ETHNIC SFX DRUM The indicator of the button you press lights while the indicators of the remaining three buttons still flash Start playback of the rhythm See page
226. king Keyboard BK 5 Roland Editing individual rhythm events Micro Edit BM Create Event Select this function to add a new event to the selected track To Bar 001 To Beat Dl To Cpt 000 If the position for which you create a new event already contains other events the new event is added at the end of that group Parameter Setting Explanation Event Note Control Allows you to specify Change Pro the event type you gram Change want to add Pitch Bend Alteration Mode To Bar See page 88 Specifies the position To Beat where your new event To CPT will be inserted The selected event is inserted with a default value Note Note Number 60 C4 On Velocity 100 Gate Time 60 Program Change CCOO Bank Select MSB value 0 CC32 Bank Select LSB value 4 Program Change Number 1 The bank select messages are added automatically you don t have to worry about that Pitch Bend 0 Alteration Mode Nearest Limit Low Std Limit High Std Obviously you will then need to change the default settings depending on the result you want to achieve Press the WRITE button to confirm your settings and add the new event The BK 5 returns to the Micro Edit page W Erase Event This function allows you to remove one or several events without changing the positions of the remaining events Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the event you want to delete The selected event is displayed at the
227. l 0908 Fujara 0909 Quena 0910 NAY 0911 Shakuhachi 0912 Kawala 0913 Di 0914 TinWhistle1 0915 TinWhtsle Nm 0916 ShakuBamboo 0917 Arghool 0918 BaritoneShrt 0919 BaritoneLong 0920 Bangdi 0921 Bandi Grwl 0922 Bandi Grwl 0923 Bangdi 3 0924 Esraj amp Mizmar 0925 Hulusi 0926 Hulusi2 0927 Hulusi2 3 1 0928 Hls2 Sid Dw 0929 Hls2 Sid Up 0930 Hls2 VbMouth 0931 Hls2 3 Mono 0932 Hls2 Vb Mono 0933 Hls2 VbMouth 0934 Suona Grwl 0935 Suona Grwl 0936 Qudi 0937 Qudi 3 0938 Qudi Orn 0939 Qudi Orn 0940 Taj Mahal 0941 Xun 0942 Xun Orn 0943 Xun Orn 0944 Xiao 0945 Xiao Orn 0946 Xiao Orn 0947 Zhongruan 0948 Zhngruan Vib 0949 Zhngruan Vib 0950 Zhngruan Trm 0951 Zhngruan Trm 0952 Sacred Bells CCOO CC32 27 28 30 32 7 S DNA UA ON O sSIOT B Q N OO OO OO OO OO D OO D OD OO OD OO OO OO OO D Oo O OO OO OO D OD o o o BP BIR BR PPP PP BR MIN NN NN P OO E PR BR P NN E PR RR HR RRR BR BRR BR RR BRA RAR PC 102 102 102 102 89 97 105 106 106 107 109 109 110 110 111 112 106 106 16 16 16 16 16 16 11 14 72 72 76 76 76 76 73 78 76 73 76 76 78 73 68 68 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 78 78 78 78 78 78 78 78 78 78 78 25 25 25 25 25 11 No Name 0953 BonangGamSRX 0954 BelAngk SRX 0955 BsKalimbaSRX 0956 Kane SRX 0957 Reyong SRX 0958 VelAfro SRX2 0959 Yang Qin 0960 Yanggin 0961 Yanggin 3 0962 Yangin Hrd 0963 Yangin Trm 0964
228. l HiHat Lite Tom 4 Brs HiHatOpn Lite Tom 4 Lite Tom 4 Brush Crash Lite Tom 4 Ride Cym IN ChinaCymbal Brush RideBL Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell 125 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Drum Sets 84 PCA CC32 4 New Pop C6 Bell Tree Ae TR Castanets 86 Get SI Open Surdo 88 89 91 95 96 D6 Mute Surdo E6 Cana F6 Timbal HiFlm lee RM Timbal LoFIm G6 NewTmbIPHS LPA Ct NewShekere1 93 A6 NewShekere2 SEW NHBngoMute B6 LBongoMute C7 CajonHi TANO YAN CajonHiFIm 98 D7 Cajon Low SES OR CajonLoFlm 100 101 103 ut Wert 7A MamboCowBell 105 A7 PopSnareDrag osa TY HiHatPhrase3 107 B7 CrashPhrasel 108 C8 CrashPhrase2 Uc fe 7398 CrashPhrase3 110 D8 CrashPhrase4 het 7 8 CrashPhrase5 112 113 NEW CR RidePhrase2 115 G8 RidePhrase3 slew et 7398 RidePhrase4 117 A8 RidePhrase5 E7 FlmncoHClap1 F7 FlmncoHClap1 UE A BongoCowBell G7 PopSnareFl E8 Crash Stop F8 RidePhrasel ERWISEN RidePhrase1 119 B8 RidePhrase2 120 C9 RidePhrase4 PAS ChinaRoll 122 D9 ChinaStopped 123 D 9 Egg S4 124 125 E9 EggS1 F9 Egg AllEndOff EMS CR Tambour E
229. l Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2 St Snare2 St Snare1 Std 1 Snare1 Std 1 Snare2 Std 2 Snare1 Std 2 Snare2 Tight Snare StandrdSnar1 LD Snare M LD Snare C Jazz Snare 1 Jazz Snare 2 Room Snare 1 Room Snare 2 Dance Snare1 Power Snare1 Rev Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare Elec Snare 3 TR 707 Snare 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 Rap Snare JungleSnare1 House Snare House Snare House Snare PC 13 CC32 4 Room L R Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2 Rm Kick 1 Rm Kick 2 Crash Cymb1 Rm Snare 2 Ride Cymbal Rm Snare 1 Room Tom 5 Closed HiHat Room Tom 2 Ride Bell Room Tom 2 R8OpenHiHat2 Rm Kick P Rm Kick2 P JzCrashCym1P Rm Snare2 P Ride Cymbal Rm Snare1 P Room Tom 5 P Rm HiHatClsP Room Tom 2 P Ridbl cP Room Tom 2 P Rm HiHatOpnP PC10 CC32 4 Hip Hop Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Small Club Rap Snare Power Snare2 Noise Slap St Snare1 St Snare2 Rm Snare 1 Rm Snare 2 Dance Snare Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare Elec Snare 3 66 Snare 260 TR 707 Snare 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR 808Snare2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR 909Snare2 Rap Snare JungleSnare1 House Snare House Snare House Snare Voice Tah Noise Slap d C 1 PC 11 CC32 4
230. l change is the so called LSB bank se lect message Use the PC parameter to change the address a k a program change number of a sound e g from 1 to 2 IG Press the WRITE button its indicator flashes to confirm your settings and edit the data WE Shift Clock Shift Clock Mode Major Division Introl From Bar DOL Fram Beat DL From Cpt DOD To Bar 001 ToBeat OL a Shift Clock allows you to shift the notes within the selected From To range It can be used for two things To correct slow notes due to a slow er attack You may want to use Shift Clock after assigning a sound to a track that has a considerably slower attack than the sound you used for recording the part in question This technique is frequently used in pop music to time 1 16 note string arpeggios played with a slow pad sound Rather than have the notes begin at the mathematically correct time e g 2 1 0 you could shift them to the left e g to 1 4 115 so that the peak volume of the attack is reached on the next beat Shift 5 timing sounds OK Original positions slow attack tim ing seems off bedi ay bici D Ai To correct the timing of notes recorded via MIDI without quantizing them You can use external sequences as raw material for your songs Recording such excerpts via MIDI may cause a slight delay e g 5 CPT If that is not accept able use Shift Clock to push the
231. la1 Rim2 Cowbell Doholla 1 Sak Dof 2 Dom Dof 1 Rim 1 Dof 1 Dom Dof 1 Sak 1 Dof 1 Rim 2 Dof 1 Sak 2 Tabla 1 Tak 1 Tabla 1 Tak 2 Tabla Roll Tabla 1 Dom Tabla FX Tabla 1 Tak 3 Tabla 1 Sak Tabla 1 Rim Rek Trill Rek 1 Sak Rek 1 Tak 1 Rek 1 Rim Rek 1 Dom Rek 1 Tak 2 Rek 1 Brass Rek 1 Tak 3 Rek 1 Roll Rek 1 Khana Closed Tabl Noueri Rim Rek 1 Khana Open 84 C6 TablaBayasld Ge HM TablaBayaTin 86 D6 TablaBayaTun Ce ZO Udu Poti Acc 88 89 PC 14 CC32 5 India Menu E6 Udu Pot Hi F6 Udu Pot Lo SO E Udu Pot Slp 91 G6 UduPot2Ing SEKR Udu Pot2 Mut 93 A6 Udu Pot2 Sht 94 Bb6 95 Bo 96 C7 97 C 7 98 D7 99 D 7 100 E7 101 F7 102 FH KS 103 G7 104 G 7 105 A7 106 Bb7 107 B7 108 C8 109 C 8 110 D8 111 D 8 112 E8 113 F8 114 FHS Ss 115 G8 116 G 8 117 A8 118 Bb8 119 B8 120 C9 121 C 9 122 D9 123 D 9 124 E9 125 F9 126 F 9 127 G9 PC 11 CC32 5 IndiaDrmKit Udu Pot2 Mut Udu Pot2 Sht Udu Pot MENU 118 TablaByP TablaBY 3 Tablah 1 Tablah 2 Tablah 3 Tablah 4 TablaBY 1 TablaBY 2 Tablah Bend Metronome 2 R8 Click Metronome 1 PC 12 CC32 5 MidEastDrKit Doholla Tak Doira Dun Doira Tik Sarna Bell Sitar Gliss ZaghrutaStop Yoh Tribe How Tribe 92 DholakPh 120 Dhol Ph African Ens Morocco Ens Metronome 2 R8 Click Metronome 1 PC 101 CC32 4 IndoMix1 Open Surdo Small Club CR7
232. le LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell PC 1 CC32 4 Standard 1 Std 1 Kick1 Std 1 Kick2 Std 2 Kick1 Std2 Kick2 Kick 1 Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Room Kick 1 Room Kick 2 Power Kick1 Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 TR 808 Kick TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 Voice One Voice Two Voice Three Rm Kick 1 Rm Kick 2 MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell St Kick 1 St Kick 2 Side Stick St Snare2 909 HandClap St Snare1 Real Tom 6 Close HiHat2 Real Tom 6 Pedal HiHat2 Real Tom 4 Open HiHat2 Real Tom 4 Real Tom 1 Crash Cymb1 Real Tom 1 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell PC 2 CC32 4 Standard 2 Std 1 Kick1 Std 1 Kick2 Std 2 Kick1 Std2 Kick2 Kick 1 Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Room Kick 1 Room Kick 2 Power Kick1 Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 TR 808 Kick TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 Voice One Voice Two Voice Three MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snar
233. ledged delay effect that the ENTER SELECT button can be used instead of a chorus or flanger As you will see there are a lot of parameters you can program ShortDlyFb This is a short delay with many repeats Reverb Level amp Chorus Level These parameters allow you to modify the output level of the Reverb or Chorus processor Rhythm Volume Song Volume This parameter allows you to set the overall volume of the selected rhythm or song if you think it is too loud soft Rhythm Tempo Song Tempo Allows you to change the rhythm s or song s tempo J 20 250 Key This parameter allows you to transpose all song parts except the drums up to 12 semitones 1 octave up or down This value is written to the song data and used every time you play back this song This parameter is not available for rhythms Undo Changes Select this entry to cancel all Rhythm SMF Makeup Tools settings you have made and to revert to the previously saved version If you are satisfied with your changes and wish to preserve them save your rhythm song to the USB memory ma d The MENU button s indicator flashes Press the MENU button to jump to the location where the instrument is used Playback starts automatically from that point Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the parameter you wish to edit then press the ENTER SELECT button Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options If you select a Drum Set in step 1 above the parame
234. ll events selected in this way appear on a gray back ground Select the Copy Event function Press the ENTER SELECT button Each new selection will replace the previous one Use the Place Event function to specify where you want to insert the copied event s TO Mi Place Event This function is only available if the Rhythm Com poser s clipboard already contains events that you copied using Copy Event Select the Place Event function Set To Bar To Beat and To CPT Parameter Setting Explanation To Bar See page 88 Specifies the position To Beat where the first event To CPT you copied should be inserted Press the WRITE button to confirm your settings and paste the new event s Events inserted with Place Event are added to any events that may already exist in that area Existing events are not pushed towards the end of the track MIDI parameters This section discusses the BK 5 s MIDI parameters and the associated memories called MIDI Sets WE What s MIDI MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Inter face It is a universal standard that allows perfor mance data to be exchanged among electronic musi cal instruments and computers The BK 5 provides a MIDI IN and MIDI OUT socket so that performance data can be received from other MIDI instruments It is also equipped with a COMPUTER port USB that can receive and transmit MIDI data from a computer The MIDI
235. lows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 66 setting to the two Upper parts Scale Lower Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 66 setting to the two Upper parts Up2 Allows you to switch the Upper2 part on and off Perf Next Allows you to select the next or pre Pert Prey vious Performance Portamento Pressing the footswitch activates the Portamento Time setting When the footswitch is released the Por tamento Time setting is not used To hear this effect you need to set a Portamento Time value see p 59 Hold The assigned footswitch can be used Soft as a Soft Sostenuto or Sustain Hold Sostenuto pedal Lower Hold The footswitch is assigned to the Lower Hold function see p 62 Track Mute Same function as the TRACK MUTE button AudioXfade The footswitch can be used to acti vate a crossfade between two files To make this work select a different song while the current song is being played back and press the foot switch The BK 5 creates a brief blend between the current and the next song This function is only available between two audio songs Fade Out This function gradually decreases the volume until it reaches zero At that time song or rhythm playback stops automatically Melody Intelligent Allows you to control the Switch parameter of the Melody Intelli gent function see p 64 MFX On Off Allows you to switch the MFX for the keyboard parts on and o
236. lso applies to rhythm selection Each rhythm has a preset tempo value that is recalled when you select it While the tempo setting is locked the tempo no longer changes when you select a different rhythm The Save Global parameter page 70 also saves the lock and hence the Performance Hold settings Whenever you switch a lock function on or off the dis play briefly informs you about this MooLi 414 JJ 130 CT RHYTHM 057 Broken Dance ONE TOUCH Tone RHYTHM IO a TEMPO 5 ra E TONE D TONE OCT ERR blanc GH Upa 0037 MIDI EPiano O Lu WII Attack Pad CON The Upper part no longer changes Tones 54 M 0011 414 JJ 130 KEYO RHYTHM 057 Broken Dance ONE TOUCH Tone RHYTHM D A TEMPO DI o E TOME TOME OCT PA 1 aturalPiano CO urz 0087 MIDI EPianaz CO Lun OE attack Pad CN The Upper part will change Tones when you select a different Perfor mance memory O The lock status of the functions that provide this protec tion is also displayed on the main page M 001 1 414 J 130 CT RHYTHM Broken Dance ONE TOUCH RHYTHM a C Maj TEMPO D a ga Darr POLAR re TONE OCT WS anni yaturalPiano CON ure IN ii CO Lup 073808 attack Pad CO Switching the locks on and off In the example shown here you will learn how to exclude rhythm changes from Performance selections The same procedure albeit with different buttons also applies to the tempo press and hold TAP
237. meter Setting Vibrato Rate 12744127 Vibrato Depth T This parameter adjusts the intensity of the pitch modulation Positive settings mean that the wobble becomes more prominent while negative settings make it shallower Parameter Setting 12 5 127 Vibrato Depth Vibrato Delay T This parameter adjusts the time required for the vibrato effect to begin Positive settings increase the time before vibrato will begin and negative set tings shorten the time Parameter Setting Vibrato Delay 12754127 Mfx The BK 5 contains 2 multi effects processors MF one reverb processor and one chorus processor that can be used to process rhythms or Standard MIDI Files Select Off for instruments that don t need to be processed by any Mf Parameter Setting Mfx Off A B If you select A or B additional parameters can be edited see below Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options Mfx Type Allows you to select the desired Mfx type i e the kind of effect you need Each Mfx DAT and B can be assigned to as many instruments as you like Be aware however that selecting a different type will affect all instruments that use this Mfx processor See page 60 for a list of the available Mfx types Each Mfx can be assigned to as many instruments as you like Be aware however that selecting a different type will affect all instruments that use this Mfx processor While the Mfx pa
238. mission and reception of the real time and rhythm parts E User1 8 The BK 5 also allows you to store and recall 8 differ ent MIDI configurations Loading a MIDI Set only changes the MIDI settings and has no effect on the remaining parameters Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the MIDI Set field Edit Tone Parts Edit Song Parts Edit System Press the ENTER SELECT button to edit the MIDI Set field The MIDI Set field is now displayed in reverse Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the MIDI Set you want to load The BK 5 loads the selected MIDI Set Press the ENTER SELECT button if you want to edit other parameters on this page 105 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options 1 Edit Rhythm Parts The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using MENU button gt MIDI gt Edit Rhythm Parts Edit Rhythm Parts Tx On Tx Ch 10 Ta Shift O Tx Local On Tx Event Ra Cin Rx ch 10 SF CURSOR Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the part you want to edit ADrum ABass Acc1 Acc2 Acc3 Acc4 Acc5 Acc6 The display now shows the settings for the selected part Tx Select On if you want the selected part to transmit MIDI data Parameter Setting Tx Off On Tx Ch Allows you to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the selected part Parameter Setting Tx Ch 1216 Tx Shift This parameter allows you to transpose the note m
239. n are given like this p The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display Note however that your unit may incorporate a newer enhanced version of the system e g include newer sounds so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual Before using this instrument carefully read Using the unit safely on p 4 and Important notes on p 6 Those sections provide information concerning the proper operation of the BK 5 Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit the manual should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference Copyright 2011 ROLAND EUROPE All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of Roland Europe S p a Roland and GS are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Roland Corporation in the United States and or other countries A CAUTION Backing Keyboard BK 5 USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About AY WARNING and Z CAUTION Notices Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe NWARNING injury should the unit be used improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or ma
240. name Delete or Search If you press MENU while an empty folder is selected the message No item selected is displayed to alert you to the fact that you cannot make any changes Press the ENTER SELECT button to call up the following display page i Performances Delete Insert Ais DA E EI EA EI EI A abc def ghi Hold Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the desired character then use the TONE buttons You can press the NUMERIC button to switch between upper and lower case characters as well as numbers The LWR button can be used to delete the selected character The UP2 button allows you to insert a character Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the next character position you want to change then use the TONE buttons again Repeat steps 5 and 6 above to complete the name Press the flashing WRITE button to con firm Delete Files or folders on the connected USB memory that you no longer need can be deleted as follows Connect an optional USB memory to the BK 5 After a few seconds the display shows the contents of the USB memory USE Memor DODO L I a IC I bi K Press the USB MEMORY button if you inserted the USB memory at an earlier stage and now want to return to this display page 2 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the file or folder you want to delete 3 Press the MENU button If you press MENU while an empty folder is selected th
241. nce Snare2 LERE Elec Snare 2 110 D8 Flec Snare hee DY 738m Elec Snare 3 112 ES 113 F8 66 Snare 260 TR 707 Snare ENSCH 808 Snare 1 115 G8 808 Snare 2 Nic CE TR 808Snare2 117 A8 909 Snare 1 RES 009 Snare 2 119 B8 120 C9 909 SD 1 TR 909Snare2 PANE Rap Snare 122 D9 JungleSnare1 eee DES House Snare 124 E9 125 F9 House Snare House Snare EIS CR Voice Tah 127 G9 Noise Slap i 3 O PC12 CC32 4 Techno Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2 Dance Snare1 Elec Snare 2 Dance Snare1 House Snare Rap Snare House Snare Dance Snare1 Rap Snare Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare1 Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare Elec Snare 3 66 Snare 260 TR 707 Snare 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR 808Snare2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR 909Snare2 Rap Snare JungleSnare1 House Snare House Snare House Snare Voice Tah Noise Slap PC14 CC32 4 House Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2 66 Snare 260 Dance Snare 909 SD 1 Dance Snare Dance Snare Rap Snare House Snare House Snare Techno Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare Elec Snare 3 66 Snare 260 TR 707 Snare 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR 808Snare2 909 Snare 1 909
242. nctions For general applications any rhythm division pro ceed as follows e Assign the Arr Rit or Arr Acc function to an optional footswitch see p 70 e Press the START STOP button to start rhythm play back e Press the assigned footswitch 64 Melody Intelligent parameters This function group can be selected using MENU but ton gt Performance Edit gt Melody Intelligent or by pressing and holding the MELODY INTELL button Melody Intelligent Switch Off Type 16 Waltz Organ 2nd Tone Trem Organ Intell Threshold o Level 100 Expression Pedal Dn Hold Pedal Auto re jede The following parameters are available Switch Select On if you want to add a MELODY INTELL part This part is triggered by the chord recognition of the BK 5 s Arranger and plays automatic harmonies that are added to the melody that you are playing using the UP1 part You can choose from among 18 har mony types see below Parameter Setting Switch Off On This Switch parameter can also be assigned to an optional footswitch see p 69 Type Allows you to select one of the 18 harmony types Parameter Setting 1 Duet 2 Organ 3 Combo 4 Strings 5 Choir 6 Block 7 Big Band 8 Country 9 Traditional 10 Brodway 11 Gospel 12 Romance 13 Latin 14 Country Guitar 15 Country Ballad 16 Waltz Organ 17 0ctave Type1 18 Octave Type2 Type 2nd Tone Depending on the selected Type setti
243. nding 127 G9 Tambour Free 126 PC 18 CC32 4 New Rock Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana Timbal HiFlm Timbal LoFIm Timbal PHS Shekere1 Shekere2 Bongo Mute L BongoMute CajonHi CajonHiFlm Cajon Low CajonLoFlm FImncoHClap1 FImncoHClap1 BongoCowBell RockSnareFl_H MamboCowBell Snare Ghost HiHatPhrase3 Crash2Phrase4 Crash1Phrase3 Crash1Phrase4 CrashPhrase4 CrashPhrase5 RidePhrase1 RidePhrase2 RidePhrase3 RidePhrase4 RidePhrase5 BrushRidePhrase4 Crash1Phrase1 ChinaStopped Crash1StopLong Crash2StopLong ChinaRoll Egg EndOff CembaloEnding CembaloFree PC 45 CC32 4 New BrushPop Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana Timbal HiFlm Timbal LoFlm Timbal PHS Shekere1 Shekere2 Bongo Mute L BongoMute CajonHi CajonHiFlm Cajon Low CajonLoFIm FImncoHClap1 FImncoHClap1 BongoCowBell BrushSnare Shot MamboCowBell Phrase3 Phrase1 RidePhrase1 RidePhrase2 RidePhrase4 CrashPhrase4 CrashPhrase5 SnareBrushFlam RidePhrase1 RidePhrase2 RidePhrase3 RidePhrase4 RidePhrase5 Cascade_Ending Crotals DoorKeys Egg S4 Egg S1 Egg EndOft CembaloEnding CembaloFree PC 8 CC32 4 New Folk Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana Timbal HiFlm Timbal LoFlm Timbal PHS Shekere1 Shekere2 Bongo Mute L BongoMute CajonHi CajonHiFlm Cajon Low CajonLoFlm Flmnco Clap1 Flmnco Clap1 BongoCowBell PopSnareFl_L MamboCowBell FolkSnrFlam2 FolkSnrShot1 FolkSnrShot2 SmallSn
244. nes via MIDI Be aware however that if the BK 5 receives a sound select cluster bank select program change message for which there is no Tone the display shows instead of a Tone name and the real time part in question no longer sounds Packinn Keyboard BK 5 Roland Selecting Tones for the real time parts Using the Numeric function to select Tones Rhythms and Performances The Numeric function can be used to enter the number of the Tone Rhythm or Performance memory you want to use which is faster than scrolling with the CURSOR VALUE dial This function is automatically activated when you call up a display or mode where using it makes sense Below please find an example that shows you how to use the Numeric function for selecting Tones For Tone selection it would be a good idea to check on the main page which real time part is currently selected to ensure that you don t select a Tone for the wrong part To select a different Tone for the Upper2 or Lower part you can simply press and hold the UP2 and LWR button while using the following procedure In the following example we will assign a different sound to the Upper1 part M 001 1 414 124 Kev oO RHYTHM 057 Broken Dance ONE TOUCH C Maj RHYTHM Di TEMPO Ge TTA EE TONE OCT WS AIP riu CD pa BS MIDI EPianoz OD ur OSE Attack Pad MD Press the button of the Tone family that contains the Tone you want to select PIANO E
245. ng a second harmony is added to the Melody Intelligent part If vou like you can select the desired Tone for the sec ond harmony voice using this parameter Parameter Setting 2nd The Tone of the selected family Intell Threshold This value represents the lowest velocity value between 0 and 127 of the UP1 part that triggers the Melody Intelligent part If you don t need this switching function select 0 Parameter Setting Intell Threshold 00127 Level Allows you to set the level of the Melody Intelligent part to ensure that the harmonies blend in with the rest Parameter Setting Level 00127 Expression Pedal This parameter allows you to specify whether or not the Melody Intelligent part should respond to movements of the optional expression pedal you connected and change its volume accordingly Parameter Setting Expression Pedal Off On Hold Pedal This parameter allows you to specify whether or not the Melody Intelligent part s notes can be held with the footswitch connected to the PEDAL HOLD socket Parameter Setting Hold Pedal Auto On Off See page 43 Save As Default This function allows you to save the current Perfor mance Edit settings as default settings These set tings are loaded each time you switch on the BK 5 Performance Edit Save Performance Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select YES then press the ENTER SELECT but t
246. ng parameters Parameter Setting Explanation Level 0 127 Use this parameter to set the compressor s input level The higher the value the stronger the three frequency bands are compressed The value you set here is added to the Level settings of the three bands Do not set this parameter to 0 if the compressor is switched on because doing so means that the keyboard parts the SMF song or Rhythm parts are no longer audible Gain 1250 Use this parameter to cor 12dB rect the level at the com pressor s outputs If the settings of the remaining parameters lead to a signifi cantly lower level select a positive value If your set tings lead to a significantly higher level select a nega tive value 0 means that the level is neither boosted nor attenuated High Mid Low Because Attack Release Threshold Ratio and Level are the same for each band we will only discuss them once As you see each of the three fre quency ranges has its own set of parameters that allow you to specify their behavior Attack O 100ms Use this parameter to spec ify how fast the compressor of the band in question should start processing the signal once the level of that band exceeds the Thresh old level Choose a smaller value if you prefer a com pression similar to that of FM radio stations Higher values may yield a snap pier or funkier sound Release This parameter allows you to specify how fast t
247. nge the instru ments used in the rhythm or song and their parameters See page 75 Freeze Data Select this entry to burn your new set tings into the file Doing so will allow you to use your new version with any sequencer software or compatible Roland arranger instrument See page 79 Save Select this entry to save your song or rhythm with the Makeup Tools settings you have made See page 80 Common To edit the Common parameters use MENU button gt Makeup Tools gt Common Common CURSOR CU DES The Common parameters on this page apply to the entire song or rhythm Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the desired Common parameter then press the ENTER SELECT button The following parameters are available Reverb Type This parameter allows you to specify what kind of reverb effect you need The available reverb types are Setting Meaning Original This setting means that the song uses its own programmed reverb settings Room1 These types simulate the reverb characteris Room2 tics of a room The higher the number 1 2 or Room3 3 the bigger the room becomes Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Makeup Tools rhythms and SMF Sengen See Saving your new rhythm or song SMF version on p 80 Hall1 These types simulate the reverb of a small 1 Hall2 or large 2 concert hall and thus sound much bigger than the Room types above The changes you make using
248. ngo Lo Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo PC 119 CC32 4 Greek 2 Rek Trill Rek 1 Sak L Rek Tak 1 Rek 1 Rim L Rek Dom L Rek Tak 2 Rek 1 Brass L Rek Tak 3 Rek 1 Roll Rek 1 Khan A TablaNurRim1 Rek 1 Khan B Sagat Mid TablaNurDom1 Sagat Hi TablaNurTak1 Sagat Sak Hager 1 Zir 1 Nakrazhan 1 ZaghroutaSm1 Nakrazhan 2 ZaghroutaEd1 ZaghroutaSm2 ZaghroutaEd2 TR 707 BD TR 909 BD2 Mix Kick 82RmBsDrum1 82StSnare1 82JzSnare1 House SD Rev Snare PC 57 CC32 4 SFX Bubble Kitty Bird 2 Growl Applause 2 Telephone 1 Telephone 2 Small Club Small Club 2 ApplauseWave Eruption Big Shot Perc Bang Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Drum Sets 137 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Specifications 21 Specifications Display type Display Graphic LCD 160 x 160 dots backlit Keyboard Keyboard 61 velocity sensitive keys Sound Source Max Polyphony 128 voices GM2 GS XG Lite compatible Sounds 1 172 tones 60 Drum Sets Multitimbral parts 3 keyboard parts UP1 UP2 LWR 16 song parts Master Tuning 415 3 466 2 Hz Key Control Transpose 6 5 in semitones for audio MIDI data Tempo change 20 250 BPM for SMF and rhythms 7512500 for mp3 and WAV files Part mute functions TRACK MUTE Rhythms SMF CENTER CANCEL mp3 WAV AUDIO INPUT signals Effects keyboard parts UP1 UP2 LWR Reverb 8 types selectable via Makeup Tools Rhythms SMF section Chorus 8 types selectable via Ma
249. nt voltage so their use could result in damage malfunction or electric shock e Use only the supplied power supply cord Also the sup plied power cord must not be used with any other device e Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards About the Symbols The AA symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the unit must never be disassembled The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING phones or speakers may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volum
250. o 4 Congas SW Congas 7 Congas 8 Timbal Hi Timbal Lo Agogo Agogo Shaker2 Shaker1 ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Quide1 Quide2 Claves Woodblock1 Woodblock2 Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell AfricanCowBell Kick Plastic Kick Plastic Snare Snare SnareFlam Snare FloorTomFlam Jazz Hati FloorTom Jazz Hat2 Tom2Flam Jazz Hat3 Tom2 Tom1Flam JazzCrCym1 PopBrushTom1 NewJzRide1 BrushCrash2 Jazz Ride2 CembaloFree BrushCrash1 CowBell JzCrashCym1 vibraslp RockRide1 Bongo_SW Bongo1_4 Congas_SW Congas_7 Congas_8 Timbal Hi Timbal Lo Agogo Agogo Shaker2 Shaker1 ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Quide1 Quide2 Claves Woodblock1 Woodblock2 Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Snare Roll 1 JazzKick JazzKick NewJzSW1 NewJzSn1 NewJzSW2 NewJzSn2 NewJzTomLoFl JazzHiHat1 NewJzTomLo JazzHiHat2 Jazz Tom MFI JazzHiHat3 RockTomMid NewJzTomHiFI CrachCymbal1 NewJzTomHi JazzRide1 CrachCymbal2 JazzRide2 Tambourine Splash Cym ChaChaCowb CrachCymbal1 Vibraslap RockRideCym1 NewHiBongo NewLoBongo NewCongaSlp NewCongaOp NewLoConga Timbal Hi Timbal Lo Agogo Agogo NewShaker2 NewShaker1 ShrtWhistle LongWhistle NewQuide1 NewQuide2 NewClaves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell PC41 CC32 4 Brush Std 1 Kick Std 1 Kick2 Std 2 Kick1 Std2 Kick2 Kick 1 Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Room Kick
251. o select the Format USB Device entry then press the ENTER SELECT button CM Alldata on USE dewice say will be deleted Continue A Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select YES then press the ENTER SELECT but ton to format the USB memory A confirmation message informs you that the USB memory has been formatted Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options MI The following folders are created on the USB memory Name My Performances My Recordings My Songs My Rhythms Value This folder is used to save Perfor mance Lists The contents of this folder cannot be viewed by pressing the USB MEMORY button You need to press the PERFORMANCE LIST button gain access to the files it con tains The contents can be viewed on a computer however This folder is used to store your audio recordings see p 52 This folder can be used to save SMF songs you edited with the Makeup Tools functions see p 74 This folder can be used to save rhythms you edited with the Makeup Tools or Rhythm Composer func tions see p 74 We recommend copying the contents of your USB memory to your computer before formatting it 12 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Visual Control function 16 Visual Control function The BK 5 has a powerful interface for realtime audio and video integration Visual Control is a function that allows music and images to be performed together When MIDI Visual Control or
252. oard part in octave steps Parameter Setting Octave Shift Ae LA Coarse Tune Changes the pitch of the selected keyboard part in semi tone steps Parameter Setting Coarse Tune 24504424 Fine Tune Changes the pitch of the selected part in steps of 1 cent 1 100 semi tone Parameter Setting Fine Tune 100 0 100 Portamento Mode You can set the selected part to mono phonic mode Mono means that you can only play one note at a time You could select this mode to play a trumpet or woodwind part in a more natural way Poly on the other hand means that you can play chords using the selected part Parameter Setting Portamento Mode Poly Mono Portamento Time Portamento means that the pitch doesn t change in clearly defined steps it produces glides from one note to the next Use the this parameter to specify the speed at which those glides are carried out The higher the value the slower the transitions Parameter Setting Portamento Time 0 127 Bender Assign This parameter allows you to specify for each key board part how it should respond to Pitch Bend mes sages Parameter Setting Bender Assign Auto On Off Auto The keyboard part only responds to left right movements of the BENDER MODULATION lever when no split setting causes it to be to the left of other keyboard parts In other words parts you can play with your left hand after selecting a split no longer respond
253. oduct must be collected separately from household waste as defined in each region Products bearing this symbol must not be discarded together with household waste Dieses Symbol bedeutet dass dieses Produkt in EU Landern getrennt vom Hausm ll gesammelt werden muss gem den regionalen Bestimmungen Mit diesem Symbol gekennzeichnete Produkte diirfen nicht zusammen mit den Hausmiill entsorgt werden Ce symbole indique que dans les pays de l Union europ enne ce produit doit tre collect s par ment des ordures m nag res selon les directives en vigueur dans chacun de ces pays Les produits portant ce symbole ne doivent pas tre mis au rebut avec les ordures m nag res Questo simbolo indica che nei paesi della Comunit europea questo prodotto deve essere smaltito separatamente dai normali rifiuti domestici secondo la legislazione in vigore in ciascun paese I prodotti che riportano questo simbolo non devono essere smaltiti insieme ai rifiuti domestici Ai sensi dell art 13 del D Lgs 25 luglio 2005 n 151 Este simbolo indica que en los paises de la Union Europea este producto debe recogerse aparte de los residuos dom sticos tal como est regulado en cada zona Los productos con este simbolo no se deben depositar con los residuos dom sticos Este simbolo indica que nos paises da UE a recolha deste produto dever ser feita separadamente do liko dom stico de acordo com os regulamentos de cada regi o Os produtos que apres
254. oftClarinet 0600 Clarinet 0601 Bs Clarinet 0602 Oboe 0603 Oboe Exp 0604 English Horn 0605 Bassoon 0606 BottleBlow 1 0607 BottleBlow2 0608 The Bottle 0609 Pan Flute1 0610 Pan Flute2 0611 Whistle 1 0612 Whistle 2 0613 TinWhistle2 0614 Multi Wind 0615 Quad Wind 0616 Recorder 0617 Ocarina 0618 Pipe amp Reed Synth 0619 Big Lead 0620 OB Saw 0621 LM Square 0622 CC Solo 0623 Twin Sine 0624 Dual Sqr amp Saw 0625 Velo Lead 0626 MG Square 0627 Hollow Mini 0628 Phenomena 0629 Saw Wave 0630 Unison Saws 0631 Poly Saws 0632 SuperSaws 0633 Poly Key 0634 80 s PolySyn 0635 Super Poly 0636 Polysynth 1 0637 Polysynth 2 0638 OB Stab 0639 Unison SawLd 0640 MG SawLead 2 0641 TB Lead 0642 Fat GR Lead 0643 D 50 Fantasy 0644 Atmosphere 0645 Ice Rain 0646 Syn Calliope 0647 Big amp Raw 0648 P5 Sync Lead 0649 Acid Guitar 0650 D 50 Fat Saw 0651 Euro Dance 2 0652 OB DoubleSaw 0653 Rock Lead CCO 26 17 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Tone List D CC32 PC 57 62 60 60 60 60 60 60 57 74 74 74 74 74 73 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 69 69 70 71 77 77 77 76 76 79 79 76 72 72 75 80 74 RRR E E RR RR RR RR E E E E BRR RN NY KR Fb RRR E E BR E E E E E BR E E Ex 82 82 81 81 81 81 82 81 81 87 82 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 101 84 82 84 85 89 100 97 83 88 85 85 82 88 82 85 RRR RR RR RRR RR RR RRR RR RR RR RR RRR RR RRR BR Ex N Backing Keyboard BK 5 Tone Lis
255. ogo Agogo Shaker2 Shaker1 ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Quide1 Quide2 Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell PC 8 CC32 4 New Folk Brasil Tamburin Marches Tamburin Tamorra 1 Tamorra 2 Tamorra 3 Tamorra 4 Tamorra 6 Tamorra 7 Tamorra 8 Tamorra Ending Pandeiro 1 Pandeiro 2 Pandeiro 3 Pandeiro 4 Pandeiro 5 Pandeiro 6 BeguineLoop3 BeguineLoop2 BeguineLoop1 JazzSnare2 JazzzSnare1 R amp B Snare RockSnare2_2 RockSnare1_2 PopSnare38 2 Snare Ghost1 PopSnare38 2 FingerSnaps2 RockSnare2_3 Roll Snare Hand clap2 909 HandClap Pedal Hi Hat FolkSnareTango2 FolkSnareRoll Pop Kick 35 Pop Kick 36 Pop Stick1 PopSnare38 1 Snare Ghost1 PopSnare40 1 Flam Tom 41 Pop Hi Hat1 Tom 43 Pop Hi Hat2 Flam Tom 45 Pop Hi Hat3 Tom 47 Flam Tom 50 Pop Cymbal2 Tom 50 Pop Ride1 Pop Cymbal Pop Ride2 Tambourine Splash Cym ChaChaCowb CrashCymbal2 Vibraslap RockRideCym1 HiBongo LoBongo CongaSlap CongaOp LoConga Timbal Hi Timbal Lo Agogo Agogo Shaker2 Shaker1 ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Quide1 Quide2 Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell PC 47 CC32 4 New Pop Perc CowBellSide SeaShells Equat nutshells Cascade_Ending Chimes Ending Goathooves GoathoovesShot Bongo1_SW1 Bongo1_SW2 Bongo1_SW3 Bongo2_SW1 Bongo2_SW2 Bongo2_3 Congas_SW1 Congas_SW2 Congas_SW3 Congas_SW4 Tamorra 1 Tamorra
256. om1 KEREN TR909 PHH 1 45 A2 Sharp M Tom 3o PA TRI09 OHH 2 47 48 B2 Sharp M Tom C3 Sharp H Tom UC EREE TR909 Crash 50 D3 Sharp H Tom SMD ER TRI09 Ride 52 53 E3 China Cymbal F3 Rock Rd Edge oY Mae Tamborine 3 55 G3 Crash Cym1 p SLL ER Cowbell 57 A3 Rock Crash 2 SY Sa 102 Vibraslap 59 60 B3 TR606 Cym 2 C4 Bongo Lo Op ce CM Bongo Hi Op 62 D4 Conga Hi Mt i DE Conga Hi Op 64 65 E4 Conga Lo Op F4 Conga Efx Wat Shaker 3 67 G4 Shaker2 raan CE CR78 Beat 69 A4 Cabasa Cut 1 HIER Cabasa Cut 2 71 72 B4 Lo Bit PHH C5 Scratch 7 LES se Syn Low Atk2 74 D5 MGZap7 LES ch Syn Swt Atk1 76 77 E5 Sun Swt Atk4 F5 Conga Thumb LS ER Triangle 1 79 G5 Triangle 2 Ier ARM Euro Hit 1 81 A5 TaoHit RYA eba Narrow Hit 2 83 84 B5 EuroHit2 C6 Wind Chime Ge EHM Timpani Roll 86 D6 Crotale Cy AP Hp Click 88 89 E6 Metro Bell F6 MC500 Beep 1 guffe CM MC500 Beep 2 91 G6 Atmosphere ER BR Agogo Noise 93 A6 Car Slip G TT Group Snap 95 96 B6 Laser C7 ConcertBD Se OB AnalogKick 3 98 D7 Old Kick SES Ren Kick 100 101 E7 TR909 Snr 4b F7 TR808 Snr 2 LL P Vint Snr 4 103 G7 Light Snr 105 AT 107 108 B7 as ER PC 1 CC32 5 WD Std Kit Dance Kick Dry Kick 1 Snr Roll Power Kick Amb Snr 2 Reg Kick 2 Reg PHH Reg Kick 1 WD Kick WD CStk WD
257. omFI Room Chh RkFloorTom Pedal HiHat RockTom2Fl R8 Ohh2 RockTom2 RockTom1FI 909 Crash RockTom1 Ride Cymbal ReverseCymbl Dholla Dom Dholla Sak 1 Dholla Sak 2 Dholla Sak 3 Dholla Rim Dholla Raka Dholla Tak 1 Dholla Tak 2 DofDom 1 DofDom 2 DofDom 3 DofTak 1 DofTak 2 DofSak 1 DofRim 1 DofSak 2 DofRim 2 DofSak 3 DofFinger 1 DofFinger 2 New Claves NewShaker2 NewShaker1 Tabla1 Tak 1 Tabla1 Dom 1 Tabla Roll Tabla1 Tak 2 Tabla Fx Tabla1 Tak 3 Tabla 1 Sak Tabla 1 Rim PC 57 CC32 4 SFX MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep ytwn3 xtp ytwn2 xtp Guitar Slap Chord Stroke Chord Stroke Biwa 3 Phono Noise TapeRewind Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 GtCutNoise2 GtCutNoise2 Dist CutNoiz Dist CutNoiz Bass Slide Pick Scrape High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell GtFretNoise GtCutNoise GtCutNoise String Slap FI KeyClick Laughing Screaming Punch Heart Beat Footsteps Footsteps Applause Creaking Door Scratch Wind Chimes Car Engine Car Stop Car Pass Car Crash Siren Train Jetplane Helicopter Starship Gun Shot Machine Gun Lasergun Explosion Dog HorseGallop Bird Rain Thunder Wind Seashore Stream 84 C6 Rege Tab Noueri Dom 2 86 D6 88 E6 89 F6 91 G6 Sameer eae Zaghrouta 1 Loop 93 A6 95 B6 Zaghrouta 2 Loop 96 C7 97 C 7 98 D7 99 D 7 100 E7 101 F7 102 F 103 G7 104 G 105 A7 106 Bb 107 B7 108 C8 109 C 8 110 D8 111 D 8 112 ES 113 F
258. on 2 ConcertBD R amp B Kick Dry Kick 2 Old Kick Jazz Doos Agogo Noise Rock OHH JD Anklungs Rock OHH Cajon 3 Cajon 1 Mix Kick 4 Gospel Clap Bright Clap Rock Rd Cup Cowbell Crash Cym 2 PC 3 CC32 5 TY Std Kit Dance Kick Dry Kick 1 Snr Roll Power Kick Amb Snr2 p Power Kick Reg PHH Reg Kick TY Kick TY CStk TY Snr SF SnrGst TY Rim RR F Tom Reg CHH 1 TY L Tom Reg CHH 2 TY M Tom Reg OHH TY M Tom TY H Tom Crash Cym 2 TY H Tom Rock Ride 1 China Cymbal Splash Cym Tamborine2 Crash Cym1a Cowbell3 Crash Cym1b Cowbell2 Lng Rock Ride 2 Conga 2H Mt Conga 2L Mt Conga 2H Slp Conga 2H Op Conga 2L Op Timbare 4 Timbare 3 Agogo 2 Hi Agogo 2 Low Cabasa 2 Shaker 1 Whistle Shrt Whistle Long Guiro 2 Up Guiro 2 Down Claves 2 Wood Block2H Wood Block2L Cuica 2 Low Cuica 2 Hi Triangle Mt Triangle Op Cabasa2 Cut DigiSpectrum Wind Chime Wood Block2M Cajon 2 ConcertBD R amp B Kick Dry Kick 2 Old Kick Jazz Doos Agogo Noise Rock OHH JD Anklungs Rock OHH Cajon 3 Cajon 1 TY Rim f Gospel Clap Bright Clap Rock Rd Cup Cowbell Crash Cym 2 PC 7 CC32 5 LatinDrmKit TimbalesHand Timbles HiMt Timbles HiOp Timbles LoMt Timbles LoOp TmbSideStick TimblesPaila SectChd m9 SectChd Mj9 TimbalesFil4 TimbalesFil3 TimbalesFil2 TimbalesFil1 Dixie HH HIf Fat BD Room Kick 2 Cross Stick2 Maple Lo Snr Hand Clap 2 MapleSoft SN Studio Tom 4 Dixie HH Cls Studio Tom 3 Dixie HH Pdl Studio Tom 2
259. on cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through e Before using the unit in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an A authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Informa tion page e Do NOT play a CD ROM disc on a conventional audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a level that could cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result A CAUTION e The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so their location or position does not interfere with their proper ventilation e Always grasp only the plug on the AC adaptor cord when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this unit e At regular intervals you should unplug the AC adaptor and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other accumulations away from its prongs Also discon nect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire e Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entan gled Also all cords and cables should be placed so they N are out of the reach of children e Ne
260. on to define the current settings as the default state The display shows a confirmation message If you don t want to define the current settings as the default state rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select NO then press the ENTER SELECT button The BK 5 then returns to the Performance Edit page Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Global parameters Global parameters The settings of the Global parameters can be saved to the BK 5 s global memory If you don t save them your changes are lost when you switch off the BK 5 See Save Global on p 70 for how to save these set tings Display Brightness Tuning Rhythm SF Track Mute Scale Tune Switch Scale Tune Onetouch Hold Performance Hold CURSOR CR DEN Display Contrast This parameter can be selected using MENU button gt Global gt Display Contrast It is used to change the contrast of the BK 5 s display in case you find it difficult to read Parameter Setting Display Contrast 1 10 Display Brightness This parameter can be selected using MENU button gt Global gt Display Brightness It is used to change the brightness of the BK 5 s dis play in case you find it difficult to read Parameter Setting Display Brightness 0 10 Tuning This parameter can be selected using MENU button gt Global Tuning Global Display Contrast s Display Brightness Rhythm SMF Track Mute Scale Tune Swit
261. onome off Volume Ed Time Signature did Mode Always Count In Off CURSOR EEE MES The BK 5 is equipped with a metronome that can be used in various situations While rhythm or SMF song playback is stopped the TAP TEMPO button flashes in red to indicate the selected tempo Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the Metronome field Press the ENTER SELECT button to highlight the setting Rotate the dial to select On The metronome starts counting The metronome is not available while an audio song file mp3 or WAV is selected The metronome parameters you can set are Parameter Setting Explanation Select On to activate the metronome Metronome Off On Sets the metronome s level Volume 0 127 Time Signature 1032 16 8 Specifies the metro 4 2 nome s time signature Mode Always Play Always The metro Rec nome even counts when playback is stopped Play The metronome only sounds while the rhythm or song is play ing Rec The metronome only sounds during rhythm recording using the Rhythm Composer Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Global parameters Parameter Setting Explanation Count In Off 1bar 2bar This parameter allows you to switch the Count In function on 1bar or 2bar or off When on the met ronome will count in the specified number of measures bars before the rhythm or SMF song starts play ing This setting is not available for
262. opy function or by recording new phrases in that area This function provides no To pointer Instead you need to specify the length of the insert using the For values im Insert Parameter Setting Explanation Track ADrums Acc6 Allows you to select ALL the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the opera tion applies to all tracks Mode Major Minor Allows you to select 7th the Mode to be edited Division Intro 14 Use this parameter to Main 154 Fill select the Division you Dwn 1 3 Fill want to edit Up 1 3 End 1x4 From Bars See page 88 From CPT For Bar Specifies how many bars beats and For Beat CPTs are to be inserted For CPT Press the WRITE button its indicator flashes to confirm your settings and edit the data Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Rhythm Composer programming your own rhythms E Key transposition This function allows you to transpose the notes of the selected track non note data obviously cannot be transposed KEN Parameter Setting Explanation Track ADrums Acc6 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the opera tion applies to all tracks Mode Major Minor Allows you to select 7th the Mode to be edited Division Intro 14 Use this parameter to Main 154 Fill select the Division you Dwn 153 Fill want to edit Up 1 3 End 104 From Bars See page
263. or cut Smaller values mean that neighboring frequencies above below that value are also affected Mid Gain 15 1 5 dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected Mid Freq Positive values boost increase the volume of that frequency negative values cut attenuate it Low Freq 90 Hz 150 Hz Allows you to set the 180 Hz 300 cutoff frequency of Hz 360 Hz the low band this is a 600 Hz shelving filter Low Gain 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected Low fre quency Drum Instrument D 33 Pap Kick 35 ta 86 Pop Kick 26 27 Pop Stickl 35 PopSnaress 1 29 Snare Ghost 40 PopSnare40 1 42 Pop HiHatl 42 Tom 43 KE CURSOR CR DEI If you want to edit the settings for specific instru ments of the selected Drum Set press the ENTER SELECT button to jump to the Drum Instrument page All instruments of the Drum Set being used are dis played Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the instrument you want to change then press the ENTER SELECT button You can then use the CURSOR VALUE dial and the ENTER SELECT button to edit the available parame ters Parameter Setting Explanation Instr All Drum Set Select the drum instru Instruments ment you want to edit Parameters for the selected instrument Mute Off On Suppress or add the selected instrument Parameter Solo Volume Reverb Chorus Panpot Velocity Pitch
264. ord rhythms in any key But do set the KEY parameter to the right value before recording The key of AccDrums parts cannot be set because that doesn t make sense Parameter Explanation Octave 4n44 This parameter allows you to transpose the keyboard in octave steps which may be convenient for extremely high or low notes or for using the special noises of certain sounds The display changes to Mode Major Minor This parameter allows 7th M m you to specify whether M 7 m 7 you are about to Rec Track Bum ze M m 7 record the accompani ment for major minor or seventh chords If you listen to the rhythm prepared by Roland you will notice ma ma that there are slight TI value L Idem differences in the looped patterns and 4 If necessary use the CURSOR VALUE dial sometimes striking dif and ENTER SELECT button to edit the ferences for Intros and available parameters EE pletely different Parameter Setting Explanation phrases Such varia tions can be prepared Rec Track ADrum ABass This parameter allows using the Mode Acc1 Acc2 you to select the track parameter Acc3 Acc4 whose settings you Acc5 Acc6 want to record Division Intro Main Select the pattern you Fill Ending want to create This Inst Tone assigned This is where you select parameter is linked to to the track a sound or Drum Set the division you select for the track BE on the main Rhythm for recording
265. orded notes to a more natural behavior also known as voicing There are two options Degree This setting refers to the old system for real time conversion of rhythm track information for Arranger playback Based on the fundamentals of the chords you play during Arranger playback it often leads to odd jumps of certain parts Nearest Refers to a more musical system for real time shifts of the recorded rhythm notes during Arranger playback Let us first look at an illustration Recorded strings track Result with Degree O bo O O O bo O e Result with Nearest bs O O O bp Hg Chords played in the recognition area This new system is called Adaptive Chord Voicing The notes of the melodic rhythm tracks are compared against the chords played in the recognition area If the next chord you play contains the note the selected part is already sounding based on the previ ous chord that note is maintained If the new chord does not contain that note the rhythm part in question uses the closest Nearest note In the example above the G is closer to the A sounded by the strings part than the C This produces a more musical behavior than any other system on the market Both Degree and Nearest allow you to specify the note range Limit Low and Limit High the selected part may play Notes that would fall outside that range dur
266. orrseponding CC00 and CC32 bank select values see Rhythm list on p 117 before one of the program changes numbers shown below Rhythm Divisions Intro Intro Intro Intro4 Main 1 Main 2 Main 3 Main 4 Fill Down Fill Down2 Fill Down3 Fill Up1 Fill Up2 Fill Up3 Ending1 Ending2 Ending3 Ending4 PC 67 68 65 66 01 02 09 10 89 100 90 97 99 98 75 76 73 74 E Series compatibility Rhythm Divisions PC Intro 83 Fill in To Original 82 Fill in To Variation 81 Ending 84 Break Mute 85 Recalling a Performance memory from the loaded Performance List via MIDI The following bank select and pro gram change messages allow you to select the desired Performance memory from the loaded Perfor mance List These MIDI messages must be received on the BK 5 s Basic channel Basic structure CCOO 122 Fixed value CC32 0x7 Page value PC 14128 Value Here is how to calculate which values to assign to the CC00 CC32 and PC messages CCOO 122 Fixed CC32 Performance memory number 1 128 PE Performance memory num ber CC32 x 128 For example to recall Performance memory number 280 you will need to transmit CCOO 122 CC32 280 1 128 2 PC 280 2 x 128 24 Note Be aware that the BK 5 transmits its Performance memory addresses based on the system shown above 19 Tone List CCOO CC32 No Name Piano E Piano 0001 NaturalPiano 0002 SuperiorPian
267. orus 0201 TCFrntPick 0202 Funk Gt 0203 Gt Feedback1 0204 Gt Feedback2 0205 Gt Harmonics 0206 Gt Cut Noise 0207 Pick Scrape CCO 15 16 17 18 19 65 69 64 65 0 WIN Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Tone List 0 CC32 PC 22 22 22 22 22 N FA FA KH N 30 28 28 28 28 29 28 27 27 27 27 27 28 28 28 31 31 31 31 29 29 29 29 29 30 31 31 29 28 27 31 31 31 31 30 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 29 28 30 30 30 30 30 85 31 31 31 28 30 30 28 29 31 32 32 121 121 119 ARR RRR RRR RRR RR RR RR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR RR BR BR BR BR Ex Backing Keyboard BK 5 Tone List No Name CEOO 0032 PC No Name ED 0032 PC No Name DR CC32 PC 0208 Ulti Ac Bass 0 4 33 0283 MG Oct Bassi 35 4 40 0357 Ac Gtr Hrm 51 4 26 0209 XV Ac Bass 9 4 33 0284 MG LightBass 39 4 40 0358 Ac Gt Harmnx 16 4 32 0210 AcBass 1 45 4 33 0285 DistSynBass 40 4 40 0359 Gt FretNoise 0 4 12 0211 AcBass 2 46 4 33 0286 DistEnvBass 38 4 40 Strings Vocal 0212 AcBass 3 47 4 33 0287 LightSynBass 45 4 40 0360 St Strings 1 16 4 49 0213 Rockabilly 1 4 33 0288 PopSynthBass 46 4 40 0361 St Strings 2 17 4 49 0214 XV Bass Ride 16 4 33 0289 Sync Bass 2 30 4 40 0362 St Strings 3 18 4 49 0215 AcousticBs 49 4 33 0290 TeeBee V Sw 44 4 39 0363 Strings 11 5 49 0216 Wild Ac Bs 4 33 0291 Odd Bass 15 4 40 0364 Strings 1 4 49 0217 TamBaStp 2 33 0292 303Sqr Rev 43 4 39 0365 String Ens 12 5 49 0218 G
268. other arranger instrument sequencer or your computer This operation is unnecessary for files you only want to use with the BK 5 or one of the models mentioned above s B Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options Saving your new rhythm or song SMP version 1 If you are happy with your changes and wish to preserve them select the Save parame ter and press the ENTER SELECT button Even rhythms or songs for which you did not perform the Freeze Data command need to be saved using this proce dure if you want to keep the changes 2 Use the CURSOR VALUE dial and the ENTER SELECT button to select a different location if you do not want to overwrite the original version 3 Press the WRITE button it flashes BK 5 BACKING en elen h kee The BK 5 automatically adopts the name of the selected rhythm or song If you want to save the new version under that name and overwrite the previous version skip to step 7 below 4 Use the TONE buttons to select a different character 5 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the next character position you want to change 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to complete the name I Press the WRITE button to confirm your desire to save the rhythm or song SO If the USB memory already contains a rhythm or song file of that name you will be asked whether you want to overwrite it USE Memor J Afilehavingthisnarne ha A already exists Overwrite
269. ou want to move to a different position inside the list CD 2 Press the MENU button Edit Amazing Grace Delete Performance 4 Rotate the dial to select YES to delete the Move Performance Performance memory or NO if you wish to EES keep it 5 Press the ENTER SELECT button to confirm your selection CEI J e er The display briefly confirms that the Performance memory has been deleted 3 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select If you like you can now select another Performance Move Performance then press the ENTER memory you want to delete press the MENU button SELECT button to confirm and repeat from step 3 The display changes to To save your edited Performance List proceed with step 6 If you don t want to save it skip to step 8 002 Flood Pop 003 Frank s Way 004 Aura Lee Saving the edited Performance List Press the MENU button I Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select Save Performance List then press the ENTER SELECT button 4 A message confirms that the data have been saved GVAUE IP wumenic el pm ENTER H ivatue f uumeric od enter Rotate the dial to move the selected Perfor mance memory to the desired position then 8 Press the EXIT button press the ENTER SELECT button You can now select another Performance memory you want to move press the MENU button to con firm and repeat from step 3 See Saving the edited Performance List if you wan
270. ows the path of the folder that contains the selected files USE Mty Songs t CUP SOP dal UE e The Search function can find and display 100 files at a time Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the song or rhythm you want to play back then press the ENTER SELECT button to confirm your selection Press the EXIT button to close the list Press the START STOP button to start play back of the selected song or rhythm Activating the Play All Songs parameter for the USB memory The Play All Songs parameter allows you to play back all audio songs WAV and mp3 or SMF songs on the connected USB memory Connect an optional USB memory to the BK 5 After a few seconds the display shows the contents of the USB memory USE Memor Press the USB MEMORY button if you inserted the USB memory at an earlier stage and now want to return to this display page Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the folder that contains the audio files you want to listen to Press the ENTER SELECT button to open the folder Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the audio file where you want playback to start Press ENTER SELECT to confirm your selec tion Press the USB MEMORY button to activate the playback function of the selected and all subsequent songs ihy Songs Play all Songs activated on current folder STL and JPG files contained in the selected folder will be ignored
271. p SONS CO Al Yousifi Service Center P O Box 126 Safat 13002 KUWAIT TEL 00 965 802929 LEBANON Chahine S A L George Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh BO Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 20 1441 OMAN TALENTZ CENTRE L L C Malatan House No 1 Al Noor Street Ruwi SULTANATE OF OMAN TEL 2478 3443 QATAR AL EMADI TRADING amp CONTRACTING CO P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Behind Pizza Inn Prince Turkey Street aDawliah Building PO BOX 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 8643601 SYRIA Technical Light 8 Sound Center PO Box 13520 Bldg No 49 Khaled Abn Alwalid St Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 223 5384 TURKEY ZUHAL DIS TICARET A S Galip Dede Cad No 33 Beyoglu Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 249 85 10 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sherooq Bldg No 14 Ground Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 604 270 6626 Roland Canada Ltd Toronto Office 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL 905 362 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A TEL 323 890 3700 As of Feb 1 2011 ROLAND 149 EE This symbol indicates that in EU countries this pr
272. p Simul 67 Gate 68 Long Delay 69 Serial Delay 70 MLT Tap DLY 71 Reverse DLY 72 Shuffle DLY 73 3D Delay 74 Long Time DLY 75 Tape Echo 76 LoFi Noise 77 LoFi Comp 78 LoFi Radio 79 Telephone 80 Phonograph 81 Step Pitch 82 Sympa Reso 83 Vib Od Rotary 84 Center Canc Some of the names shown above may be abbreviated in the display Mfx Edit If you also want to edit the parameters of the selected effect type press the ENTER SELECT button to jump to the Mfx Edit page You can then use the CURSORWALUE dial to edit the available parame ters The first two parameters for each Mfx type are Cho rus Send 0 127 and Reverb Send 0 127 They allow you to specify whether and to what extent the Mfx signal should be processed by the Chorus and or Reverb effect Rhythm Parts parameters This function group can be selected using MENU but ton gt Performance Edit gt Rhythm Parts Rhwthm Parts Mute Off Solo Off alura 100 Exp Pedal On Exp Pedal AllParts On Exp Pedal AllParts Off CURSOR The parameters of this function group apply to the eight Arranger parts i e the parts used to play back the selected rhythm 1 Use the CURSOR VALUE dial and the ENTER SELECT button to select the rhythm part you want to edit ADrum ABass Acc1 Acc2 Acc3 Acc4 Acc4 Acc5 Acc6 The display shows the settings for the selected part Use the CURSOR VALUE dial
273. page 65 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options Tempo Change Accel Ritard CPT Fill Rit The Termpo Change Acceler Ritard parameter allows you to speed up or slow down the rhythm tempo by the amount you set here To use these functions you must assign them to an optional foot switch see p 70 There are three Ritardando functions one for all rhythm patterns one for Ending patterns and one for fill ins see Fill Ritardando above They all use the Tempo Change settings on the following page Type Pianist2 Arranger Hold On Tempo Preset Fill In Half Bar Off Fill Ritardando Off Tempoch AcciRit 20 Tempoch CPT 480 Tempoch Fill Rit 7 CURSOR Parameter Setting Tempo Change Accel Ritard 5 92 Tempo Change CPT 0 3825 Tempo Change Fill Rit 50 0 920 Tempo Change Accel Ritard Allows you to set the degree ratio by which the tempo changes when the Acceler or Ritard function is triggered Example if the tempo is currently J 100 the value 20 means that the tempo drops to J 80 or rises to J 120 Tempo Change CPT Use this parameter to specify how long a ritardando accelerando should take In most cases 480 CPT i e one measure is probably the most musical choice Tempo Change Fill Rit This parameter allows you to specify to what extent fill in playback should be Slowed down when the Fill Ritardando function is on E Using the Ritardando Accelerando fu
274. parameters can be selected using MENU button gt MIDI Local On MIDI Set KeysRbythm Edit Rhythm Parts Edit Tome Parts Edit Song Parts Edit System The BK 5 s MIDI environment contains the following options MIDI parameter Explanation group Local This setting allows you to establish or remove the connection between the BK 5 s keyboard and the internal tone generator MIDI Set Allows you to load a MIDI Set Key Rhythm PK Series Song User1 s8 MIDI parameter Explanation group Edit Rhythm Parts Here you can edit all MIDI parame ters of the rhythm parts ADrum ABass Acc1 6 See page 104 Edit Tone Parts Here you can edit all MIDI parame ters related to the keyboard parts UP1 UP2 LWR and Mel Intell See page 105 Edit Song Parts Here you can edit all MIDI parame ters of the Song parts See page 105 Edit System This groups contains all MIDI param eters that apply to the BK 5 as a whole See page 106 Local This setting allows you to establish or remove the con nection between the BK 5 s keyboard and the internal tone generator Parameter Setting Local On Off If you select On default playing on the BK 5 s key board or playing back a song rhythm causes the corre sponding notes to sound If you select Off the corre sponding MIDI messages are no longer sent to the internal tone generator but they are still transmitted
275. parameters deselect the UP1 field black field refers to re EB ani EFiznoz G The parameter s setting field once again appears on a the selected real up BEE artackiPad OD GE P g g pp time part ihe GE white background and the CURSOR VALUE dial can MWA ounce parts once again be used to select another parameter Moving the cursor and setting parameter values d e AA Here is how to navigate the menu to select the setting The display cursor can only be moved to the fields that you want to change contain numeric values 1 P MEN 1 Rotate the dial to move the cursor to the ress U button parameter whose value you want to change The display changes to ooo MENU 2 Press the ENTER SELECT button to confirm i your selection BK 5 BACKING i CURSOR CR DEI This page allows you to select the function group that contains the setting you want to change In some cases the MENU button may recall a special edit menu window instead of a main menu page 2 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the entry of the desired function group For this example we will select Global Press the ENTER SELECT button to go to the Global function group The display changes to Global KEN CURSOR TD DEN On this display page Display Contrast Display Brightness and Tuning can be changed directly The remaining entries provide access to additional display p
276. pens the Melody Intelligence page NUMERIC TONE buttons SPLIT EXIT E In some cases this opens the Help page Locks the Tone to keep it from changing when you select another Perfor mance memory Opens the Split page Pressing and holding this button takes you back to the main page no matter where you currently are 15 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Before you start using the BK 5 1 Connecting the AC adaptor Turn the VOLUME knob all the way to the left to minimize the volume Connect the included power cord to the AC adapter The indicator will light once you plug the AC adaptor into a wall outlet Power cord AC adapter pm to an AC outlet Indicator Place the AC adapter so the side with the indicator see illustration faces upwards and the side with tex tual information faces downwards Depending on your region the included power cord may differ from the one shown above Connect the AC adaptor to the BK 5 s DC IN Jack BK 5 s rear panel POWER IN USE ROLAND PSB 7U ADAPTOR ONLY 19 Plug the power cord into a power outlet The indicator will light once you plug the AC adaptor into a wall outlet Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with the unit PSB 7U Also make sure the line voltage at the installa tion matches the input voltage specified on the AC adapter s body Other AC adapters may use a different polarity or be designed for a different voltage
277. r expression pedal hold pedal The BK 5 provides a PEDAL SWITCH EXPRESSION jack to which you can connect an optional footswitch Roland DP series or BOSS FS 5U or an expression pedal Roland EV series Roland DP series BOSS FS 5U Optional footswitch Roland DP series BOSS FS 5U Optional expression pedal Roland EV series If you connect a footswitch you can select the func tion it should perform page 69 By default the foot switch will control the Start Stop function The BK 5 also provide a HOLD socket to which you can connect a damper pedal or footswitch Roland DP series or BOSS FS 5U that allows you to hold sustain the notes of the real time parts you play Use only the specified expression pedal Roland EV series sold separately or pedal switch Roland DP series BOSS FS 5U By connecting any other expression pedal or foot switch you risk causing malfunction and or damage the unit Connecting a portable audio player You can connect a portable audio player or any other line level source to the AUDIO INPUT STEREO socket The input level of the audio source you connect can be set with the Audio In Level parameter on the MENU Global Utility page page 68 You can also attenuate the vocal or solo part at the cen ter of the stereo image of the audio signals being received See Audio In Center Canc on p 68 Listening through headphones You can use headphones to enjoy the BK
278. ral ATEI ADRUM TAP Hold 2 Press the MENU button its indicator flashes Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options The display changes to Rhythm Composer Broken Dance CURSOR To DE Initialize Rhythm is already selected so press the ENTER SELECT button The display changes to nities Rhythm CURSOR The settings shown on this display page are sug gested as defaults for every new rhythm you pro gram Feel free to change them depending on the kind of accompaniment you want to prepare Use the CURSOR VALUE dial and ENTER SELECT button to edit the available param eters Parameter Setting Explanation Rec Track ADrum ABass This parameter allows Acc1 Acc2 you to select the track Acc3 Acc4 whose settings you Acc5 Acc6 want to change Inst Tone assigned This is where you select to the track a sound or Drum Set for the track marked for recording Rec Track Tempo 20250 You can already set the tempo here or leave that for later Time Signature 1 16 1 4 4 This value needs to be 4 set when you initialize the Rhythm RAM memory i e now A Divisions and Modes use this time signa ture You could how ever edit the patterns ata later stage see Time Signature on p 98 and specify that VARIATION 1 should use 4 4 MAIN 2 6 ele Parameter Setting Explanation Temporary volume changes CC11 Reverb s127 Reverb Send CC91 i
279. rameter is set to Off you cannot select a different type In that case the display will show the message Mfx Edit If you also want to edit the parameters of the selected effect type press the ENTER SELECT button to jump to the Mfx Edit page You can then edit the available parameters Equalizer Activate this setting if you want to change the timbre of the selected instrument Parameter Setting Equalizer Off On Edit EQ To edit the equalizer parameters press the ENTER SELECT button to jump to the Edit EO page You can then edit the available parameters Parameter Setting Explanation Equalizer Off On Activate this setting if you want to change the timbre of the selected instrument This parameter dupli cates the Equalizer above and was added for your convenience High Freq 1500 Hz 2000 Allows you to set the Hz 3000 Hz cutoff frequency of 4000 Hz 6000 the high band this is a Hz 8000 Hz shelving filter 12000 Hz High Gain 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected High fre quency Positive val ues boost increase the volume of that fre quency negative val ues cut attenuate it Mid Freq 200 8000 Hz Allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the middle band this is a peaking filter Parameter Setting Explanation Mid Q 0 5 1 2 4 8 Use this parameter to specify the width of the Mid Freq band that you want to boost
280. recorded data to the left select 5 That allows you to preserve any irregularities the original may contain because it was not quantized After selecting a sound with a slow release i e a sound that lingers on after all notes have been released however Change Gate Time will help you cut the notes down to size and thus avoid undesirable overlaps Setting Explanation ADrums Acc6 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the opera tion applies to all tracks Parameter Track Mode Major Minor Allows you to select 7th the Mode to be edited Parameter Division From Bars To CPT See page 90 Data Type Value CPT From Note To Note Setting Intro 14 Main 154 Fill Dwn 153 Fill Up 1 3 End 14 See page 88 4800 4800 0 C 127 G9 Explanation Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit This parameter sets the amount by which the notes are shifted The value refers to CPT units one CPT 1 120 2 Notes on the first beat of the first bar cannot be shifted fur ther to the left because that would mean shifting them to the 0 measure which doesn t exist From Note allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified From To time range To Note allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modif
281. ree Ae TR Castanets 86 D6 Mute Surdo Get e Open Surdo 88 E6 89 F6 Applause 2 EO 91 G6 _92_G 6 93 A6 94 Bb6 Ei 95 B6 96 C7 Ke 7A Techno Hit 98 D7 Philly Hit ie Le aa DE JAB Shock Wave 100 E7 101 F7 Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit UE Bim Hit 103 G7 TapeRewind ut et z Phono Noise 105 A7 Dance Snare1 Koi yA Power Snare2 107 B7 108 C8 Flec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 LERE Elec Snare 2 110 D8 Flec Snare hee DY 738m Elec Snare 3 112 ES 113 F8 66 Snare 260 TR 707 Snare ENSCH 808 Snare 1 115 G8 808 Snare 2 Nic CE TR 808Snare2 117 A8 909 Snare 1 RES 009 Snare 2 119 B8 120 C9 909 SD 1 TR 909Snare2 PANE Rap Snare 122 D9 JungleSnare1 eee DES House Snare 124 E9 125 F9 House Snare House Snare EIS CR Voice Tah 127 G9 Noise Slap T3 PC 27 CC32 4 Dance Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Small Club 66 Snare 260 909 SD 1 Elec Snare 2 House Snare Rap Snare House Snare Dance Snare1 Rap Snare Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare1 Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare Elec Snare 3 66 Snare 260 TR 707 Snare 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR 808Snare2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR 909Snare2 Rap Snare JungleSnare1 House Snare House Snare House Snare Voice Tah Noise Slap PC 28 CC32
282. related to a specific MIDI channel See page 107 Rhythm The parameters of this group affect the BK 5 s Rhythm channel The Rhythm channel is used for receiving program change and bank select messages that select rhythm and volume messages that change the rhythm s volume See page 108 NTA These parameters allow you to assign MIDI channels to the BK 5 s NTA parts Note to Arranger Only notes received on one of these channels are considered chord information that can be used to transpose rhythm playback in real time See page 108 Parameters This group contains MIDI parameters that are not related to the previous groups See page 109 Visual Con Allows you to set the MIDI transmit chan trol TxCh nel for the Visual Control function The BK 5 does not receive Visual Control mes sages TOG The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using MENU button gt MIDI gt Edit System gt Sync Rhwthm Start 3top Tx Rhythm Clock Tx Dn SMF Start Stop Tx Off SMF Clock Tx Off SF Position Tx Off Sync Rx Dn Mode Auto The Sync parameters allow you to specify whether or not the BK 5 should send MIDI real time messages when you start rhythm or song playback This allows you to synchronize external instruments or soft ware sequencers with your BK 5 Rhythm Start Stop Tx If you activate this option the BK 5 sends start or stop messages when you start or stop rhythm pla
283. s The first value 42 F 2 for example refers to the note itself and the second 72 to the velocity playing dynamics The Micro Edit page adds a third message to that pair It describes the duration of the note in question You may remember this value from the Track Edit environment where it is called Gate Time CC These messages usually add something to the notes being played like modulation a different vol ume a new stereo position The BK 5 recognizes and allows you to edit all control change numbers the Arranger uses CCO1 10 11 91 93 and displays their official name CC64 Hold events generated by a footswitch connected to the HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket are converted into the equivalent GATE TIME values at the time of recording You may therefore have to change the duration of the notes themselves PC Program Change These messages are used to select sounds within the current bank As there are only 128 possibilities these messages are usually pre ceded by control changes CC00 and CC32 That s why the BK 5 inserts all three when you use the Create Event function To assign a Drum Set to an Acc1 6 track you must create a CC00 event with the value 111 The CC00 value of ADrums tracks cannot be edited Pitch Bend These messages are used for tempo rary changes to the pitch of the notes being played at that time Pitch Bend messages can be positive higher or negative lower
284. s or Drum Sets Note by deleting pro gram change messages you also dispose of the related CCOO and CC32 bank select messages Program Change P Bender Pitch Bend data i e use of the BENDER MODULATION lever Parameter From Note To Note Setting Explanation 0 C 127 G9 This parameter is only displayed if Data Type see above is set to Note It allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified From To time range 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified From To time range Press the WRITE button its indicator flashes to confirm your settings and edit the data NI Delete Unlike the Erase function Delete not only erases the data but also the measures beats and or CPT units so that all data that lie behind the To position are shifted towards the beginning of the track s You cannot choose the data type to be erased Parameter Track Mode Division From Bars To CPT Mode Majar Division Intral From Bar DOL Fram Beat DI Fram Cpt 000 To Bar 002 ToBeat OL SE Setting Explanation ADrums Acc6 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit Select ALL to edit all tracks Major Minor Allows you to select 7th the Mode to be edited Intro 1 44 Use this parameter to Main 1 4 Fill select t
285. s parameter on such real time trans formations are also transmitted via MIDI If you switch this parameter off the original sound addresses are transmitted to the receiving device But the BK 5 s tone generator continues to enhance the songs you play back Parameter Setting Tx Data Change Off On Octave Tx The Octave Tx parameter can be set to Absolute or Relative You may have noticed that if you assign a bass sound to the UP1 or UP2 part in SPLIT mode the notes are transposed to allow you to play meaningful bass lines using the UP1 2 part Relative means that this internal and automatic transposition is trans lated into MIDI note numbers In Absolute mode however the MIDI note numbers sent to other instruments will be the ones of the keys you actually press Parameter Setting Octave Tx Relative Absolute Rx Velocity Your BK 5 is equipped with a velocity sensitive key board and a tone generator capable of responding to velocity messages This parameter allows you to switch the reception RX of velocity messages on or 109 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options off If you don t need On specify which velocity value to use instead of the continuous flux This value will be used for all notes received via MIDI Parameter Setting Rx Velocity On 10127 Rx SySex Use this parameter to specify whether the BK 5 should receive SysEx messages from other devices Parameter Setting Rx SySex Off
286. s the BK 5 s POWER switch The display will go dark and the power will turn off NOTE If you need to turn off the power completely first turn off the POWER switch then unplug the power cord from the power outlet Refer to Connecting the AC adaptor on p 16 Energy saving function The BK 5 has an Auto Off function which auto matically switches off the power after a certain amount of time has passed without any buttons being operated Shortly before the BK 5 shuts down automatically the display starts counting down the seconds If you want to keep using the BK 5 at this stage press any button You can also disable the Auto Off function For more about the Auto Off function refer to p 69 When the BK 5 is turned off by the Auto Off func tion the POWER button s position doesn t change which means that you need to press it once wait a few seconds then press it again to switch the BK 5 back on Demo of the BK 5 Your BK 5 contains a demo that introduces all of its highlights It might be a good idea to try it out now The demo is self explanatory so we ll just show you how to start and stop it You will need to connect an external display to take advantage of the BK 5 s demo function See Connecting a television set on p 18 1 Simultaneously press the MENU and EXIT buttons The BK 5 plays back a song and the external display introduces the BK 5 s features 2 Press the EXIT
287. s you mute the melody part of the selected MIDI File or attenuate the vocal part at the center of an audio file WAV or mp3 allowing you to sing or play that part yourself Pressing and holding this button calls up a display page where you can select the Standard MIDI File or rhythm part s that you don t want to hear USB MEMORY button Press this button to call up a list of the files stored on the USB memory connected to the BK 5 s USB MEM ORY port USB MEMORY port Connect an optional USB memory here Note Roland does not recommend using USB hubs irre spective of whether they are active or passive Please con nect only one USB memory to this port Use USB memory sold by Roland We cannot guarantee operation if any another USB memory is used MENU button This button allows you to open the BK 5 s menu page where you can view and select all available functions Press it together with the EXIT button to listen to the BK 5 s demo songs EXIT button This button is used to return to a higher menu level Press and hold it to return to the BK 5 s main display page SPLIT button This button is used to activate Split mode While its indicator lights notes played to the left of the C4 on an keyboard trigger the LWR part Notes to the right of the split point on the other hand trigger the UP1 and UP2 parts See Using Split mode on p 43 PART LWR and UP2 buttons These buttons are used to switch the real time parts
288. se buttons are used to select the family of the next rhythm you want to use Pressing one of these buttons calls up a list of all rhythms contained in the selected family Pressing and holding this button locks the currently selected rhythm see p 54 TAP TEMPO button Pressing this button several times allows you to change the current rhythm s or song s tempo to the value calculated from the speed at which the button is pressed O OW 2 HA 09 Pressing and holding this button locks the current tempo setting see p 54 TEMPO buttons These buttons can be used to decrease or increase the tempo of the currently selected rhythm or song Pressing them together recalls the rhythm s or song s stored tempo value You can also use the TAP TEMPO button 5 to set the desired tempo SYNC START button This button is used to activate or switch off the BK 5 s Sync Start or Sync Stop function If it is on rhythm playback can be started or stopped by simply playing a note or chord on the keyboard See also page 27 While a song file is selected this button stops play back BALANCE buttons These buttons allow you to set the balance between the rhythms and songs BACKING and the real time parts PART Backing Keyboard BK 5 Panel description 9 AUDIO REC button This button is used to start audio recording of your performance This function records everything the BK 5 transmits to its OUTPUT sockets audio sign
289. set tings for each Tone you assign to the Upper1 part Allows you to set the recording level for your own perfor mances see p 52 The setting of the VOL UME knob does not affect the recording level Default setting 0dB Off Choose this set ting when you want to start recording before starting rhythm or song playback On Choose this set ting when you want to be able to start record ing simultaneously with rhythm song playback When you choose this setting pressing the AUDIO REC button will stop both playback and the recorder Allows you to set the input level of the sig nals received via the INPUT STEREO socket See also page 19 Select On if the Cen ter Cancel function see p 42 should also affect the signals received via the AUDIO INPUT sockets Parameter USB Driver Recall MIDI Set Auto Off Visual Ctrl Mode Version Info When the BK 5 has been switched off by this function you need to press the POWER button wait a few seconds then press the button again to switch the BK 5 back on Do not Setting Generic Original Off Key Rhythm PK Series Song User1 User User3 User4 User5 User6 User7 User8 Off 10 5 30 15 240 30 MVC V LINK switch it on too quickly Explanation Generic Choose this if you want to use the standard USB driver that was included with your computer Nor mally you should use this mode Or
290. set for each Perfor mance memory Parameter Group Explanation Tone Part View This is where you can edit settings related to Tones See page 56 Tone Part MFX Contains the effects parameters for the keyboard parts LWR UP2 UP1 See page 60 Rhythm Parts This group contains all parameters of the rhythm parts See page 61 Split This parameter allows you to change the split point i e the separation between the lower and upper keyboard zones See page 61 Key Allows you to transpose the BK 5 in semi tone steps up or down See page 41 Arranger Setting This function group allows you to specify where and how the selected rhythm should scan the note messages gener ated by your playing for chord informa tion See page 62 Melody Intelligent Allows you to set the Melody Intelli gence function See page 64 This page can also be selected by pressing and holding the MELODY INTELL button Parameter Group Explanation Save As Default This function allows you to save all Per formance Edit settings as the new defaults that will be loaded each time you switch on the BK 5 Tone Part View parameters This function group can be selected using MENU but ton gt Performance Edit gt Tone Part View Keyboard Part i Tone HaturalPiano Volume 127 Reverb Send 40 Chorus Send o Panpat o Key Touch Eq Part Edit CURSOR TD DEI Use the CURSOR VALUE dial and ENTER SELE
291. song parts This processor is called Mastering Tools because it allows you to perfect the signal mix to adapt it to the sound system you are using The parameters discussed here can be selected using MENU button gt Mastering Tools Mastering Tools Equalizer CURSOR Compressor This multi band compressor limiter allows you to pro cess three frequency ranges separately A compressor reduces high levels peaks and boosts low levels smoothing out fluctuations in volume To edit the Compressor parameters use MENU button gt Mastering Tools gt Compressor Compressor Preset 6 5tandard Level 127 Gain Ode High Attack 20 ms High Release 208 ms High Threshold 28 de High Ratio 120 SE CURSOR Select a keyboard part an SMF song or a rhythm and start playback Set the Switch parameter to On to acti vate the compressor The compressor is now active Select Off to switch the compressor back off Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the Preset parameter then press the ENTER SELECT button Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select one of the available presets The available presets are 1 Hard Comp 4 Mid Boost 6 Standard 2 Soft Comp 5 High Boost 7 User 3 Low Boost Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Mastering Tools If none of the preset memories contains the settings you need press the ENTER SELECT button to select and set the followi
292. speak Aa En High Freq 8000 Hz ers of the PA system etc Bai Ban mora Level 24n This parameter allows you to Ge 24dB establish the desired mix sr among the three compressor bands Choose a negative value to decrease the level The equalizer has the same function as the TREBLE MID or a positive one to increase and BASS knobs on a mixer it allows you to color the it Choose 0 for a band sound or to apply tonal corrections whose level is OK as is Split High 2000 These two parameters spec Select a keyboard part an SMF song or a 12000Hz ify the frequency where two bands are separated The compressor has three bands and so there are two cross over frequencies you can set High between the Mid and High ranges and Low between the Mid and Low ranges Split Low 80 800Hz Write User This function allows you to save the settings you made on the Compressor page Press the WRITE button Compressor Write on User Continue 2 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select YES then press the ENTER SELECT but ton to save the current settings 72 rhythm and start playback Set the Switch parameter to On to acti vate the equalizer The equalizer is now active and will affect the key board parts and SMF song or rhythm playback Select Off to switch the equalizer back off Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the Preset parameter then press the ENTER SELEC
293. ss a e This button allows you to end your songs with a suit able closing section if you don t want to simply stop playback The behavior of the Ending pattern depends on when you press the ENDING button ENDING Behavior Pressed before starting rhythm playback The indicator lights When you start rhythm playback the Arranger plays a musical ending At the end of the phrase playback stops Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Selecting rhythms ENDING Behavior Selecting rhythms Je ae elice du e a ele lina 1 Press a RHYTHM FAMILY button to select the ENDING pattern will begin on the tahun dana next downbeat Cc Iy UN Tat Pressed during rhythm playback When the ending is finished rhythm RHYTHM FAMILY POP DISCO JAZZ BALL LATIN TRADIT playback sto ps ROCK DANCE BLUES ROOM WORLD 1 WORLD 2 There are four different ENDING patterns that can be selected using the VARIATION 1 2 3 and 4 but tons Again the VARIATION buttons determine the complexity of the arrangement By pressing and holding one of these buttons you activate the lock function for rhythm selection which means that rhythms no longer change when you select Performance E BASS INV memories see p 54 The display shows a list of the rhythms that belong to this family If the currently selected rhythms belongs to the family whose button you pressed its name is displayed in reverse and the indicator of the button you pressed lights
294. st Division is finished you can record other Divisions Use the clone functions to record several patterns in one go Do not forget to record the Fills Intros and Endings to complete your rhythms There are two groups of three fills Up 13 and Dwn 1 3 Up fills are used when you switch on the AUTO FILL button and then press a VARIATION button of a higher number transition from 1 to 2 for example Dwn fills are used when you switch on the AUTO FILL button and then press a VARIATION button of a lower number Intros are usually used at the beginning of a song and End patterns provide professional closing sections The ABass track is monophonic You can only record single note patterns Help function on the main Rhythm Composer page 1 Press and hold the NUMERIC button The display changes to Rhythm Comp User Rhythm HELP G This page explains how to temporarily switch off Mute and isolate Solo specific tracks 2 Press the EXIT or NUMERIC button to return to the main Rhythm Composer page 1 Muting tracks while recording others After programming a few tracks you may find that cer tain parts tend to confuse you That is why the BK 5 allows you to mute tracks that you do not want to hear during recording On the main Rhythm Composer page use the CURSOR VALUE dial and ENTER SELECT button to select the TRACK parameter Rhythm Comp Broken Dan ce Bel
295. suzumi Ban_Gu Big Gong Small Gong Bend Gong RAMA Cymbal RAMA Cymbal Gamelan Gong Udo_Short Udo_Long Udo_slap Bendir Req_Dum Req_tik Tabla_Te Tabla_Na Tabla_Tun Tabla_Ge Tabla Ge Hi Talking Drum Bend tlk_drm Caxixi DJembe Djembe_rim Low Timbale Timbl Paila High Timbale Cowbell Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga MtLow Conga Slap Conga Lo Opn Conga Slide Mut Pandiero Opn Pandiero Open Surdo Mute Surdo Tamborim Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Drum Sets PC 32 CC32 4 Multi Drum Pop Cymbal2 Pop Ride R amp B Snare R amp B Clap Techno Snare House Snare Jungle Snare Ps Snare 909 Snare 909Snare2 909 Kick 3 House Kick TR 808 Kick 909 Kick 909 Kick2 TR 909 OHHsh TR 909 OHH Ah Ha ShutHa ShutHi One Two Three Four Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell HipHop Kick SimpleKick Side Stick HipHop Snare 707 Claps HipHopSnare2 855t Tom16 HipHopCHH 855t Tom16 HipHopCHH 855t Tom12 855t Tom12 855t Tom10 855t CrsCym1 855t Tom10 855t RdCym ChinaCymbal 855t RdBell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell PC
296. t to have the Arranger scan the right half of the keyboard Switch off the SPLIT button if the Arranger should scan the entire keyboard Whole The range of the left and right keyboard areas depends on the Split Point setting page 61 Parameter Setting Zone Off Left Right Whole Type Another important choice is how you want to trans mit note information to the Arranger Parameter Setting Standard Pianist1 Pianist2 Intelligent Easy Type If the Arr Type parameter page 66 is set to On this Type setting has no effect Standard This is the normal chord recognition mode Pianist1 In this mode the BK 5 only recognizes chords that consist of at least three notes Playing only two notes will not cause the rhythm s key to change Pianist2 Same as Pianist1 while the Hold pedal is not pressed If you press the Hold pedal the BK 5 even recognizes chords when you press only one note If the hold pedal is still pressed chord recogni tion continues up to a maximum of 5 played keys Intelligent Select this option when you want the chord recognition function to supply the missing notes of the chords you play Easy This is another intelligent chord fingering sys tem It works as follows Major chords Press the key that corresponds to the chord s fundamental Minor chords Fundamental any black key to the left of the fundamental Seventh chords Fundamental any white
297. t 71 Housing 72 Survive Disco 73 Dancin 74 Earth Boogie 75 DJ Groove 76 Hitmix 77 House Maillorca 78 Club House 79 DJ Techno 80 Hard Techno 81 Barry Dance 82 Poppin Schlager 83 Folk Schlager 84 Disco Schlager 85 Latin Schlager 86 Happy Schlager 87 Party Schlager 88 Schlager Pop 89 Phunk Beat 90 Spear Beat 91 Baby Beat 92 Downtown Funk 93 Wahoo Groove 94 Rap Anthem 95 Breath Rap 96 Now Hip Hop Jazz Blues 97 BlueEyesBand 98 OrganSwingMedium 99 OrganJazzFast 100 Gold Swing 101 Swingin 102 Cool Big Band 103 Breezy Swing 104 Biggest Band 105 Midnight SISwing 106 Big Band Slow 107 Big Band Medium 108 Big Band Fast 109 Swing Medium 110 Swing Fast 111 Jz Guitar Swing 112 Pop Swing 113 Slow Jz Waltz 114 Cool Soul 115 Soul 116 Sweet Blues 117 Cool Blues 118 Over Rockin 119 UK Rock N 120 Baby Rock N 121 Go Rock N 122 Blue Boogie 123 Rock N Slow Ball Room 124 Gold Wien Waltz 125 Gold Slow Waltz 126 It Valzer 127 Moon Waltz 128 Alpenwalzer 129 Polca Disco 130 It Polca 131 Paso Doble 132 Gold Tango 133 Cool Tango CCOO CC32 66 28 66 32 66 11 66 27 66 21 66 26 66 34 66 33 66 6 66 10 66 9 66 7 66 8 66 13 5 1 5 2 5 46 5 47 5 44 5 43 5 42 28 21 28 22 28 19 28 17 28 18 33 13 33 14 66 16 12 41 12 4 12 43 12 44 12 45 12 46 14 25 14 24 12 35 14 18 14 19 14 20 12 31 12 32 L 37 12 38 17 28 44 30 44 26 44 1 44 2 5 56 5 51 10 39 5 36 5 38 5 35 1
298. t For the explanation of these parameters please refer to page 104 Edit Song Parts The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using MENU button gt MIDI gt Edit Song Parts Edit Song Farts Ta or Ta Ch Tx Shift S Tx Local On Tx Event i Rx Off Rx Ch eat a CURSOR Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the part you want to edit Part 1 16 Press the ENTER SELECT button The display now shows the settings for the selected part Tx Tx Ch Tx Shift Tx Local Tx Event For the explanation of these parameters please refer to page 104 Rx Rx Ch Rx Shift Rx Limit Low High Rx Event For the explanation of these parameters please refer to page 104 105 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options Edit System Sync The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using MENU button gt MIDI gt Edit System Basic Rhythm NTA Parameters visual Control Tx Ch L The Edit System group contains the following parameters Edit System Explanation Sync These parameters are used to synchronize external MIDI devices See below Basic The parameters of this group affect the BK 5 s Basic channel The Basic channel is used to receive and transmit Program Change and Bank Select messages for selecting Performances as well as for the reception and transmission of other kinds of messages that are not directly
299. t No Name CCoo CC32 PC No Name EDD ZC PC No Name HOH CC3Z PC 0654 Techno Saw 47 4 82 0729 Bass amp Lead 0 4 88 0803 Mystic Pad 6 4 104 0655 JP DoubleSaw 13 4 82 0730 Fat amp Perky 2 4 88 0804 Echo Drops 0 4 103 0656 JP SuperSaw 15 4 82 0731 Delayed Lead 7 4 88 0805 Rotary Strng 3 4 90 0657 CS Saw 30 4 82 0732 Pulse Wave 1 80 2 82 0806 Stack Pad 9 4 90 0658 MG Saw Lead 31 4 82 0733 Pulse Wave 2 81 2 82 0807 Sweep Stack 13 4 96 0659 Oct Saw Lead 35 4 82 0734 80 sTechLead 82 2 82 0808 Sweep Pipe 12 4 96 0660 Chiffer Lead 0 4 84 0735 HollowReleas 4 4 100 0809 SawsSweep 4 4 96 0661 LM Pure Lead 4 83 Pad Ethnic 0810 Stray Pad 15 4 96 0662 JUNO Rave 3 4 88 0736 Warm Pad 0 4 90 0811 Anklung Pad 3 4 97 0663 LA Brass Ld 22 4 85 0737 LA Warm Pad 82 4 90 0812 Tine Pad 1 4 94 0664 Big Fives 1 4 87 0738 Attack Pad 83 4 90 0813 Hols Strings 4 4 98 0665 SequenceSaw3 46 4 82 0739 Human Pad 10 4 90 0814 Clavi Pad 8 4 97 0666 Euro Dance 1 80 4 88 0740 Thick Matrix 1 4 90 0815 Galaxy Way 18 4 104 0667 Crispy Lead 84 4 88 0741 Sine Pad 4 90 0816 Rising OSC 19 4 104 0668 LM Blow Lead 9 4 83 0742 JP Soft Pad 13 4 90 0817 Noise Peaker 6 4 92 0669 Xpressive 83 4 88 0743 Stacked Pad 45 4 90 0818 Etherality 5 4 104 0670 Raver Blade 82 4 88 0744 Warm JP STR 47 4 90 0819 Reso Stack 10 4 91 0671 Square Wave 0 4 81 0745 Warm Sgu Pad 46 4 92 0820 Techno Stack 11 4 91 0672 Mellow FM 3 4 81 0746 JP8 Hollow 44 4 92 0821 TwinOct Rave 13 4 91 0673 Shmoog 5 4 81 0747 Square P
300. t to save the edited list Backing Keyboard BK 5 Adding pictures to the music 12 Adding pictures to the music You can connect an external display or a television to the BK 5 and use It to watch a slide show a notation or video footage from another device connected to the BK 5 Displaying photos automatically The BK 5 can display photos in succession You can have the photos switch automatically somewhat like watching a movie In addition you can choose a picture which will be used as background on an external screen Enjoying a VIMA TUNES slide show You can watch a slide show while listening to a song on an optional VIMA TUNES CD ROM produced for the VIMA series Songs on VIMA TUNES CD ROMs provide slide show images suitable for each song making it easy for you to enjoy a slide show without having to provide your own photos Connect an external screen to the BK 5 see p 18 Connect an optional CD player to the BK 5 s USB MEMORY port Insert the desired VIMA TUNES CD ROM into the CD drive VIMA TUNES songs are sold on CD ROMs available from your Roland dealer The BK 5 now displays a list of the songs on the CD ROM If you don t see that list press the USB MEMORY button 4 Select the song you want to play back by first rotating the CURSORWALUE dial and then pressing the ENTER SELECT button to confirm your selection The USB MEMORY button s indicator lights 5 Press the START STOP
301. t 1 CPT O while the To values are set to include the entire track 9 Set Location to Destination The following parameters are displayed Location Destinations Track ADrum Mode Major Division Introl Into Bar 001 Into Beat Dl Into Cpt 000 Copy Mode Mis LI lt wer E were 3 mm Parameter Explanation Location Source Desti Allows you to select nation the rhythm whose tracks you wish to copy Source to another rhythm Des tination Track ADrums Acc6 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit Select ALL only to replace all tracks Mode Major Minor Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Division Intro 14 Use this parameter to Main 154 Fill select the Division you Dwn 1 3 Fill want to edit Up 1 3 End 104 Into Bar The Into position indicates where the Into Beat beginning of the source excerpt will be Into CPT after the copy operation To copy the source data to the beginning of the destination track select BAR 1 BEAT 1 and CPT 0 Copy Mode Replace The data in the selected range of the source track overwrite the destination track Mix The data in the selected range of the source track are added to the data on the des tination track Copy Times 12999 Allows you to to spec ify the number of cop les to be made Select 1 to copy the excerpt only once 10 Set Copy Mode to Replace or Mix 11 12 13
302. t functions 47 IF you select RENAME AA 47 Ii you select gege 48 If you select Make New List 48 Editing Performance memories 48 Delete PEO MIE E ae roua NBA at ati 49 Saving the edited Performance List 49 12 Adding pictures to the music 50 Displaying photos automatically 50 Enjoying a VIMA TUNES slide show 50 Enjoying a slide show of your own pictures 50 Using one of your own pictures as background 51 13 Recording your performance as audio data 52 PE CORONINI iaia i da a i ae e side 52 Listening to your recordin 32 24 ata e ac n hha 53 Saving your recording as an audio file 53 14 lock functions 54 Switching the locks on and off 54 15 Menu 0ptions cece eee eee eee 55 General PFOCEOM Ss aaa e ati aaa e de 55 CEE HE 55 CMI VCS eat APP PAP PP PP PP AA 56 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Performance Edit parameters 56 Tone Part Vie El 56 Tone Part MEX para Meter Si asaza aaa ae a aaa aaa a 60 TAYE Paris EE 61 Ee 61 LO AA 62 Arranger Setting parameterS 62 Melody Intelligent parameters 64 Save OD casa ca pt iu ui a a ca aa 65 Global parameters 65 EE e a A Au ia a cc aaa 70 Olea E EE 70 Mastering VOOlSiic ae ven neta AA 71 COMPIESSOT
303. tch Tx Whenever you mute or un mute a part on the Rhythm Parts page the BK 5 transmits an NRPN message that describes your action Not sending this message may be useful to keep your external sequencer from recording it or the receiving GS module from muting the part assigned to that MIDI channel Parameter Setting Part Switch Tx Off On Rx Switches the reception of MIDI messages on the Basic channel on or off Parameter Setting Rx Off On Rx Channel Use this parameter to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the Basic channel Parameter Setting Rx Channel 1 16 Performance PC Rx This parameter is used to enable or disable the recep tion of program change and bank select messages related to Performance selection Parameter Setting Performance PC Rx Off On Master Volume Rx Allows you to enable or disable the reception of Mas ter Volume messages that would change the BK 5 s overall volume This is an exclusive message common to all newer MIDI devices Parameter Setting Master Volume Rx Off On Part Switch Rx Whenever you mute or un mute a part on the Rhythm Parts page the BK 5 transmits an NRPN message that describes your action You can keep the BK 5 from responding to such messages to avoid that external instruments mute its parts Parameter Setting Part Switch Rx Off On TO Backing Keyboard BK 5 Menu options Rhythm The following parameters ar
304. ter list looks slightly different than for instruments that do not use a Drum Set Drum Sets are special Tones that assign different sounds to most keys note numbers allowing you and the BK 5 to play realistic drum and percussion parts In the following T refers to parameters that are only available for regular instruments also called Tones while D refers to parameters that are only available for Drum Sets The following parameters are available Tone T Drum D Allows you to select a different Tone within the active Tone family See page 119 for a list of available Tones and Drum Sets While selecting a Tone you can press a TONE button to select a different family Parameter Explanation Tone T The number of Tones depends on the Drum D selected family Mute T Drum Mute D Switches the selected instrument off The corre sponding part is no longer played back This setting only applies to the selected instrument and thus not necessarily to the entire track In the case of the drums you can mute two instrument groups Drum Mute and Perc Mute see below sepa rately Parameter Setting Mute T Drum Mute D Off On Solo Switches off all instruments except the selected instrument Parameter Setting Solo Off On Perc Mute D Suppresses or adds the percussion sounds used by the drum part Parameter Value Perc Mute Off On Volume Adjusts the
305. terial damage should the unit be used improperly Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets e Do not open or modify in any way the unit or its AC adaptor e Do not attempt to repair the unit or replace parts within it except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland dis tributor as listed on the Information page e Never install the unit in any of the following locations e Subject to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight E in an enclosed vehicle near a heating duct on top of S a CP heat generating equipment or are Ng e Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are e Exposed to steam or smoke or are e Subject to salt exposure or are e Humid or are e Fxposed to rain or are e Dusty or sandy or are e Subject to high levels of vibration and shakiness e Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is level and sure to remain stable Never place it on stands that could wobble or on inclined surfaces e Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with the unit Also make sure the line voltage at the installation matches the input voltage specified on the AC adaptor s body Other AC adaptors may use a different polarity or be designed for a differe
306. that allows you to record one part and copy it to up to three Modes each The sign means that more than one pattern will be recorded Every rhythm pattern must have a set length Setting the Measure Length value now will help you avoid a lot of confu sion once you start recording The Arranger tends to add blank bars at the end of a track which is usually due to the fact that you stopped recording a little late i e after the last bar you played This means that you often record 5 measures instead of 4 for example If you press START STOP after bar 4 Ed le SE a your rhythm looks like this 5 bars Furthermore in Rhythm Composer mode all patterns are looped and played back until you press the START STOP button A wrong number of measures 5 rather than 4 for example is very likely to put you off so do take the time to set the pattern length before you start recording Recording a rhythm pattern 1 Press the START STOP button BK 5 um mm KA a _ Di n m IPE Depending on the count in setting the metronome now counts down after which recording starts If you need a metronome during your performance press the TAP TEMPO button while the main Rhythm Composer page is displayed If you also need the metronome while listening to what you have recorded select another metro nome mode see Mode on p 67 Rhythm Camp Broken Dance
307. the C that value is added to or subtracted from all Cs C1 C2 C3 etc 50 means that the note in question is tuned a quarter tone down One Touch Hold This parameter can be selected using MENU button gt Global One Touch Hold Onetouch Hold CURSOR The parameters on this page allow you to filter cer tain One Touch settings Select On for the settings you do not want to load along with the remaining One Touch settings when you press a ONE TOUCH button Parameter Setting Tempo Off On Tone Part Off On Intro Ending Off On Variation Off On Expression Pedal Off On Performance Hold This page can be selected using MENU button gt Global gt Performance Hold Performance Hold KEN CURSOR The parameters on this page allow you to filter cer tain Performance settings Select On for the set tings you do not want to load along with the remain ing settings when you select a Performance memory Parameter Setting Rhythm Off On Tempo Off On Expression Pedal Off On Tone Off On Tone Part Off On Split Off On Lower Octave Off On Arr Type Off On Key Off On Bass Inversion Off On a b c These parameters can also be switched by pressing and hold ing the assigned buttons on the front panel See the Hold to LOCK legends Metronome These parameters can be selected using MENU but ton Global gt Metronome Metr
308. the last event of the long est track when you select All Parameter To Beat To CPT Resolution Strength From Note To Note Setting 1 number of beats per bar 0 119 1 4 1 8 1 8T 1 16 1 16T 1 32 1 32T 1 64 0 0 100 0 0 C 127 G9 0 C 127 G9 Explanation Specifies the beat posi tion The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signa ture Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit opera tion should not end exactly on the selected beat This parameter sets the resolution of the Quantize function Be sure to always select the value of the short est note you recorded Otherwise your part no longer sounds the way you played it because shorter notes are shifted to the wrong positions Use this parameter to specify how precise the timing correction should be 0 means that the selected Res olution value is not applied 0 correc tion while 100 means that all notes are shifted to the mathematically correct positions This parameter allows vou to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified From To time range This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified From To time range Press the WRITE button its indicator flashes to confirm your settings and ed
309. the file type you selected File Type Function Explanation Rhythm e Mute The specified rhythm track s is muted Default AC1 lt AC6 SMF Track Mute The specified Standard MIDI file track is muted Default channel 4 Audio Center Cancel Sounds in the center the mp3 melodic portion of the Wav sound will be minimized For some audio songs the vocal sound may not be elimi nated completely 4 Press the TRACK MUTE CENTER CANCEL button again to make its indicator go dark This switches the Track Mute or Center Cancel function back off Selecting the track s to mute for rhythms or SMF songs The following procedure allows you to specify the track of the selected Standard MIDI File that should be muted when you switch on the TRACK MUTE button This function is not available for audio files Select a rhythm or an SMF song Press and hold the TRACK MUTE CENTER CANCEL button This function can also be selected using MENU but ton gt Global gt Rhythm SMF Track Mute Depending on the file type the display changes to rac ecas ll x5Lanteass acer A 5422122 ra acc m erezie nees tl eet er Acea MIMI SWEEF Pine ace zue aces MINI xeresswe Of SMF Track Mute 1 III 1aszicriano MII Fin aer eo ez HaturalFiano 4 ml Fem Mm Zrt E All Skate E III mae E 7 SlowStrin352 French Horns 3 HaturalFiano 10 III Mew Por 11 III SlowStrin352 L
310. the procedure described above can be burned into the rhythm song file using the Freeze Data command see p 79 Doing so will allow you concert hall to hear those changes on any sequencer software you use Changes you don t freeze are nevertheless stored when you save the edited rhythm song file but only the BK 5 can read them Plate This algorithm simulates the acoustics of a Delay A delay effect no reverb Works a lot like an echo effect and thus repeats the sounds Pan Delay This is a stereo version of the above delay effect It creates repetitions that alternate between the left and right channels Instrument To edit the Instrument parameters use MENU button gt Makeup Tools gt Instrument Chorus Type Chorus broadens the spatial image of the sound and creates a stereo impression You can choose from 8 types of chorus Instrument Setting Meaning i Original The song uses its own programmed e chorus settings Chorus These are conventional chorus effects EEE RE 4 14 that add spaciousness and depth to the New Pap d sound Tn DE Fok Chorus This is a chorus with a flanger like effect and a soft sound The display now shows all instruments used by the selected rhythm or SMF song Flanger This is an effect that sounds somewhat like a jet airplane taking off and landing Rotate the CURSOR VALUE to select the er aa instrument you want to change then press ShortDly This is a full f
311. to create a new Performance List whose name is selected automatically by the BK 5 If you are happy with that name proceed with step 4 below Otherwise lt 3 Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the desired character then use the TONE buttons You can press the NUMERIC button to switch between upper and lower case characters as well as numbers The LWR button can be used to delete the selected character The UP2 button allows you to insert a character Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to select the next character position you want to change then use the TONE buttons again Repeat steps 1 and 2 above to complete the name 4 Press the WRITE button to create the new Performance List which is currently empty If the USB memory already contains a file of the name you have entered the display asks you whether it is OK to overwrite the other Performance List file In that case select YES to replace the other Perfor mance List file with the one you want to create Select NO to return to the page where you can change the name Then press the ENTER SELECT button The display returns to the page where the Perfor mance Lists are displayed and the newly created list is highlighted The new Performance List file is saved to the My Perfor mances folder on the USB memory If this folder doesn t vet exist it will be created automatically Editing Performance memories Whenever the display shows
312. ton is lit the melody of the MIDI files will be muted Switch it off Is the external amplifier or other device used with the BK 5 con nected to a different AC power outlet Connect the amplifier or other device to the same AC outlet as the BK 5 Is the song in a format that the BK 5 is able to read The BK 5 may be receiving on a MIDI channel on which the MIDI controller doesn t transmit Correct the MIDI controller s transmit channel Are you using an optional Roland USB memory M UF series Reliable performance cannot be guaranteed if you use non Roland USB memory products Check the format of your USB memory The BK 5 can use USB memory that has been formatted as FAT If your USB memory was formatted using any other method please re format it using the BK 5 Could the USB memory be write protected Is there sufficient free space on the USB memory Are you using an optional Roland USB memory M UF series Reliable performance cannot be guaranteed if you use non Roland USB memory products Is there sufficient free space on the USB memory Page 16 56 61 65 42 34 111 15 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Troubleshooting The external screen remains dark Did you connect it to the VIDEO OUTPUT socket 18 Did you switch on your TV or external screen and did you select the correct channel See the TV s or screen s owners manual for how to select the channel that corresponds to the video input to whi
313. trument in question 0 means that the recorded velocity values are left untouched neg ative values reduce all velocity values by the same amount leaving differences between notes intact while positive settings increase all velocity values Parameter Setting Velocity 12798127 Cut Off This filter parameter allows you to make the selected sound darker or brighter Positive settings mean that more overtones are allowed to pass so that the sound becomes brighter The further this value is set in the negative direction the fewer overtones will be allowed to pass and the sound will become softer darker Characteristics of a low pass filter Setting Frequency Cutoff frequency Parameter Setting Cut Off 12 5 127 For some sounds positive Cut Off settings will cause no noticeable change because the preprogrammed Cut Off parameter is already set to its maximum value Resonance This is a parameter one invariably associates with a synthesizer When the Resonance value is increased the overtones in the area of the cutoff frequency will be emphasized creating a sound with a strong char acter Parameter Setting Resonance 127 7127 For some sounds negative Resonance settings may produce no noticeable change because the resonance is already set to the minimum value The following parameters allow you to set the sound s envelope The envelope parameters affect both the volume TVA
314. ttings 54 DOG bissare AA dea aa 71 BP seta a paawa NA 31 35 Break Mute 69 Brightness 65 E AA C E NEE 60 SEI 26 EE 26 NEEN 67 CANCE listo egen see 42 68 Change Gate TIME ean sa c ae e tea 94 E EEN 94 Characterset 70 Chord recognition 62 Chord View 68 erte VEER 56 76 82 KEE 75 a se te pi MANE al Ec 61 Y ect kena KA cica 75 NEE 72 O DO ors ts at Da incat na egal 106 CONSCI se as sere aa ana edu 59 Common 74 Compressor 71 LONDON IA 17 Connecting MIDI 17 OM IS E cn acte ei e or esti i E ut 65 Control Pedal 18 CO Kan ee Eege 91 ENG Lore saci ina at mh d x 102 leie EEN 92 Countin 67 CP RE 97 Create BEEN 101 LUGON est ege 59 76 D Data IK 90 Data Change 109 Mee 60 77 REI 65 DONG seitan 96 100 DOING Mee IRI e 75 Vibrato 60 Delete Performance 48 Performance List 48 Rhythm Composer 90 TEE een 21 DOOM sote ai pia e 60 Display 22 Brightness 65 Contrast 65 BINI AA EA 83 Her EE 17 Drum Ek EE 76 Drum Instrument 78 DURO AA 125 ROU 57 E BEEN 63 Belt 48 ER 78 79 Rhythm Parts 104 Song Parts 105 System 106 ToneParts 105 Effect NIAN 61 78 EO Part
315. u to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the opera tion applies to all tracks Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit This parameter sets the amount by which the duration or gate time of the selected notes is to change The shortest possible Gate Time value is 1 used for all drum notes so that selecting 1000 for notes with a Gate Time value of 1 in the specified time range still leaves you with the same value Use this parameter rather than Bias to produce proportional changes to the affected Gate Time values Values below 100 decrease the duration while any thing above 100 increases it Select 100 if you prefer to work with the Bias parameter see above Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Rhythm Composer programming your own rhythms Parameter Setting Explanation From Note 0C 127 G9 From Note refers to To Note the lower limit of the note range you want to change To Note represents the upper limit Press the WRITE button its indicator flashes to confirm your settings and edit the data WE Global Change This function allows you to make quick changes to certain settings The changes always apply to entire tracks you cannot use Global Change for just a few measures You can apply global changes to the four editable rhythms track parameters Expr
316. uitaron 48 4 33 0293 Bassic Needs 83 4 39 0366 ChamberStr 4 49 0219 Chung Ruan 24 4 28 0294 SynthBass101 1 4 39 0367 Velo Strings 24 4 49 0220 Fingered Bs 4 34 0295 Synth Bass 1 0 4 39 0368 Mild Strings 7 4 49 0221 AttackFinger 6 4 34 0296 JP 4 Bass 3 4 39 0369 Trem Str St 0 4 45 0222 5String Bs 83 4 33 0297 CS Bass 2 4 39 0370 StringsSpic 17 4 46 0223 X 5String Bs2 83 2 33 0298 Tekno Bass 10 4 39 0371 SuspenseStr 9 4 45 0224 Jazz Bass 1 4 34 0299 Echo SynBass 7 4103 0372 St Slow Str 10 4 50 0225 Jazz Bass 2 3 4 34 0300 Reso SH Bass 16 4 39 0373 St Slow Str2 11 4 50 0226 Rock Bass 4 4 34 0301 Rubber303 Bs 14 4 39 0374 Slow Strings 10 5 49 0227 Heart Bass 5 4 34 0302 TB303 Bass 9 4 39 0375 SlowStrings1 0 4 50 0228 Baby Bass 48 4 34 0303 TB303 DistBs 18 4 39 0376 SlowStrings2 1 4 50 0229 Double Pick 4 4 35 0304 TB303 Sgr Bs 17 4 39 0377 SlowStrings3 2 4 50 0230 Picked Bass 0 4 35 0305 Clavi Bass 19 4 39 0378 Slow Tremolo 8 4 45 0231 Picked Bass2 1 4 35 0306 Jungle Bass 21 4 39 0379 StraightStr 10 4 52 0232 Picked Bass3 2 4 35 0307 Square Bass 22 4 39 0380 Warm Strings 9 4 50 0233 Picked Bass4 3 4 35 0308 Arpeggio Bs 24 4 39 0381 Legato Str 8 4 50 0234 Fretless Bs1 0 4 36 0309 AtkSineBass 34 4 39 0382 Bright Str 1 1 4 49 0235 Fretless Bs2 1 4 36 0310 OB sine Bass 35 4 39 0383 Bright Str 2 4 4 49 0236 Fretless Bs3 2 4 36 0311 303SqDistBs 41 4 39 0384 Bright Str 3 5 4 49 0237 Fretless Bs4 3 4 36 0312 E Bass Harm 24 4 32 0385 Orchestra 1 9 4 49 0238 Wood
317. upplied PSB 7U AC adapter here page 16 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Shortcut list 4 Shortcut list Pressing and holding the following buttons or button combinations allows you to directly jump to a related parameter page which is faster than selecting the page in question via the BK 5 s menu Some of these buttons activate a lock func tion page 54 Press and hold RHYTHM FAMILY buttons TAP TEMPO pa HOLD TO LOCK AUDIO KEY HOLD TO LOCK TRACK MUTE E CENTER CANCEL LWR UP2 Function Locks the rhythm to keep it from changing when you select another Per formance memory Locks the tempo setting to keep it from changing when you select another Performance memory After activating record standby mode the indicator flashes pressing and holding this button will cancel that mode use it if you don t want to record after all Locks the key setting to keep it from changing when you select another Performance memory Opens the Rhythm Track Mute or Song Track Mute page Opens the display page that shows which Tone is currently selected for the Lower part Opens the display page that shows which Tone is currently selected for the Upper2 part Simultaneously pressing the LWR and UP2 buttons without holding 2 5 them opens the display page where you can set the volume of the Upper1 Upper2 and Lower parts TOUCH ee Opens the One Touch Edit page TELL n O
318. ute CajonHi CajonHiFlm Cajon Low CajonLoFlm FImncoHClap1 FImncoHClap1 BongoCowBell AfHey MamboCowBell MexFVox2 AfFoots MexFVox1 MexMVox1 YodelFVox1 MexMVox2 YodelMVox1 MexMVox3 FImncoFVox1 YodelFVox2 FImncoFVox2 NewWhistle1 FImncoFVox3 NewWhistle2 FImncoMVox1 FImncoMVox2 BrazilVox1 FImncoMVox3 BrazilVox2 BrazilVox3 AfAahhh Voice Snare Voice Snare PC41 CC32 4 Brush Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause Brush Swirl Brush Tap Brush Slap1 Brush Slap2 Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Long Swirl Jazz Snare 1 Jazz Snare 2 Std 1 Snare1 Std 1 Snare2 Std 2 Snare Std 2 Snare2 Tight Snare StandrdSnar1 LD Snare M LD Snare C Room Snare 1 Room Snare 2 Dance Snare1 Power Snare1 Rev Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare 3 PC 42 CC32 4 Brush 2 Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause Jazz Snare1 Jazz Snare2 Brush Swirl Brush Tap Brush Slap1 Brush Slap2 Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Long Swirl Jazz Snare 1 Jazz Snare 2 Std 1 Snare1 Std 1 Snare2 Std 2 Snare1 Std 2 Snare2 Tight Snare StandrdSnar1 LD Snare M LD Snare C Room Snare 1 Room Snare 2 Dance Snare1 Power Snare1 Rev Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec Snare 3 Backing Keyboard BK 5 Drum Sets PC 43 CC32 4 Brush 2 L R 0 C1 1 1f 2 DI 3 D 1 ma 5 EI o gt Dn iji 7 G 1 8 G4 1 amp 9 A
319. ve Woodblock Woodblock MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Castanets Mute Surdo PC 102 CC32 4 IndoMix2 HipHop Kick1 Jazz Kick 1 Mex Kick Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Synth Drum 2 Synth Drum 2 St Snare2 Synth Drum 2 NewJzSn1 Synth Drum 2 RockSnare2_2 Synth Drum 2 Rm Kick 2 Snare Ghost1 Rm Snare 2 FingerSnaps2 Rm Snare 1 Room Tom 5 Room Tom 5 Room Tom 2 TR707 Hihat C Room Tom 2 ConcertKick HipHop Kick2 TR 909 Kick2 Side Stick House Snare 909 HandClap Elec Snare 2 808 Tom 2 TR 808HiHatC 808 Tom 2 JazzClosedHH 808 Tom 2 JazzOpenHH 808 Tom 2 808 Tom 2 808 Crash Bend tlk_drm Tabla Ge Hi Tabla_Tun Tabla_Na Tambourine Bongo2_SW2 808 Cowbell 909 Crash Pop Kick 36 PopSnare38 1 Bongo High CR78 LoBongo 808 Conga NewCongaOp NewLoConga High Timbale Bongo SW P1 Bongo SW P2 Bongo SW P3 Bongo SW P4 808 Maracas Gamelan Gong LongWhistle Quide1 Quide2 Claves Woodblock Bongo1_SW3 Mute Cuica Congas_8 P1 CongaLoOpen_P1 CongaLoOpen_P2 CongaLoOpen_P3 CongaLoOpen_P4 PC 103 CC32 4 IndoMix3 Pop Cymbal2 Pop Ride1 R amp B Snare R amp B Clap Techno Snare House Snare Jungle Snare Ps Snare 909 Snare 909Snare2 909 Kick 3 House Kick TR 808 Kick 909 Kick 909 Kick2 TR 909 OHHsh TR 909 OHH Ah Ha ShutHa ShutHi One Two Three Four SnareFlam FingerSnaps2 High Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Synth Drum 2
320. ver climb on top of nor place heavy objects on the unit N e Never handle the AC adaptor or its plugs with wet hands 7 when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or W this unit e Before moving the unit disconnect the AC adaptor and all cords coming from external devices e Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet see p 20 e Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet Backing Keyboard BK 5 Important notes ER Important notes In addition to the items listed under Using the unit safely on p 4 please read and observe the following Power supply Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter such as a refrigerator washing machine microwave oven or air conditioner or that contains a motor Depending on the way in which the electrical appliance is used power supply noise may cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet connect a power supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long hours of consecutive use This is normal and is not a cause for concern Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or
321. way to change the volume balance of the Uppert Upper2 and Lower parts 1 4 DI Simultaneously press the LWR and UP2 buttons to call up the Parts Volume page BK 5 The Volume value of the last part you selected on the main page is already highlighted Farts Volume CURSOR Rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial to set the desired volume for that part 0 127 Press the UP2 button to select the UP Volume value Pressing it again selects the UP1 Volume value Repeat step 2 above Press the LWR button to select the LWR Volume value Repeat step 2 above You can also select the desired volume value by pressing the ENTER SELECT button rotating the CURSOR VALUE dial and pressing ENTER SELECT again I Press the EXIT button to return to the main page CA Roland 11 Performance Lists Performance Music Assistant Factory Songs info The Performance List is a list of up to 999 Performance memories Each Performance memory contains a refer ence to the desired rhythm or song and all settings you want to load along with that rhythm or song see Per formance Edit parameters on p 56 including settings like INTRO ENDING status selected VARIATION etc The Performance memories you create are saved to the selected Performance List This allows you to prepare one set of Performance memories for weddings another for corporate events a third for
322. which you strike the keys If you want to edit this setting you have to press the ENTER SELECT button to select the Key Touch page Mediurnk Min Value ab Max Value l2 CURSOR Use the CURSOR VALUE dial to select and set the desired parameter then press the ENTER SELECT button and rotate the CURSOR VALUE dial The following parameters are available Parameter Setting range Explanation Curve High Medium High Select this set Low Fixed ting for maximum expressiveness Even small variations of the force with which you strike a key produce audible changes The trade off is however that you have to strike the keys forcefully to reach the maximum volume Medium Medium velocity sensitivity The keyboard responds to velocity changes but the max imum volume can be obtained more easily than with high This is the default setting Backing Keyboard BK 5 Roland Performance Edit parameters Parameter Setting range Explanation Low Select this set ting if you are used to playing on an elec tronic organ or if you do not want velocity changes to bring about major volume changes Fixed Select this setting if all notes you play on the keyboard should have the same velocity value When you set this parame ter the Fixed value field can be edited Min Value 1 127 This parameter allows you to set the smallest velocity value with which you can trigger the
323. y back Parameter Setting Rhythm Start Stop Tx Off On Rhythm Clock Tx If you activate this option the rhythm playback sends MIDI Clock messages Parameter Setting Rhythm Clock Tx Off On SMF Start Stop Tx Similar to Rhythm Start Stop Tx but for songs Parameter Setting SMF Start Stop Tx Off On SMF Clock Tx Similar to Rhythm Clock Tx but for songs Parameter Setting SME Clock Tx Off On SMF Position Tx If you switch this parameter on the song playback sends Song Position Pointer SPP messages that indicate the current playback position Parameter Setting SMF Position Tx Off On Syne Rx This parameter is used to specify whether rhythm and song playback should be synchronized by an external MIDI device Parameter Setting Syne Rx Off On Mode Parameter Setting Mode Internal Auto MIDI Remote Internal Song or rhythm playback uses BK 5 inter nal tempo Auto A good setting for remote control of song or rhythm playback using a PK series dynamic MIDI pedal board for example If the BK 5 receives a MIDI Start message FA it waits for Clock messages that specify the tempo If those Clock messages are not received the BK 5 starts playback using its internal tempo If however Clock messages F8 follow after the Start message the BK 5 uses the external tempo MIDI Song or rhythm playback can be started or stopped with MIDI real time messages Start Stop
324. ym CR78 Cow 909 Crash Vibraslap Ride Cymbal CR78 HiBongo CR78 LoBongo 808 Conga 808 Conga 808 Conga High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa CR78 Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro CR78 Guiro CR78 Clv Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo CR78 M Beat CR78 M Beat 626 Shaker Jingle Bell PC30 CC32 4 TR 707 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 Kick 1 CR78 Kick 2 TR 606 Kick1 TR 707 Kick1 808 Kick TR 808 Kick 808 BassDrum TR 909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909Comp Kick TR 909 Kick2 HipHop Kick2 BassDrumSet TechnoKick1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three MC 500 Beep MC 500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell TR 707 Kick1 TR 707 Kick1 TR 707 Rim TR 707 Snare 707 Claps TR 707Snare2 TR 707 Tom TR 707HiHatC TR 707 Tom TR 707HiHatC TR 707 Tom TR 707HiHatO TR 707 Tom TR 707 Tom 909 Crash TR 707 Tom 909Ride Cymb ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym 808 Cowbell Crash Cymb2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Low Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa 808 Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo MuteTriangl OpenTriangl 626 Shaker Jingle Bell PC 26 CC32 4 TR 808 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 Kick 1 CR78 Kick 2 TR 606 Kick1 TR 707 Kick1 808 Kick TR 808 Kick 808 BassDrum TR 90

Roland BK-5 Electronic Keyboard User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents